HomeMy WebLinkAboutMay Park Improvements
Augusta Richmond GA
c
DOCUMENT NAME: (Y) A-'1 r A R.. \Z :L 'YY) pf<.O V ~ rn E. 40T S
DOCUMENT TYPE: C- DN I~I'\C'-
YEAR: 199~
BOX NUMBER: l.o
FILE NUMBER: ) ~ 9 Lf ~
NUMBER OF PAGES: ;;2 y ~
I
I'
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.1
.1
J:L */3~}lrj
SPECIFICATIONS
AND
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
FOR
MAY PARK
IMPROVEMENTS
Prepared For
AUGUSTA-RICHMOND COUNTY COMMISSION
. AUGUSTA, GEORGIA
Prepared By
JOHNSON, LASCHOBER & ASSOCIATES, P.c.
.:. ENGINEERS .:.OESIGNERS .:. CONSULTANTS .:.
1296 Broad Street, Augusta, GA 30901
AUGUST 1998 JLA JOB No. 42.706
A
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SPECIFICATIONS
AND
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
FOR
MAY PARK
. IMPROVEMENTS
Prepared For
AUGUSTA-RICHMOND COUNTY COMMISSION
AUGUSTA, GEORGIA
Prepared By
JOHNSON, LASCHOBER & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
.) ENGINEERS . DESIGNERS . CONSULTANTS.'
1296 Broad Street, ~ugusta, GA 30901
. .
AUGUST 1998 JLA JOB No. 42.706
ADDENDUM NO.2
September 10, 1998
RICHMOND COUNTY BOARD OF COMMISSIONERS
MAY PARK & FLEMING TENNIS CENTER
Please make the following part of the Plans and Specifications of Bid Item #98-171, County
Project No. 42.706:
The following are changes to the Project Specifications.
Item No. Description
1. The bidding period has been extended to 3:00 PM September 24, 1998. At such
time, bids will be opened and read aloud in Room 605.
2. Specification 16531 - SPORTS LIGHTING: Delete paragraph 2.3 TWO-LEVEL
LIGHTING CONTROLS-TENNIS COURTS.
3. Add the attached Specification Section 13126 - MASONRY BUILDING SYSTEMS.
4. Specification Section 01030 - Alternates, paragraph 3.1.A - 3.1.E to be deleted and
replaced with the following alternates:
A. Alternate No.1: Base Bid is Water Fountain and associated concrete pad
(approx. 70 sf). Add Alternate is to installS' wide concrete sidewalk from
pavilion area to Community Center.
B. Alternate No.2: Base Bid is to install asphalt shingles as roof finish on
Concession Building. Add Alternate is to install metal roofing finish to match
roof of pavilion.
C. Alternate No.3: Base Bid is to resurface existing Tennis Court 3, Demo Tennis
Court 4, grade and grass disturbed area, install net, new fence and wind screen.
Add alternate is to add parking lot, and sidewalk.
D. Alternate No.4: Add resurfacing of existing tennis courts 6, 7, 8, 9 & 10 as
detailed on the drawings.
-1-
K:\42706IADMlN\SPECSIADDOO2. WPD
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
The following are changes to the Project Drawings:
Item No.
Description
1. C1.1M Remove note to replace exterior doors at Community Center.
2. C1.2M Indicate that the amount of new fill material at each dugout is 5 Cu. Yds.
.Indicate that the amount of new fill material behind concession stand is 10
Cu. Y ds. Indicate that the amount of fill material at the tennis court and
Third Street is 10 Cu. Y ds.
3. S 1.lM Revise section 5 as shown on the attached sketch section Sa:. Revise
Section 6 as shown on the attached sketch section 6a. Revise section 9 as
shown on the attached sketch 9A. Revise section 12 as shown on the
attached sketch 12a. Revise section 17 as shown on the attached sketch
17a. Revise section 22 as shown on the attached sketch 22a. Revise
section 23 as shown on the attached sketch 23a.
4. E1.1M Delete new lighting for all Tennis Courts at May Park. Contractor shall
protect existing lighting.
5. Al.IM Add note to drawing: Contractor may construct Concession Stand in
accordance with Specification 13126 - MASONRY BUILDING
SYSTEMS. Details shown are similar. Construct building to the nominal
dimensions shown on Plan. Gable ends shall be 1/2" plywood with no. 15
felt and Prefinished Aluminum Siding. Soffits of eaves and overhangs
shall be Prefinished aluminum. Roof structure shall be prefabricated wood
trusses at 24" oc, 3/4" plywood, no. 30 felt and 25 year 3 tab fiberglass
shingle GAP Timberline or equal with fungicide.
6. A1.2M Add note to drawing: Contractor may construct Concession Stand in
accordance with Specification 13126 - MASONRY BUILDING
SYSTEMS. Details shown are similar. Construct building to the nominal
dimensions shown on Plan. Gable ends shall be 1/2" plywood with no. 15
felt and Prefinished Aluminum Siding. Soffits of eaves and overhangs .
shall be prefinished aluminum. Roof structure shall be prefabricated wood
trusses at 24" oc, 3/4" plywood, no. 30 felt and 25 year 3 tab fiberglass
shingle GAP Timberline. or equal with fungicide.
7. A1.3M Add note to drawing: Contractor may construct Concession Stand in
accordance with Specification 13126 - MASONRY BUILDING
SYSTEMS. Details shown are similar. Minimum Turned Down Footing
Width is 18", reinforced with 2 #5's top and bottom, wall dowels are #4's
-2-
K:142706\ADMIN\GENERALIADDOO2. WPD
-3-
K:\42706\ADMIN\GENERALIADDOO2. WPD
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
at 48" o.c. and at .all comers and edge of openings continuous or spliced
30" from footing to bond beam with 2 #4's continuous at 8'-0" bearing
height. Roof structure shall be prefabricated wood trusses at 24" oc, 3/4"
plywood, no. 30 felt and 25 year 3 tab fiberglass shingle GAF Timberline
or equal with fungicide.
END OF ADDENDUM
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
J'
e
e
e
.\()
e
c~ C1
c.
:j-
"
? e
\f\
e
G
\
PAN'
e
c
c c.
ra
D .D
L:=-~QU4:"L 10 LI-rHQNIAif V~I 2/7,1- ~r3I.. f6
--C ,yP I C,A L. F Qr<.. 3) '..
~LSc-rRI[AL PLAN
~C.A LE.: Y4 "-=. . II~O II.
SK~IC+t. -EI
SYMBOLS
o SURFACE MOUNTED FIXTURE OUTLET
S
SPST TOGGLE SWITCH 48" UP
F@ DUPLEX CONVIENCE OUTLET 48" UP
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PANEL TYPE: NQOD MOUN TING: SURF ACE PANEL LOCATION: CONCESSION
VOLTAGE 120/240 SERVICE 10 3 WIRE CABLES/0: #2 AWG
MINIMUM BREAKER INTERRUPTING CAPACITY (RMS SYM. AMPS.) 10.000
MAIN LOCATION: TOP
BUS RATING (AMPS): 100
MAIN BREAKER: lQQfl
I
I
DESIGNA TION BKR I~I~. TlJAn I
o A
lIGH TS-IN TERIOR 20/1 1 1000
.- 300
RECEPTACLES 20/1 :----
RECEPTACLES 20/1 5 lOOO
.-/ 1500
RECEPTACLES 20/1 ~
SCORING TOWER II GH TS 20/1 9 1200
~ 1200
SCORING TOWER RECEPTACLES 20/1 ~
TOTAL LOAD PER PHASE 6200
TOTAL AMPS PER PHASE 52
GD DETAIL PANEL C
WA IS IB
o R NO. BKR
----; 20/1
199o ~ 20/1
--6 20/1
1999. ~ 20/1
~ 20/1
800 /'
800 12 20/1
5600
47
DESIGNA TION
LIGHTS-EXTERIOR
WATER FOUNTAIN
RECEPTACLES
SPARE
PAVILlION LIGHTS
PAVILlION RECEPTACLES
I
I
I
SERVICE EN TRANCE RATED
I
Sk~1t.H
'(2,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.1
I
.1
~
J.
I r
I
t1\
~ ~
~ ~
~~
'W'
~ ~ ~
~ ~ ~
~ ~ \ll
f () t
i q ~
~ ~
2 ~ ~
~!
.J ~
~ \U."J
<l\!\~
I
,
l!:l:!:l:!:l:!I
mi~~
~
I CJ1
>-wlf)
o~..-
I-i='>t
o::w~
w~o
Q<(O
o::o~
r(
N<(
.:;:
Ow..-
20 .
_N
W(/)\
1-<( . U
U..........
ZZN
0::: ON
~U .
-I. ~
<(LOO
o:;:w
Ww
Z(/)
o
III
III
'-0:::
.W
0> ~
Z<(
0...
W N
I-W U
<(I- ..........
Z~---:'CX)
O::Uo....-
w >-
I-ZI- .
-JO,-"I-..-
CX;U ~N
o u
:s:ZW..........
W<(WN
Q)(/)N
..
Z
<(
I-
Z-I
.=> w .
00-1
Lo..O<(
~=>
0::: 0
W .W
I-U
<(Zo:::
:;:-0
Ul
:;::;:0
W<(LO
ZI;;)
\ rilf+ )
\01
'\ I
-.J
.
.
I!l!l!:!l!Z!I
~
~
IZIlSIlSIlI
0::
W
:;:-1
0<(
o...U
00::
wI-
I-U
<(w
U-l
OW
-JW
WW
0::: Ul
n
,0 'S(:
I-"'l"
>-WL()
O~O
I-i=CO
o::W~
W~O
Q<(O
O:::O~
z~<(
W .~
m>-~
W
W-IN
-J-I........
C)<("'-'
Z>O .
L{)-I
i7iII-<(
::>
. (/)-JO
CO<(WW
~mo
N<(Oet::
,-,,:;:~O
~
0...
>-
I-
'-"
~
(/)
'-0:::
.W
0>
Z<(
a..
w
I-W
<(I-
ZW
0::0:::
U
~Z .
-J01-
<(UW
o
O:;:W
OWW
<(Z(/)
..-
(/)
M
W
m
(/)0
ZI- 0 -
~(/)
. . ""7
I
>-
o
I-
et::
W
o
et::
>-
et::
<(
I-
Zo
<(I-
UlZ
:;:-
wet::
ZW
I-
W<(
i=:;:e,rj
O:;:w
I-W~
Z>
et:: CY.
OOw
I-ZUl
~<(C)
o:::o::Z
I-wi=
Z:;:Ul
OWX
UUlW
""-
.$ 3:
---- 0 ro (f) .
(f) W""-f-O
t3 t; LOO -.-J ~
. <( w 0:::
~Ul-.-J zlmI
~i.oo... Zq-o:::f-
"II:: 0 0
: I q-:oUII~
Oq-. f-u.---.:..
I 0....1 w~z-.iO
- ""->-Nm <(ow
'-3:f-10(f) o:::m
x .'-" f-000...25
.O>---i Z-.-J .
Of-<(W(f)i= ~.
(f)U-3: zOo oz
. (j~ono~
"cD U I I- :::> u- _ I I
ZUu--.-J .- :
1 0 <( ""-0 0 : 0'1
NUWf-Uf-xt"J,-"
I.
..O-,L
::
N
--
~
~ r--.
~~
x.~
::: \...
-'J
€:!
tC\
~I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
z I
<(
-l I
0....
Z I
0
I- 0
<( :+,1
0
.0 Z q-
""-
I ::J =1
N
N 0 -.-J
LL <(
U
I- (/)1
::J
0 I
I
'-'
::J I
0
@)I
<: .-
~ ui I
I
I
'ellJ (( 9:""-,9
.-
I/... c
::
0
~ I
... ~
~ r----
-
-
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
'I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
z
o
~
<(
>
W
--.J
W
~
~
o
I
C)
~
o
ellJ i'O ,L
"
HANDRAIL TO
MEET OSHA AND
LIFE SAFETY
STANDARDS
EL. 0'-0"
iI
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,I
i
,
II
I
I
I
T/CONC I
ELEVA TIO~
fPI<E-;::~N/5f1E{) '2 Z 6.4, 11"Op
, . ;<1/3 M TL. Oec/( SC/<€1#6//
T-a $TR('/Cr~RE. .(!< VN,.qR.. f=//V)
. .
.. ~ . .," -
- -, .'.------ - -., '-"-:- -. .......--r..--.--- - ~-:;:-'-
ill
I I
I I
I I
I
I I
I
I I
I I
I I
: I'
I I
I
J I
I I
I I
I I
I I
J I
I I
I I
I
I
J
I
I
I~
V\
~
~
"-
_ I.l
LO'"
I\\:)
r--..~
TUBULAR STEEL
COLUMN (TYP.)
r.s ~ .xc. >' 1"'7'
t3,e I ':X /2")( /2 I'
TY~
7'-6"
o
I
I"'"--
SCORING
TOWER
ELEV A TI ON
~
~
/;' ~ ~~. !~.- /, '--.
" ,
I
I
I
I
I
I
.1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I'
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I~
I
l' - 0"
2'-6" WIDE SHIPS
LADDER w / RAILING
II
I I
I I 0
L~ -
I
I-t
~
\J)
\?
~
"
~
It;
- ~ W8pa
r~
~
II\)
=(Q HANDRAIL 1 ~ W8)(1(".) t
_I TYPICAL 1
~ 1 ~)~. 1
_ ~ 1/1/$><10 rtJ
T 0-----0----0 T
4" THICK (TOTAL)
CONC. SLAB ON
1" DEEP x 24 GAGE
GAL V. FORM DECK w /
6x6-W2.1 x W2.1:W.W.F.
(SHEET TYPE) 1 1/2"
CLR, FROM TOP.
T/CONC. EL. +7'-0"
I
I.. .
SCORING
7'':'" 6"
I
-I
FRAMING
PLAN
TO WE R'
(@CflN
~ VJ
s:: )>
o
c
C)
I
o
C
-1
;0
o
o
.,.,
'1
;0
)>
~
Z
C)
-0
r
)>
Z
N
N
1-
o
-0
r--.cI)V\~
~~~~~::O::o)>
~~!.'\ !\\~O::O
-"" ~ ~ :Jf' 0 (")
~~~,~~.,:r:
~~'l:>~"":;;;::O-l
), ~ ~_ Nh. S rrl f'T1
,-' ~ "I :: ~ (") (")
~. ~~~~^-l
~ ~.~ ~ ~
~ )>
r
.1
3'_6"
I 3'-6"
WIt; ~~ .1
q
I.
I"
o
7'-0"
~
~
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
~
~
~
~
~
Cfl
-l
f'T1
f'T1
r
, .,
\' ::0
'"< )>
.~ s::
~ z
C)
~{
~~
""-../'>0<
~
~
~
I'
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 13126 - MASONRY BUILDING SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A This Section includes the following:
1. Structural framing and Prefabricated Wood Trusses
2. Roof shingles:
3. Concret Masonry Wall and Prefinished Aluminum Siding
4. Gypsum Board Ceilings. . .
5. Building components, as follows:
a. Personnel doors, frames, and hardware.
b. Service doors, frames, and hardware.
c. Windows.
d. Louvers, vents, and ventilators.
6. Accessories and trim. .
7. Plumbing Fixtures, Toilet Accessories
1.2 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A General: Provide a complete, integrated set of mutually dependent components and assemblies that form a
building system capable of withstaDding structural and other loads. thermally induced movement, and exposure
to weather without failure or infiltration of water into building interior.
B. Masonry Building System Design: Of size, spacing, slope, and spans indicated. and as follows:
1. Wall: Provide the following:
a. 8" anu reinforced with #4's at 48" OC, at comers, and edges of all openings. Splice length is 30".
b. Bond Beam at 8'-0" bearing with 2x6 treated wood nailier bolted to bond beam with 11.2" diameter
bolts at 6'-0" spacing
c. Bond beam Lintels to be reinforced with 2 #4's with 8" bearing each end
\
2. End-Wall GableFraming: Wood Truss Manufacturer's standard truss. as follows:
a. Provide cantilevered 2x6 treated wood stick framing at overhang.
3. Pre-engineered RoofT~ Framlng: Metal-plate-connected wood trusses include planar structural units
coosisting of meta1-plate-connected.members fabricated from dimension lUmber and cut and assembled
before delivery to Project site. .
4. Design trusses to wi~ design loads without deflections greater than the following:
a. Roof Trusses: V~cal deflection of 11.240 of span due to total load.
C. Engineering Responsibility: Engage a Trusss fabricator who uses a qualified professional engineer to prepare
. calculations, Shop Drawings, and other structural data for metal-plate-connected wood trusses.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and
profiles, and finishes for each type of the following metal building system components:
MASONRY BUll.DING SYSTEMS
13125 - 1
1. Roof Trusses
2. Shingles
3. Trim and closures.
4. Doors.
5. Windows.
6. Louvers in Gable.
7. Accessories and toilet accessories.
8. Plumbing Fixtures
9. Electrical Fixtures
B. Shop Drawings: For the following masonry building system components. Include plans, elevations, sections,
details, and attachments to other Work. .
1. For installed components indicated to comply with design loads, include structmal analysis data signed
and sealed by the qualified professional engineer respODSlble for their preparation.
2. Reinforcing Shop Drawings: Include location and diameter,.
3. Truss Shop Drawings: Shop Drawings detailing location. pitch. span, camber, configuration, and spacing
for each type of truss ~ species, sizes, and stress grades of lumber to be used; splice details; type,
size, material, finish. design values, and orientation and location of metal connector plates; and bearing
details.
4. Include truss Shop Drawings signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for
their preparation.
5. Personnel Door Schedule: Provide schedule of doors and frames, using the same reference nwnbersas
indicated 00 Drawings. Include details of reinfc:rcement and installation requirements for finish hardware.
a. Provide hardware schedule.
6. Accessory Drawings: Include plans, elevatons and details of toilet accessories, plumbing fixtures,
electrical fixtures. siding installation, and gable louvers.t
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
qualified according to ASTM E 329 to conduct the testing indicated. as documented according to ASTM E 548.
B. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for system's aesthetic
effects and performance cl1aracteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment,
and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining
coostruction. Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods
including preconstruction testing. field testing. or in-service performance.
C. Prein.~lation Confereoc:e: CoOOuct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division I Section
"Project Meetings. ·
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A Deliver components. sheets. panels, and other manufactured items so as not to be damaged or deformed. Package
materials for protection dwing transportation and handling.
B. Handling: Unload. store, and erect materials to prevent bending. warping, twisting, and surface damage.
C. Stack materials on platforms or pallets, covered with tarpaulins or other suitable weathertight and ventilated
covenng.
1.6 PROJECT CONDmONS
A Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when weather conditions permit roof installation to be
performed according to nianufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements.
MASONRY BUILDING SYSTEMS
13125-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B. Field Measurements: Verify masonsry building system foundations by field measw-ements.
1.7 COORDINATION
. 1 .
A Coordinate installation of all compOnents for complete weathertight structure.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 DIMENSION LUMBER
A Lumber Standards: Comply with DOC PS 20, W American Softwood Lwnber Standard., W and with applicable
grading rules of inspection agencies certified by ALSC's Board of Review.
B. Inspection A~es: Inspection agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them. include the following:
1. SPIB - Southern Pine Inspection Bw-eau.
C. Grade Stamps: Provide lumber wi1h each piece factory marked with grade stamp of inspection agency evidencing
compliance with grading rule requirements and identifying grading agency, grade, species. moisture content at
time of swfacing. and mill.
D. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, manufactured to actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture content
specified. to comply with requirements indicated below:
1. Provide dry lumber with 19 percent maximtUll moisture content at time of dressing.
E. Grade and Species: Provide visually graded dimension ltUllber for truss chord and web members, of the
following grade and species:
1. Grade for Chord Members: No.2.
2. Grade for Web Members: No.2.
3. Species: Southern pine giaded per SPIB rules.
F. Roof Sheathing: AP A-rated sheathing.
2.2 GYPSUM SHEATIDNG
A Gypsum ~thing Board: Water-resistant-<:ore gypsum sheathing 1?oard complying with ASTM C 79 with long
edges surfaced with water-repellent paper and as follows:
1. Type: X
2. Thickness: 518 inch (15.9 nun).
2.3 METAL DRIP EDGE: Brake-formed sheet metal with at least a 2-inch (SO-mm) roof deck flange and a 1-112-
. inch (3S-nun) fascia flange with a 318-inch (9.6-nun) drip at lower edge. Furnish the following material in
lengths of8 or 10 feet (2.5 to 3 m).
1. Material: Galvanized-steel sheets.
2.4 ASPHALT SHINGLES
A Colors. Blends. and Patterns: Where manufacturer's standard products are indicated, provide asphalt shingles
with the following requirements:
1. Match colors. textures, and patterns indicated by referencing manufacturer's standard designations for
these characteristics.
MASONRY BUILDING SYSlEMS
13125 - 3
B. Square-Tab, Fiberglass Strip Shingles: Mineral-surfaced. self-sealing. 3-tab. fiberglass-based, strip asphalt
. shingles. complying with both ASTM D 3018, Type r. and ASTM D 3462. Provide shingles with a Class A fire-
test-respoose classification that pass the wind-resistance-test requirements of ASTM D 316I.(GAF Timberline
25 year shingle or equal)
1. Fungus Resistant Provide shingles that have been surface treated to remain free of fungus and algae
growth, which adversely affects the appearance of the roo( for at least 5 years.
C. Hip and Ridge Shingles: Job-fabricated units cut from actual asphalt shingles used.
2.5 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
A General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows for each form of conCrete masonry unit required.
1. Provide special shapes roc lintels, comers, jambs, sash. control joints, ~, bonding. and other special
conditions.
2. Provide square-edged units for outside comers, except where indicated as bullnose.
B. Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 90 and as follows:
1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide unitS with minimwn average net-area compressive strength
indicated below:
a. 1900psi(13.IMPa).
2. Weight Classification: Lightweight
3. Provide Type II, nonmoisture-controlled units.
4. Size: Manufactured to the actual dimensions listed below (within tolerances specified in the applicable
referenced ASTM specification) for the corresponding nominal sizes indicated on Drawings:
a. 8 inch (200 nun) nominal: 7-5/8 inch (194 mm) actual.
5. Exposed Faces: Manufacturer's standard color and texture. unless otherwise indicated.
a. Where units are to be left exposed, provide color and texture matching the range represented by
Engineer's sample.
C. Decorative Concrete Masonry Units For All Exterior WaIls: ASTM C 90 and as follows:
1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive strength
indicated below:
a. 1900 psi (13.1 MPa).
2. Weight Classification: Lightweight
3. Provide Type II. nonmoisture-controlled units.
4. Size: Manufactured to dimensions indicated for nondecorative units.
5. Finish: Exposed faces oftbe following general description matching color (beige). pattern. and texture
of Engineer's sample.
a. Normal-weight aggregate, split-face finish.
2.6 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS
A Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91.
MASONRY BunnING SYSTEMS
13125 - 4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1. Type S
2. Mortar used in Decorative eMU shall be colored to match CMU.
B. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144; except for joints less than 1/4 inch (6.5 aun). use aggregate graded with
100 percent passing the No. 16 (1.18 mm) sieve.
C. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.
D. Water: Potable.
2.7 REINFORCING SlEEL
A Steel Reinforcing Bars: Material and grade as follows:
1.' Billet steel complying with ASTM A 615 (ASTM A 61SM).
a. Grade 60 (Grade 4(0).
B. Welded-Wire Fabric: ASTMA 185.
2.8 JOINT REINFORCEMENT
A General: Provide joint reinfori::ement formed from the following:
I. Galvanized carbOn-steel wire. coating class as follows:
a. ASTM A 153. Class B-2. for both interior and exterior walls.
B. Description: Welded-wire units prefabricated with deformed continuous side rods and plain cross rods into
straight lengths of not less than 10 feet (3 m). with prefabricated corner and tee units. and complying with
requirements indicated below:
1. Wire Diameter for Side Rods: 0.1483 inch (3.8 mm).
2. Wire Diameter for crosS Rods: 0.1483 inch (3.8 mm).
C. For single-wythe masonry. provide type as follows with single pair of side rods:
1. Truss design with cOntinuous diagonal cross rods spaced not more than 16 inches (407 mm) o.c. Space
joint reinforcing at 16" vertical spacing.
2.9 DOOR AND FRAME MAlERIALS
A Cold-Rolled Carbon-steel Sheet: ASTM A 366/A 366M or ASTM A 5681A s68M. matte finish. suitable for
exposed applications. and stretcher leveled or roller leveled to stretcher-leveled flatness. "
B. Hot-Rolled Carbon-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 568/A 568M or ASTM A 569/A 569M
C. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M. commercial qnality. with G60 (Z180) coating
designation; mill phosphatized.
D. Refer to Specification Section 13125 for addition81 door and hardware information
2.10 WINDOWS
A Refer to Specification Section 13.125 for additional Window information
1. Weather Stripping: Manufacturer's standard. applied to each operable sash.
2. Window Types. Grade. and Performance Class: Provide windows of the following type. grade. and
performance class according to AAMA 101:
MASONRY BUILDING SYSTEMS
13125 - 5
a. Horizontal Sliding Units: AAMA Grade and Performance Class HS-C20.
2.11 PLUMBING
A Refer to Specificaticn Section 13125 for additional' plwnbing information.. Provide vandal proof fixtures equal
to specified manufacture.
2.12 ELECTRICAL
A Refer to Specification Section 13125 for additional electrical information. Provide vandal proof fixtures equal
to specified manufacture.
2.13 ACCESSORIES
A Refer to Specificaticn Section 13125 paragraph 2.11 for additional . information. Provide vandal proof fixtures
equal to specified manufacture.
2.14 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A Gypsum Board Accessories: As required to finish edges to masonry construction.
B. Gypsum Board: Type X. of thicknesses indicated, complying with ASTM C 442 or ASTM C 36.
2.15 SIDING
A Formed Aluminwn Siding: Aluminwn siding and accessories complying with AAMA 1402. fabricated from
aluminwn sheet in alloy recommended by siding manufacturer, and as follows:
1. Horizontal Pattern: 10-inch (254-mm) exposure in Dutch-lap. double S-inch (I 27-mm) style.
2. Texture: Wood grain.
3. Thickness: 0.024 inch (0.6 mm) nominal.
4. Finish: Manufacturer's standard 2-coat PVC finish.
2.16 SOFFIT
A Aluminum Soffit: Aluminwn soffit complying with AAMA 1402. fabricated from aluminwn sheet in alloy
recommended by siding manufacturer, and as follows:
1. Pattern: 12-inch (305-mm) exposure in double 6-inch (1 52-mm) style.
2. Ventilation: Provide uopc::d'orated soffit at overhang.
3 . Ventilation: Provide perfcnted soffit at eave
4. Thickness: 0.024 inch (0.6 mm) nominal.
5. Finish: Manufacturer's standard 2-coat PVC finish.
2.17 SIDING ACCESSORIES
A Siding Accessories: Provide starter strips, edge trim. window head flashing. comer cap. and other items as
recommended by manufacturer for building configuration~ match type of siding.
B. Decorative Accessories: Provide the following types of decorative accessories as indicated:
1. Louvers.
2. F a.sciae.
C. Fasteners: Noncarosive aluminwn siding nails, in sufficient length to penetrate a minimwn of 1 inch (25 mm)
into substrate. Provide prefinished fasteners in color to match siding where face nailing is unavoidable.
2.18 FINISHES, GENERAL
MASONRY BUTI..DING SYSTEMS
13125 - 6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
A Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations
. for applying and designating finishes.
B. Appeataace afFinisbed WOOc: Variations in appeaaau<:e of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are
. within one-half of the range of approyed Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable.
Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples
and are assembled or installed to minimi7.e contrast
2. I 9 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A Contractor will employ an independent testing agency to perform source quality-control testing and special
inspections, and to prepare test reports.
1. Testing agency will conduct and interpret tests and state in each report whether test specimens comply
with or deviate from requirements for soil compaction and concrete strength.
B. Testing agency will report test i-esu1ts promptly and in writing to Contractor and Engineer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
\
3.1
A
3.2
A
B;
3.3
A
B.
. EXAMINATION
Examine substrates, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting
performance of the building system.
. PREPARATION
Clean substrates of substances, including oil, grease, rolling compounds, incompatible primers. and loose mill
scale, that impair bond of erection DlateriaIs.
Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare swfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's written instructions
for each particular substrate condition and as specified.
MASONRY INSTALLATION, GENERAL
Thickness: Build single-wythe walls to the actual thickness of the masonry units, using units of thickness
indicated.
Cut masonry units with motor-driven saws to provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units as required to
provide continuous pattfm and to fit adjoining construction. Use full-size units without cutting. where posstole.
Allow units cut with water-cooled saws to dry before placing, unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units
with cut surfaces and. where poSSlole, ~t edges concealed. .
C. Mix units for exposed unit masonry from several pallets or cubes as they are placed to produce uniform blend
of colors and textures.
3.4 MASONRY CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES
A Variationfrcm Plumb: For vertical lines and surfaces ofwaIIs. do not exceed 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m),
noc3J8 inch in 20 feet (10 mm in 6 m), nor 1/2 inch in 40 feet (12 mm in 12 m) or more. Forextemal comers,
expansion joints, control joints, and other conspicuous lines. do not exceed 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m),
nor 1/2 inch in 40 feet (12 mmin 12m) or more. For vertical alignment of head joints, do not exceed plus or
minus 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), nor 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.
B. Variation from Level: For bed joints and lines of exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal grooves, and other
MASONRY BUILDING SYSTEMS
13125 -7
conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), nor 112 inch in 40 feet (12 mm in 12 m) or
more. For top surface ofbearing walls, do not exceed 1/8 inch (3 mm) in 10 feet (3 m), nor 1/16 inch (1.5 mm)
within width of a single unit
c. Variation of Linear Building Line: For position shown in plan and related portion of columns, walls, and
partitions, do not exceed 112 inch in 20 feet (12 mmin6 m), nor 3/4 inch in 40 feet (19 mm in 12 m) or more.
D. Variation in Cross-Sectional Dimensions: For columns and thickness of walls, from dimensions shown, do not
exceed minus 1/4 inch (6 mm) nor plus 112 inch (12 mm).
E. Variation in Mcxtar-Joint Thiclmess: Do not vary from bed-joint thickness indicated by more than plus or minus
1/8 inch (3 nun), with a maximum thickness limited to 112 inch (12 mm). Do not vary bed-joint thickness from
bed-joint thickness of adjacent course by more than 1/8 inch (3 nun). Do not vary from head-joint thickness
indicated by more than plus or ininus 118 inch (3 mm). Do not vary head-joint thickness from adjacent head-joint
thiclc:ness by more than 1/8 inch (3 mm). Do not vary from collar-joint thickness indicated by more than minus
1/4 inch (6 mm) or plus 3/8 inch (10 mm). .
3.5 LAYING MASONRY WALLS
A Lay out walls in advance fer accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint widths and for accurate
locating of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid the use of less-than-half-size units at
comers, jambs, and where posstble at other locations.
B. Lay walls to comply with specified coostruction tolerances, with courses 8CCW1ltely spaced and coordinated with
other construction.
C. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Lay exposed masonry in the following bond pattern; do not use units with
less than nominal 4-inch (100-nun) horizontal face dimensions at comers or jambs. .
1. One-half running bond with vertical joint in each course centered on units in courses above and below.
D. Lay concealed masomy with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not less than 2 inches (50
nun). Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at comers. Do not use units with less than nominal 4~inch
(IOO-nun) horizontal face dimensions at comers or jambs.
E. Stopping and Resuming Work: In each course, rack back I12-unit length for ooe-halfrunning bond or 113-unit
length for one-third running bond~ do not tooth. Clean exposed surfaces of set masonry, wet clay masonry units
lightly if required, and remove loose masonry units and mortar prior to laying fresh masonry.
F. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build-in items specified un.der this and other Sections of the
Specifications. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.
G. Fill space between hollow metal frames and masonry solidly with mortar, tmless otherwise indicated.
H. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of meta1lath in the joint
below and rod mortar or grout into core.
I. Fill cores in hollow coocrete masonry units with grout 24 inches (600 nun) Wlder bearing plates, beams, lintels,
posts, and similar items, tmless otherwise indicated.
J. Build nonload-bearing interior partitions 8'.8".
3.6 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING
A Lay hollow concrete masomyunits as follows:
1. With full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells.
MASONRY BUilDING SYSTEMS
13 125 - 8
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2. Bed webs in mortar in starting course on footings and in all courses of piers. columns. and pilasters. and
where adjacent to cells'or ~vities'to be tilled with grout.., .. .
3. For starting course on fOotirigs where cells are not grouted. spread out full mortar bed. including areas
under cells.
4. Maintain joint widths indicated. except for minor variations required to maintain bond alignment If not
indicated. lay walls with 318-inch (lO-mm) joints.
B. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard. using a jointer 1arger than joint thickness, unless
otherwise indicated.
3.7 INSTALLATION OF REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY
A Grouting: Do not place grout tmtil entire height of masonry to be grouted has.attained sufficient strength to resist
grout pressure.
I. Do not exceed the following pour heights for coarse grout:
a. For minimum widths of grout spaces of2 inches (51 mm) or for minimtim grout space of hollow
unit cells of2-1/2 by 3 inches (63 by 76 mm). pour height of 60 inches (1524 mm).
3.8 ROUGH CARPENTRY INSTAllATION, GENERAL
A Discard units of material with defects that impair quality of rough. carpentry and that are too small to use with
minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement
B. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines. with members plumb. true to line. cut, and fitted
C. Fit rough carpentry to other construction~ scribe and cope as required for accurate fit Correlate location of
furring. nailers. blocking. grounds, and similar supports to allow attachment of other construction.
D.. Apply field treatment complying with A WP A M4 to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber and plywood.
E. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated. complying with the
following: .
1. "Recommended N8iling Schedule" of referenced framing standard and with AFPA's "National Design
Specifications for Wood Construction".
2. "Table 1705. I-Fastening Schedule," of the Standard Building Code.
F. Use common wire nails. unless otherwise indicated Use finishing nails for finish work. Select fasteners of size
. that will DOt fully ~tde members wba'e opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials.
Malee tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting Wood~ predrill as required.
G. Usehot-dip galvanized or stainless-steel nails where rough carpentry is exposed to weather. in ground contact,
or in area of high relative humidity. .
H Countersink nail heads on exposed carpentiy work and fill holes with wood filler.
3.9. WOOD GROUNDS. NAILERS. BLOCKING. AND SLEEPERS
A Install wood grounds. DaiIers. bloc::kin& aDd sleepers where sho~ and where fequired for screeding or attaching
other work. Form to shapes shown and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate
locations with other work involved. .
B. Attach to substrates to suppOrt applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise
indicated. Build into masonry during installation of masonry work. Where poSSIble. anchor to formwork before
concrete placement .
MASONRY BUILDING SYSTEMS
13125 - 9
C. Install permanent grounds of dressed. preservative-treated, key-beveled Iumbez' not less than 1-112 inches (38
mm) wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact thickness of finish material. Remove
temporary grounds when no longer required. .
3.10 WOOD FURRING
A InstalI plmnb and level with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as required for tolerance of
finish work. ' ' ..
1. Firestop furred spaces ofwa1ls at each floor level and at ceiling with wood blocking or noncombustible
materials, accurately fitted to close fwTed spaces.
B. Fmring to Receive Gypsum Board: InstalI l-by-2-inch nominal- (19-by-3 8-mm actual-) size furring at 16 inches
(406 mm) o.c., vertically.
3.11 WOOD FRAMING, GENERAL
A Framing Standard: Comply with AFP A's "Manual for Wood Frame Construction.. unless otherwise indicated.
B. Framing with Engineered Wood Products: Install engineered wood products to comply with manufacturer's
written instructions.
C. Install framing members of size sod at spacing indicated.
D. Do not splice structural members between supports.
3.12 TRUSS INSTALLATION
A Do not install wood trusses mtil supporting construction is in place and is braced and secured.
B. Before installing. splice trusses delivered to Project site in more than one piece.
C. Hoist trusses in place by lifting equipment suited to sizes and types of trusses required. exercising care not to
damage truss members or joints by out-of-plane bending or other causes.
D. Install and brace trusses according to recommendations ofTPI and as indicated.
E. Install trusses plwnb, square, and true to line and securely fasten to supporting construction.
F. Space, adjust, and align trusses in location before permanently fastening and as follows:
1. Truss Spacing: 24 inches (610 nu:n) O.c.
G. Anchor trusses securely at all bearing points using metal framing anchors. Install fasteners through each fastener
hole in metal framing anchor according to manufacturer's fastening schedules and written instructions.
H. Securely connect each truss ply required for forming' built-up girder trusses.
1. Anchor trusses to girder trusses as indicated
L InstalI and fasten penD8IleDt bracing during truss erectioo and before construction loads are applied. Anchor ends
of permanent bracing where terminating at walls or beams.
1. Install and fasten stroogback bracing vertically against vertical web of parallel-chord floor trusses at
centers indicated.
J. Install wood trusses within installation tolerances of ANSrrrPI 1.
MASONRY BUll..DING SYSTEMS
13125 - 10
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.1
I
I
I
I
I
.1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1(. Do not cut or remove truss members.
L. Return wood trusses that are cLmuigM or do not meet requirements to fabricator and replace with trusses that do
meet requirements.
1. Do not alter trusses in ~ field
3.13 ROOFING INSTALL.ATION
A General: Ccmply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations but not less than those recommended
by ARMA's "Residential Asphalt Roofing Manual" or "The NRCA Steep Roofing Manual."
1. Fasten asphalt shingles to roof sheathing with either roofing staples, applied pneUmatically, or nails.
B. Felt Underlayment: Apply I layer of felt underlayment horizontally over entire swface to receive asphalt
shingles, lapping succeeding courses a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm), end laps a minimuin of4 inches (100
mm), and hips and valleys a minimum of 6 inches (ISO mm). Fasten felt with suffici~t number of roofing nails
or noncorrosive staples to hold underlaym~t in place until asphalt shingle installation.
C. Flashing: Install metal flashing and' trim as indicated and according to details and recommendations of the
"Asphalt Roofing" section of "The NRCA Steep Roofing Manual" and ARMA's "Residential Asphalt Roofing
Manual." -
D. Install asphalt shingles, beginning at roofs lower edge, with a starter strip of roll roofing or inverted asphalt
shingles with tabs removed. Fasten asphalt shingles in the desired weather e:xpostU'e pattern; use number of
fasteners per shingle as rOOOuIl",'rviPrl by manufacturer. Use vertical and horizontal chalk lines to ensure straight
coursing. .
I. Cut and fit asphalt shingles at valleys, ridges, and edges to provide maximum weather protection. Provide
same ~ exposure at ridges as specified for roof. Lap asphalt shingles at ridges to shed water away
from direction of prevailing wind. .
2. Use fasteners at ridges ofsufficient length to penetrate sheathing as specified
3. Pattern: 1/2 shingle spacing offset at succeeding courses.
3.14 SIDING INSTALLATION
A General: Comply with siding oianufactUrer's written installation instructions applicable to products and
applications indicated. unless more stringent requirements apply. Center nails in elongated nailing slots without
binding siding to allow for thermal movement Overlap joints to shed water away from direction of prevailing
wind
B. Install aluminum siding, soffit, and accessories according to AAMA 1402.
C. Isolate dissimilar metals by separating from siding with rubber gaskets, elastomeric sealant, or rubber washers
where fasteners peOetrate siding. Dissimilar metals behind siding may be isolated by covering with polyethylene.
film. (.
3.15 SIDINGADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A Remove and replace damaged, improperly installed, or otherwise defective siding materials with new materials
complying with specified requirements:
B. Clean finished surfaces according tosiding'manufacturer's written instructions and maintain in a clean condition
during construction.
3.16 DOOR AND FRAME INSTALLATION
MASONRY BUILDING SYSTEMS
13 125 - II
A General: Install steel doors. frames. and accessories according to Shop Drawings. manufacturer's data, and as
specified.
B. Placing Frames: Comply with provisions of SOl lOS, unless otherwise indicated. Set frames accurately in
position. plumbed. aligned. and braced seCurely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is
completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.
1. In 1Il8SC!ll'Y ccn.s1ruction. install at least 3 wall anchors per j~b adjacent to hinge location on hinge jamb
and at corresponding heights on strike jamb. Acceptable anchors include mlisonry wire anchors and
masonry T -shaped anchors.
C. Door Installation: Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified in ANSI/SOl 100.
3.17 DOOR AND FRAME ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A Prime Coat T ouchup: Immediately after erection. sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and
apply touchup of compatible air-drying primer.
B. Protection Removal: Immediately before final inspection. remove protective wrappings from doors and frames.
3.18 HARDWARE INST All.A nON
A Mount hardware units at heights indiCated in following applicable publications; except as specifically indicated
or required to comply with governing regulations and except as otherwise directed by Engineer.
1. "Recommended Locatioos fa Builders ~ware for Standard Steel Doors and FramesW by the Door and
Hardware Institute.
B. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions-and recommendations. Where
cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into surfaces th8t are later to be painted or finished in
another way. coordinate removal. storage, and reinstallation or application of surface protection with finishing
work. Do not install surface-m01Dlted items until finishes have been completed on the substrates involved.
C. Set units level. plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as necessary
for proper installation and operation.
D. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors
in accordance with industry standards.
E. Set thresholds for exterior doors in full bed of butyl-robber or polyisobutylene mastic sealant .
F. Weatherstripping and Seals: Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations to the extent .
installation requirements are not otherwise indicated.
3.19 HARDWARE ADnJSTING, CLEANING. AND DEMONSTRATING
A Adjust and check eacl1 opaating item of hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or fimction of every
unit Replace units that canoot be adjusted to opernte freely and smoothly or as intended for the application made.
1. Where door hardware is installed more than one month prior to acceptance or occupancy of a space or
area. return to the instlll1Ati<m during the week prioc to acceptance or ocCupancy and make final check and
adjustment of all hardware items in such space or area Clean operating items as necessary to restore
proper fimction and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final
operation of heating and ventilating equipment
B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation.
MASONR Y BUll..DING SYSTEMS
13125 - 12
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
C. Instruct Owner's personnel in the proper adjustment and maintenance. of door hardware and hardware fuiishes.
D. Six,-Month Adjustment: AppfOximately six months after the date of Substantial Completion. the Installer.
acoompanied by representatives of the manufacturers oflatchsets and locksets and of door control devices. and
of other major hardware suppliers. shall return to the Project to perform the fonowing work: .
1. Examine and re--adjust each item of door hardware as necessary to restore function of doors and hardware
to comply with specified ~ts. .
2. . Consult with and instruct Owner's pei-SOI1Ilel in recommended additions to the maintenance procedures.
3. Replace hardwaie items that have deteriorated or failed due to faulty design. materials. or installation of
hardware units.
4. Prepare a written report of cmrent and predictable problems (of substantial nature) in the performance
. of the hardware. .
3.20 APPL YING AND FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD. GENERAL
A Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standards: Install and :finish gypsum panels to comply with
ASTM C 840 and GA-216.
B. Install ceiling board panels across framing to minimi7.e the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting
end joints in the central area of each ceiling. stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one
framing member.
C. Install gypsum panels with face side out Do not install imperfect. damaged. or damp panels. Butt panels
together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) of open space between
panels. Do not force into place..
D. Space fasteners in gypsum panels according to referenced gypsum board application and finishing standard and
manufacturer's recommendations.
3.21' GYPSUMBOARDAPPUCATIONMETIIODS
A Single-Layer Application: Install gypsum wallboard panels as follows:
1. On ceilings. apply gypsum panels prior to wall/partition board application to the greatest extent possible
and at right angles to framing. unless otherwise indicated.
B. Single-Layer Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports as follows:
1. Fasten with screws.
3.22 INSTALLING GYPSUM wAll BOARD TRIM ACCESSORIES
/
A General: For trim accessories with back flanges. fasten to framing with the same fasteners used to fasten gypsum
board. Otherwise. fasten trim accessories according to accessory manufacturer's directions for type. length. and
spacing of fasteners.
B. Jnstall edge trim where edge of gypsum panels would otherwise be exposed. Provide edge trim type with face
flange formed to receive joint compound. 'except where other types are indicated.
1. Install LC-bead where gypsum panels are tightly abutted to other construction and back flange can be
attached to framing or supporting substrate.
2. Install L-bead w~ere edge trim can only be installed after gypsum panels are installed.
MASONRY BUll..DING SYSTEMS
13 125 - 13
3.23 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
A. General: Treat gypsum board joints. interior angles. flanges of comerbead, edge trim, control joints. penetrations.
fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum bOard swfaces for decoration.
B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged areas using setting-type joint compound
C. Apply joint tape ovec gypsum board joints, except those with trim acCessories having flanges not requiring tape.
D. Apply joint tape ova- gypsum board joints and to flanges of trim accessories as recommended by trim accessOIY
manufacturer.
E. Levels of Gypsum Board Finish: Provide the following levels of gypsum board finish per GA-214.
I. Level 3 for gypsum board.
F. Use the following joint compound combination as applicable to the finish levels specified:
I. Embedding and First Coat: Setting-type joint compound. Fill (Second) Coat: Setting-type joint
compound Finish (Third) Coat: Sandable, setting-type joint compound.
G. Where Level 3 gypsum board finish is indicated. embed tape in joint compound and apply first and fill (second)
coats of joint compound.
3.24 APPLYING TEXTIJRE FINISHES
A. Surface Preparation and Primer: PrePare and apply primer to gypsum panels and other swfaces receiving texture
finishes according to texture finish manufacturers instructions. Apply primer only to smfaces that are clean. dry,
and smooth.
B. Texture Finish Application: Mix and apply finish to gypsum panels and other swfaces indicated to receive
texture finish according to texture finish manufacturer's directiOns. Using powered spray equipment, produce
a uniform texture matching approved mockup and free of starved spots or other evidence of thin application or
of application patterns.
C. Prevmt texture finishes from coming into contact with swfaces not indicated to receive texture finish by covering
them with masking agents, polyethylene film. or other means. If: despite these precautions, texture finishes
contact these surfaces, imniediately remove droppings and overspray as recommended by texture finish
manufacturer to prevent damage.
3.25 PAINT SCHEDULE
A. Concrete Masonry Units: Provide the following finish systems ov~ iriterior concrete masonry block units:
I. Semigloss, Water-borne Epoxy Finish: 2 finish coats over an undercoat and a filled surface.
a. Block Filler: High-performance, block filler applied at spreading rate recommended by the
manufactlD'er to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 5.0 mils (0. I3 rom).
b. Finish Coat: Odorless. semigloss, water-borne epoxy applied at spreading rate recommended by
the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 rom).
B. Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over ferrous metal:
MASONRY BunnING SYSTEMS
13125 -14
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
..1 '
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
'I
I
I
1. Full-Gloss, Acrylic-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a primer.
a. Primer: Quick-dryirig. rust-inhibitive, alkyd-based or epoxy-metal primer, as recommended by
the manufacturer for this substrate. applied at spreading rate ~ended by the manufacturer
to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm).
1) Devoe:
2)' Glidden:
3) Moore:
4) PPG:
13101 Mirrolac Rust Penetrating Metal Primer.
5207 Glid-Guard Tank & Structu:ra1 Primer. White.
. . IronClad Retardo Rust-Inhibitive Paint #163.
6-208 Speedhide InteriorlExterior Rust Inhibitive Steel Primer.
b. First and Second Coats:. Full-gloss. acrylic-latex. exterior enamel applied at spreading rate
recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thiCkness of not less than 2.5 mils
(0.064 mm). . .
1) Devoe:
2) Glidden:
3) Moore:
4) PPG:
84XX Mirrolae-WB Interior-Exterior Waterborne High
Gloss Enamel.
6900 Series Lifemaster Pro Hi-Performance Acrylic Coating.
Impervex Enamel #309.
51 Line Brilliant Reflections InteriorlExterior Latex Gloss Enamel.
3.26 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A Touclmp Painting: Immediately after erection. clean. prepare, and prime or reprime welds. bolted connections.
and abraded swfaces of prime-pamted primary and secondary framing. ~es, and bearing plates.
1. Clean and prepare ~ by hand-tool cleaning, SSPC-SP 2, or power-tool cleaning. SSPC-SP 3.
2. Apply compatible primer of same type as shop primer used on adjacent surf~.
B. Doas:. Immediately after erection. sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touch up
of compatible air-drying primer.
1. Protectioo Removal: Immediately before final inspection. remove protective wrappings from doors and
frames.
C. . Wmdows: Clean metal surfaces pranptly after installing windows. Exercise care to avoid damage to protective
coatings and finishes. Remove excess glazing and sealant compounds, dirt. and other substances. Clean glass
promptly after installing windows.
END OF SECTION 13125
MASONRY BUll.DING SYSTEMS
13125 - 15
I-
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
ADDENDUM NO.1
SEPTEMBER 8, 1998
RICHMOND COUNTY BOARD OF COMMISSIONERS
MAY PARK & FLEMING TENNIS CENTER
Please make following part of the Plans and Specifications of above Johnson & Laschober
& Associates Job No. 42.706:
1. Reference Drawing Al.2M Floor Plan, Concession Room. Add receptacles 6'-0" o.c. on
walls. Mount receptacles 48" up or 6" above counter. Divide receptacles among 4
circuits. Circulate 2 - #12 wires in 1/2" conduit to receptacles and feed from 20 amp, 1
pole circuit breaker in Panel C.
2. Reference Drawing A1.2M, Floor Plan, Storage Room. Add three Lithonia #C232
fixtures with wire guard. Mount fixtures to bottom of ceiling. Control fixtures with
toggle switch mounted at door. Circulate 2 - #12 wires in 1/2" conduit to all fixtures and
switch and feed from 20 amp, 1 pole circuit breaker in Panel C. Space fixtures equally in
the room. Add receptacles 10'-0" o.c. on walls 48" up. Circulate 2 - #12 wires in 1/2"
conduit to receptacles and feed from 20 amp, 1 pole circuit breaker in Panel C.
3. Reference Drawing E1.2M Detail Panel C. Increase Panel to 20 poles and add 8 - 20
amp, 1 pole circuit breakers.
NOTE: All electric (i.e., lightingflXtures, wiring devices, branch circuits, etc.) shall be
furnished in accordance with typical Super Secur installation. Contractor shall provide
electrical layout showingflXtures, wiring devices, G.F.1 receptacles in toilets and branch
circuits. Addendum items #1 and #2 are in addition to the Super Secur requirement.
.:II
--
~
.
-
--.
-
\
W
o
<{
~
oc.:>
~~'""'
01-
e~~~
-1 VlW<{
::::!~<{~CL
~e3:w~
<":>(JW (..)
<..:><{~~<{
Zo::::::I",,-1
FI-Vll-CD
Vl5~ZI-
x(..)O:::<C<C
W........CLCL~
\
.
}
(I
~
--
o
I
I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I /
I
I ~/
I
I ~~lS
.~ ~., ".'
I /' / .~.
)---'--
I "
I
\..
-
(
~/
-1<":>
<cz I
~-
a... > I
Vl<C
<{ a... I
"'-J '-
/
10
II-
I :5 a:i
I <{ ~
3:(..)
/ ~l.J..
ViO
3:~
w(J
z<C
CD
.~
f=!r-:
<{~
~~
-
o
.
~
.
~
.x.
~
-1
o
o
a..
.....:
"'
...........
/
/~
// ~~
wa...
~W
(..)1-
<CW
. // gj~5
. I- Z
. . ~3: 8
. ~w
/~ ~ I- Z 0
;:j/ / ~5~~
.....;./ (..)(,,)00
/ Z CDa...
100
. . (..)"""":' 0::: 0:::
g:oa...
\ r-..I-~O
x........~1-
"I,(") ci <C Vl
o<coG:;
_CLI-Vl
~
CUTTING AND REPAIRING: THE PLUMBING CONTRACTOR SHALL DO ALL
CUTTING AND REPAIRING OF WALLS, FLOORS, CEIUNGS, ETC. NECESSARY
FOR THE INSTALLATION OF THE WORK BUT HE SHALL NOT CUT INTO ANY
STRUCTURAL MEMBER WITHOUT THE PERMISSION OF THE ARCHITECT.
ALL SOIL, DRAIN, WASTE AND VENT PIPING SHALL BE SCHEDULE 40 PVC-DWV
WITH SOLVENT WELD JOINTS, CONFORMING TO ,ASnA D 2665 AND ASnA D
2466.
ALL COLD WATER AND HOT WATER SUPPLY PIPING ABOVE GROUND SHALL BE
HARD DRAWN COPPER TUBING COMPL YlNG WlTIi ASnA B 88. TUBING
INSTALLED UNDERGROUND OR UNDER FLOOR SLAB SHALL BE TYPE .K. SOFT
TEMPER. NO JOINTS UNDER FLOOR SLABS. WILL PER PERMITTED. TUBING
INSTALLED ABOVE GROUND SHALL BE TYPE .L. HARD DRAWN COPPER TUBING.
FLASHING: ALL PIPES PASSING THROUGH THE ROOF SHALL BE FLASHED WITH
VENT FLASHING COMPATIBLE WITH THE ROOFING.
INSULA TION: INSULATION FOR HOT AND COLD WATER SHALL BE 1/2" TIiICK,
CLOSED CELL FLEXIBLE TUBING COMPL YlNG WITH ASTM C-534, TYPE I,
. ARMFLEX. OR EQUAL
~ -- ~
PLUMBING SPECIFICATIONS
ALL WORK SHALL CONFORM TO ALL APPUCABLE FEDERAL, STATE, AND
LOCAL CODES INCLUDING, BUT NOT UMITED TO; 1994 STANDARD
PLUMBING CODE, AMERICANS WITH DISABIUTIES ACT OF 1994.
~
-
~
~
--
EXACT LOCATIONS AND ROUGHING REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL FIXTURES
AND EQUIPMENT SHALL BE DETERMINED FROM ARCHITECTURAL
DRAWINGS, LARGE SCALE ARCHITECTURAL DETAILS, AND APPROVED
MANUFACTURER'S SHOP DRAWINGS. PARTICULAR ATTENTION SHALL BE
DIRECTED TO FIXTURES OR EQUIPMENT FURNISHED UNDER OTHER
DIVISIONS.
INSTALL TEST TEES WHEN THE SYSTEM IS TO .BE TESTED IN SECTIONS.
PIPING IS SHOWN IN ITS GENERAL LOCATION (UNLESS DIMENSIONED).
EXACT LOCATION SHALL BE DETERMINED BY JOB CONDITIONS.
CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE THE INSTALLATION OF HIS WORK
WITH THAT OF OTHER TRADES AND ARRANGE PIPING TO CLEAR
STRUCTURAL MEMBERS AND DUCTWORK. EXACT LOCATIONS SHALL BE
PROVIDED ON .. AS-BUILT" DRAWINGS.
ALL PIPING TO BE CONCEALED IN A WALL, CEIUNG, OR A CHASE UNLESS
OTHERWISE NOTED. PIPING SHOWN OUT OF CHASES FOR CLARITY.
ARRANGEMENTS OF WORK SHALL BE AS SHOWN. DRAWINGS ARE NOT
INTENDED TO INDICATE ALL OFFSETS AND FITTINGS. EXAMINE ALL
DRAWINGS, INVESTIGATE CONDITIONS TO BE ENCOUNTERED AND
ARRANGE WORK ACCORDINGLY; FURNISH ALL FITTINGS AND OFFSETS.
MEASUREMENT OF DRAWINGS BY SCALE SHALL NOT BE USED AS
DIMENSIONS FOR FABRICATION. MEASUREMENTS FOR LOCATING
FIXTURES, EQUIPMENT, DUCTWORK, PIPING AND ACCESSORIES SHALL BE
MADE ON THE SITE AND SHALL BE BASED ON ACTUAL JOB CONDITIONS.
THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL MEASUREMENTS
WHERE THE CONTRACTOR PREFABRICATES ANY WORK BASED ON THE
DRAWINGS WITHOUT VERIFYING ACTUAL JOB CONDITIONS, THEN THE
CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY AND ALL COST
INVOLVED IN MAKING CHANGES TO PREFABRICATED WORK WHERE
CONFLICTS OCCUR.
ARRANGE FOR CHASES, SLOTS, AND OPENINGS IN OTHER BUILDING
COMPONENTS DURING PROGRESS OF CONSTRUCTION, TO ALLOW FOR
INST ALLA TIONS.
INSTALL SYSTEMS, MATERIALS, AND EQUIPMENT LEVEL, PLUM,
PARALLEL, AND PERPENDICULAR TO OTHER BUILDING SYSTEMS AND
COMPONENTS.
COPPER PIPING SHALL NOT BE INSTALLED IN DIRECT CONTRACT WITH
MASONRY, CEMENT MORTAR, CONCRETE, OR DISSIMILAR METALS.
~ j(c. 1 · I M(e) I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
- .-..; . "i,.....!.i
SPECIFICATIONS & CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
For
May Park Improvements
Augusta-Richmond County .
T ABLE OF CONTENTS
Invitation To Bid
Bid Form
Instruction To Bidders
General Conditions
Supplementary General Conditions
Standard Fo~ of Agreement
Notice of Award
Notice to Proceed
Application for Payment
Change Order
Certificate of Substantial Completion
INDEX TO SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION
TITLE
DIVISION 1
GENERAL REOUIREMENTS
01010
01027
01030
01200
01300
01400
Summary of Work
Applications for Payment
Alternates
Project Meetings
Submittals
Quality Control
DIVISION 2
SITEWORK.
02070
02110
02200
02510 .
0251lA
Selective Demolition
Site Clearing
Earthwork
Hot-Mix Asphalt Paving
Existing Tennis Court Resurfacing'
INDEX TO SPECIFICATIONS (Continued)
02511B
02700
03300
05120
13125
Tennis Court Fencing
Storm Drainage
Cast-In-Place Concrete
Structural Steel
Metal Building Systems
DIVISION 3
ELECTRICAL
16050
16140
16145
16452
16470
16475
16476
16511
16531
Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
Wiring Devices
Lighting Control Devices
Grounding
Panelboards
Fuses
Disconnect Switches
General Lighting
Sports Lighting
INDEX TO DRAWINGS
DRAWING NUMBER
DRAWING TITLE
CS.l
CO.IM
CO.IF
C1.1M
C1.1F
C1.2M
C1.2F
C2.1M
C2.1F
C3.1F
E1.1M
E1.1F
E1.2M
AI. 1M
Al.2M
Al.3M
S1.1M
Cover Sheet
Boundary & Topographic Survey
Boundary & Topographic Survey
Layout Plan
Layout Plan
Grading, Drainage & Erosion Control Plan
Grading, Drainage & Erosion Control Plan
Miscellaneous Details
Soil Erosion And Sediment Control Plan
Miscellaneous Details
Electrical Site Plan
Electrical Plan
Electrical Details
Concession Stand Drawings
Concession Stand Drawings
Concession Stand Drawings
Foundation, Framing Plans & Details
I
I
I
I
I
I'
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-
I
I
I
I
I
,
I
I
I
I
.1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
INVITATION TO BID
Sealed Bids will be received at this office until, 3:00 p.m. legally prevailing time on Wednesday,
September 9, 1998 for the construction of:
Bid Item #98-171, Fleming Tennis Center Improvements - Project No. 42-706 & May Park
Improvements - Project No. 42-706M.
Geri A. Sams
The Augusta-Richmond County Purchasing Department
530 Greene Street - Room 605
Augusta, GA 30911
At the time and place noted above the proposals will be publicly opened and read. No extension of
the bidding period will be made.
Bidding documents may be obtained at the office of the engineer, Johnson, Laschober & Associates,
P.C., Consulting Engineers, 1296 Broad Street, Augusta, Georgia 30901. Applications for
documents, together with a non-refundable deposit of$50.00 per set shall be filed promptly with the
engineer. Bidding material will be forwarded, shipping charges collect, as soon as possible. Bid
documents may be viewed ~t the following locations: The Augusta Richmond County Commission
Purchasing Department, The Engineer's Office, Dodge Plan Room, Augusta Builder's Exchange.
It is the wish of the Owner that minority .businesses are given the opportunity to bid on the various
parts of the work. This desire on the part of the OWneris not intended to restrict or limit competitive
bidding or to increase the cost of the work. The Owner supports a healthy free market system that
seeks to include responsible businesses" and provide ample opportunity for business growth and
, .
development.
Contract, if awarded, will be on a lump sum basis: No bid may be withdrawn for a period of 60 qays
after time has been called. on the date of opening. Bids must be accompanied by:a bid bond and in
an amount not less than 10010 of the base bid. Both a performance bond and a payment bond will be
required in an amount equal to 100% of the contract price. .
The Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive technicalities and informalities.
Please mark Bid Item # and Project Name on the outside of the envelope..
GERI A. SAMS, Purchasing Director
Augusta-Richmond County
Consolidated Government
Augusta Chronicle - August 17,25,31 & September 4, 1998
Metro Courier -August 19, 1998
I
I
I
I
I
I
I..
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.1
I';'
I
" .
REVISED BID FORM
Date: 9/24/98
. PROJECT N.AlVfE:
Fleming Tennis Center Improvements
&
May Park Improvements
THIS BID IS SUBMITTED TO:
.Au~-Richmond CoUnty Commisssion
. Purchasing Department, Room 605
Municipal Building
530 Greene Street
AugU3ta, GA ~0911
1. The undersigned BIDDER proposes and agrees, if this Bid is accepted, to enter into an
agreement with OWNER in the form included in the Contract Documents to perform and
furnish all Work as specifi~ or indicated in the Contract Doeum91ts for the Contract Price
and within the Contract Time indicated in this Bid and in acc.onbnce with the other terms
and conditions of the Contract Documents.
2. BIDDER accepts aU of the tenns and conditions of the Advatisement or Invitation to Bid
and Instructions to Bidden, including without limitation those dealing with the disposition
of Bid security. 1bis Bid will remain subject to acceptance for sixty days after the day of
Bid opening. BIDDER will sign and submit the Agreement with the Bonds and other
documents required by the Bidding Requirements within fifteen days after the date of
OWNER'S Notice of Award.
3~ In submitting this "Bid. BIDDER represents, as more fully set forth in the Agreement, that:
a.. BIDDER. has examined copies of all the Bidding Documents and of the following
Addenda (reCeipt of au which is hereby.acknowledged):
. - - , ,
Date
'9/8/98 .
9/10/98
. Number
One (1)
Two (2)
b. BIDDER' has familiarized itself with the nature and extent of the Contract
Documents, Work, site. locality, and allloc3:l conditions and Laws and R~gwations
that in any manner may affect cost, progress, pcrfonnance or furnishing of the Work.
c. BIDDER has obtained and ca.refu.11y studied (or assumes responsibility fOt" obtaining
and carefully studying) all such examinations, investigations, explorations, tests and
studies which pertain to the subsurface or physical conditions at the site or otherwise
may affect the cost, progress. perfonnance or furnishing of the Work at the Contract
F Il.fIK..,qrOlll.o\OMNlSPGCS\8IO'w.. VVPO
Price. within the Contract Time and in accordance with the other terms and
conditions of the Contract Documents. including specifically the provisions of
paragraph 4.2 of the General Conditions; and no additional examinatioris,
investigations, explorations, tests, reports or similar information or data are or will
be required by BIDDER for such purposes.
d. BIDDER. has reviewed and checked all information and data shown or indicated on
the Contract Documents with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or
contiguous to the site and assumes responsibility for the accurate location of said
Underground Facilities. No additional examinations, investigations, explorations,
tests. reports or similar information or data in respect of said Underground Facilities
are or will be required by BIDDER in order to perform and furnish the WORK at the
Contract Price, within the Contract Time and in accordance with the other terms and
conditions of the Contract Documents, including specifically the provisions of
paragraph 4.3 of the General Conditions.
Co BIDDER has correlated the results of all. such obs~rvations, examinations,
investigatiQIl$, exploratioDS. tests, Teports and studies with the terms and conditions
of the Contract Documents.
~
f. BIDDER has given ENGINEER written notice of all conflicts, errors or
discrepancies that it bas discovered in the Contract Documents and the written
resolution thereof by ENGINEER is acceptable to BIDDER..
4.
g. This' bid is genuine and not made in the interest of or on behalf of any undisclosed
person, firm or corporation and is not submitted in conformity with any agreement
or rules of any group, association. organization or cotpOration; BIDDER. has not
directly or indirectly induced or solicited any other Bidder to submit a false or sham
Bid; BIDDER bas not solicited or induced any person, firm or corporation to refrain
from bidding; and BIDDER has not sought by collusion to obtain for itself any
advantage over any other Bidder or over OWNER.
i --
Schedule of value for May Park $ ~}-'~- E.~tx::>
Schedule of value for Fleming Tennis Center $ ~ /0"5; t:ttJ -
BIDDER will complete the WORK for the following price(s): .
BASE BID (for Fleming & May Park) Total Lump Sum $ ~
4~1 J ~cD
~~ I ~5$"~
I
PIlEIK.'\4270/!1ADUIHISPbC$\Al)l!UA, wPO
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
s.
Specification Section 01030 - Alternates, paragraph 3.1.A. 3.1.E to be deleted and replaced
with the following alternates:
A
Alternate No.1: Base Bid is Wa1er Fountain and associated concrete pad (approx. 70
sf). Add Alt~e is to installS' wide concrete sideWalk from pavilion area to
Community Center ~ Add $ 0, 3aJ
B.
Alternate No.. 2: Base Bid is to install asphalt shingles as roof finish on Concession
Building.. Add Alternate is to install metal roofing finish to match roof of pavilion.
Add $ ICf,COO ..
c.
.. Alternate NO.3: Base Bid is to resurface existing Tennis Court 4, Demo Tennis
Court 3, grade and grass disturbed area, install net, new fence and wind screen. Add
alternate is to add parking lot, and sidewalk. Add S 1'1 , ~l:lJ
D.
Alternate No.4: Add iesurfacinS of existing tennis courts 6, 7, 8, 9 & 10 as detaile<i
on the drawings. Add $ 4 I. 0 CO .' .
The Owner may elect to accept any Add Alternate in any order that may be advantageous to
the owner, and incxnporate sum as a Change Order. Contractor shall notifY the Owner when
the decission of accepting ,anAdd Alternate must be made for the Gontractor to be able to.
hold the stated "Add Cost" in the above bid form.
a) A tabulation of subcontractors, suppliers [and other] individuals and entites is
required to be indentified in this bid.
6.
BIDDER. agrees that the w~rk will be completed and ready for final payment in. accordance
with paragraph 14.13 of the General Conditions on or before 180, days after notice to
proceed. However, allproposedcornitruction at Fleming Tennis Center shall be completed
on or before 2.Q days after notice to proceed.
7.
The following documents are attached to and made a condition oithis Bid:
a) Bid Bond
b) Bidder's Qualification Statement
8.
Communications concerning this Bid shall be: addr~ to:
The address of BIDDER indicated below. Allen~Ba tchelor Construction,: Inc.
4186 Crosstowne Court
Evans, Ga. 30809
IFILEIK."27Oe\AOWINlSPee!aSlOnK MOO
9. The terms used in this Bid which are defined in the Gen~ra1 Conditions of the Construction
Contract included as part of the Contract Documents have the meanings assigned to them in
the General ConditiODS.
September 24, 1998
SUBMlTIED on
If BIDDER is:
AD Individual
By
doing business as
Business address:
(IndividwU's NADlC)
Phon~No.:
A Partnership
By.-
(Individual's Name)
(General P9ttner)
Business address:
. Phone No.'
A Coxporation
By. Allen-Batchelor
Georgia
Construction, Inc.
(C~rat1on name)
By.
(State of IncoIpOration)
deVane Batchelor or John Allen
(Name of Penon Al11honzed to Sign)
President Vice-President
(Title)
l'II..8\K-\oI27llll\A~~WPD
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I'
I
(Corporation Seal)
Phone No. .
~<~-
4186 Crosstowne Court
Evans, Ga. 30809
706/868-6534
--..
Attest
deVane Batchelor
Business address'
A Joint Venture
By.
(Name)
(Address)
By.
(Name)
(Addte:u)
(Each joint venturer must sign. The manner of signing for each individual~ partnership and
corporation that is a party to the joint venture should be in the manner indicated above).
JlLi'K:\427llll1ADN1HS'!CS\BalMA.WPO
4186 Crosstowne
Evans, Georgia 3
Phone(706)868~
Fax (706) 860-112
'I ~
,. .'
A ALLEN-BATCHELOR
B CONSTRUCTION INC.
September 29, 1998
Augusta-Richmond County Commission
Purchasing Department. Room 605
530 Greene Street
Augusta, Ga. 309) )
RE: Fleming Tennis Center & May Park Improvements
Dear SirlMadam:
.
..
. .
Please accept this letter as a revision to our bid on the above ref~ project (Bid #98-171). Our revised
quote to complete only the May Park Improvements is Three Huildn:d Sixty One Thousand Seven Hundred
dollars and noli 00 ($361,700.00). .. ..
~
Please realize the Schedule ofVaJues listed on the bid form represented effici~ afforded in conjunction -
with both projects being constructed simultaneously. Costs for supervision an<f general conditions were to-
be shared between the two jobsites. '
Two beneficial value-engineerlng items have been brought to our attention. F~. all of the tennis court
contractors that we contacted regarding this work do not recommend removing the existing coating or using
the 1" overlay. The thickness ofaspbalt is not adequate enough to permanently bridge large cracks.
Bonding agents can be applied which will adhere the new coatings to the existing sur&ce. Further; in OlD'
teMis court contractor's opinion, the condition of court 1#3 is Dot poor enough to warrant use of aD asphah
topping. Use of the specified system less the topping wiJI Dot only generate substantial cost savings but also
reduce the time frame required doing the work and providing a high quality product. .
Second, 22 gauge roofing panels have a minimum order quantity far excceding quantities required for this
project. We have contacted several manufactures regarding this issue. They recommend reducing the spans
to 3' -6 and using 26 gauge materials, Per MBCI their materials WIll pcrfonn as required in this application.
Should these above two Value Engineering items meet with your approval you can deduct SI2,ooo.OO from
our base bid and alternate #2 tocal.
Therefore, we propose to provide the wOrk at May Park including alternates I, 2 and 3 and the abov~
referenced Value Engineering items for the Lump Sum of Three Hundred Ninety Three Thousand FIVe
Hundred and no/1 00 (S393,500.oo).
We appreciate the opportunity to work: with you on this project.. Sbould there be any questions or
comments, please do not hesiwe to call.
Sincerely,
~<3
deVane Batchelor
President
-
----.
cc: John Allen
File
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
A A tUN · B ATCHHOR
B CONSTRUCTION INC.
-" "'~~1:/'
4186 Crosstowne Court
Evans. Georgia 30809
Phone (706) 868-6534
Fax (706) 860-1129
October 12. 1998
Augusta-Richmond County Commission
Purchasing Department, Room 605
530 Greene Street
Augusta. Ga. 30911
REo' May Park Improvements
Dear Sir/Madam:
" .
Per our telephone conversation with ~. Rick Aaee of 1019/98. we propose to provide Lockeam panels as
manufactured by MBCI in 24 gauge ill lieu of"R," panels also manufactured by MBCI in 26 gauge. We
wiltuse these panels for the concesSions building as well as pavilion. dugoutS ~ scoring iowers. A
general description of the Lockseam and "Rn panels as well ~ Signature 300 color chart is attached.
Unfortunately the cost of these Lockseam materials including accessories is somewhat greater than for the
"R" panel that we originally proposed to use. Therefore. please revise our Value Engineering figure to a
lotal deduct of S8.0oo.00.
Should the above be acceptable. our rCvised proPosal amount for work at May Park including alternates 1.
2 &. J and the referenced Value Engineering is Three Hundred Ninety Seven Thousand Five Hundred and
00/100 doJlars ($391.500.00).
We hope this information meets with your approval and Jook forwwd to working with you on this exciting
project. Should there be any questions or comments. please do not hesitate to call.
deVane Balchelor
File
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
1.
Defined Terms.
Terms used in these Instructions to Bidders which are defined in the Standard General
Conditions of the Construction Contract (No. 1910-8, 1983 ed.) have the meanings assigned
to them in the General Conditions. The term "Bidder" means one who submits a Bid directly
to Owner, as distinct from a sub-bidder, who submits a bid to a Bidder. The term "Successful
Bidder" means the lowest, qualified, responsible and responsive Bidder to whom Owner (on
the basis of Owner's evaluation as hereinafter provided) makes an award. The term "Bidding
Documents" includes the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid, Instructions to Bidders, the Bid
Form, and the proposed Contract Documents (including all Addenda issued prior to receipt of
Bids).
2.
Copies of Bidding Documents.
2.1 Complete sets ofthe Bidding Documents in the number and for the deposit sum stated
in the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid may be obtained from Engineer.
,,-
2.2 Complete sets of Bidding Documents must be used in preparing Bids; neither Owner nor
Engineer assume any resp<?nsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the
use of incomplete sets of Bidding Documents.
2.3 Owner and Engineer in making copies of Bidding Documents ayailable on the above
terms do so only for the purpose of obtaining Bids on the . Work and do not confer a
license or grant for any other use.
3.
Qualifications of Bidders.
To demonstrate qualifications.to perform the Work, each Bidder must be prepared to submit
within five (5) days of Owner's request written evidence, such as financial data, previous
experience, present commitments 'and other such data as may be called for below (or in the
Supplementary Instructions). Each~Bid must contain evidence of Bidder's qualification to do
business in the state where the Project i's located orcovenantto obtain such qualification prior
to award of the contract.
4.
Examination of Contract Documents: and Site.
4.1 It is the responsibility pf each Bidder before submitting a Bid, to (a) examine the
Contract Documents thoroughly, (b) visit the site to become familiar with local
conditions that may affect cost, progress performance or furnishing of the Work, (c)
consider federal, state and local Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress,
performance or furnishing of.the Work, (d) study and carefully correlate Bidder's
observations with the Contract Documents, and ( e) notify Engineer of all conflicts, errors
or discrepancies in the Contract Documents.
IB-l
K:\42706\ADMINISPECS\lNST.BID
4.2 Information and data reflected in the Contract Docwnents with respect to Underground
Facilities at or contiguous to the site is based upon information and data furnished to
Owner and Engineer by owners of such Underground Facilities or others, and Owner
does not asswne responsibility for the accuracy or completeness thereof unless it is
expressly provided otherwise in the Supplementary Conditions.
4.3 Provisions concerning responsibilities for the adequacy of data furnished to prospective
Bidders on subsurface conditions, Underground Facilities and other physical conditions,
and possible changes in the Contract Docwnents due to differing conditions appear in
Paragraphs 4.2 and 4.3 of the General Conditions.
4.4 Before submitting a Bid each Bidder will be responsible to make or obtain such
explorations, tests and data concerning physical conditions (surface, subsurface and
Underground Facilities) at or contiguous to the site, or otherWise which may affect cost,
progress, performance or furnishing of the Work and which Bidder deems necessary to
determine its Bid for performing and furnishing the Work in accordance with the time,
price and other terms and conditions of the Contract Docwnents.
4.5 On request in advance, Owner will provide each Bidder access to the site to conduct
such explorations and tests as each Bidder deems necessary for submission of a Bid.
Bidder shall fill all holes, clean up and restore the site to its former condition upon
completion of such explorations.
4.6 The lands upon which the Work is to be performed, rights-of-way and easements for
access thereto and other lands designated for use by Contractor in performing the Work
are identified in the Contract Docwnents. Easements are to be obtained and paid for by
the Owner.
4.7 The submission of a Bid will constitute an incontrovertible representation by Bidder that
Bidder has complied with every requirement of this Article 4, that without exception the
Bid is premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the Contract
Docwnents and such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of
construction as may be indicated in or required. by the Contract Documents, and that the
Contract Docwnents are sufficient in scope and detail to indicate and convey
understanding of all terms and conditions for performance and furnishing the Work.
s.
Interpretations and Addenda.
5.1 All questions about the meaning or intent of the Contract Documents are to be directed
to Engineer. Interpretations or clarifications considered necessary by Engineer in
response to such questions will be issued by Addenda mailed or delivered to all parties
recorded by Engineer as having received the Bidding Docwnents. Questions received
less than ten (10) days prior to the date for opening of Bids may not be answered. Only
questions answered by formal written Addenda will be binding. Oral and other
interpretations or clarifications will be without legal effect.
IB-2
K:\42706\AOM INISPECS\INST .BIO
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
5.2 Addenda may also be is~U~cl to modify the Bidding Documents as deemed advisable by
Owner or Engineer. '. .
6. Bid Security.
6.1 Each Bid must be accompanied by Bid security made payable to Owner in an amount
of ten percent of the Bidder's maximum Bid price and in the form of a certified or bank
-check or a Bid Bond issued by a surety meeting the requirements of Paragraph 5.1 of the
General Conditions.
6.2 The Bid security of the Successful Bidder will be retained until such Bidder has
executed the Agreement and furnished the required contract security, whereupon the Bid
security will be returned. If the. Successful Bidder fails to execute and deliver the
Agreement and furnish the required contract security within fifteen (15) days after the
Notice of Award, Owner may annul the Notice of Award and the Bid security of that
Bidder will be forfeited. The Bid security of other Bidders whom Owner believes to
have a reasonable chance of receiving the award may.be retained by Owner until the
earlier of the seventh (7th) day after the Effective Date of the Agreement or the sixtieth
(60) day after the Bid opening, whereupon Bid security furnished. by such Bidders will
be returned. Bid security with Bids which are not competitive will be returned within
seven (7) days after the Bid opening.
7. . Contract Time.
The numbers of days within which, or the dates by which, the Work is to be substantially
completed and also completed and. ready for final payment (the Contract Time) are set forth
in the Bid Form and the Agreement. .
8. Substitute or "Or Equal" Items.. .
The materials and equipment described in the Bidding Documents establish a standard. of .
required function, dimension, appearance and quality to be met by any proposed substitution.
No substitution will be considered unless written request for approval has been submitted by
the Bidder and has been rec'eived- by :Engineer at least fifteen (10) days prior to the date for
receipt of Bids. Each such request shall include the narrie of the material or equipment for
which it is to be substituted and a c()mplete description of the proposed substitute including
drawings, cuts, performance and test . data and any other . information necessary for an
evaluation. A statement setting forth any changes in other materials, equipment of Work that
incorporation of the substitute would require shall be included. The burden of proof of the
merit of the proposed substitute is upon the Bidder. The Engineer's decision of approval or
disapproval of a proposed substitution shall be final. If Engineer approves any proposed
substitution, such approval will be set forth in an Addendum issued to all prospective Bidders.
Bidders shall ~ot rely upon approvals made in any other manner.
IB-3
K;\42706\AoM INISPECSII NST .Blo
9.
Bid Form.
9.1 The Bid Form is included with the Bidding Documents; additional copies may be
obtained from Engineer (or the issuing office).
9.2 All blanks on the Bid Form must be completed in ink or by typewriter.
9.3 Bids by corporations must be executed in the corporate name by the president or a vice-
president (or other corporate officer accompanied by evidence of authority to sign) and
the corporate seal must be affixed and attested by the secretary or an assistant secretary.
The corporate address and state of incorporation must be shown below the signature.
9.4 Bids by partnerships must be executed in the partnership name and signed by a partner,
whose title must appear under the signature and the official address of the partnership
must be shown below the signature.
9.5 All names must be typed or printed below the signature.
9.6 The Bid shall contain ail acknowledgement of receipt of all Addenda (the numbers of
which must be filled in on the Bid Form).
9.7 The address and telephone number for communications regarding the Bid must be
shown.
10.
Submission of Bids.
Bids shall be submitted at the time and place indicated in the Advertisement or Invitation to
Bid and shall be enclosed in an opaque sealed envelope, marked with the Project title (and, if
applicable, the designated portion of the Project for which the Bid is submitted) and name and
address of the Bidder and accompanied by the Bid security and other required documents. If (\
the Bid is sent through the mail or other delivery system the sealed envelope shall be enclosed
in a separate envelope with the notation "BID ENCLOSED" on the face of it.
11.
Modification and Withdrawal of Bids.
11.1 Bids may be modified or withdrawn by an appropriate document duly executed (in the
manner that a Bid must be executed) and delivered to the place where Bids are to be
submitted at any time prior to the opening of Bids.
IB-4
K:142706\AOM INISPECSIINST .BID
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
. . .
11.2 If, within twenty-four (24)hours after Bids are opened, any Bidder files a duly signed
and notorized written rtoti&e with Owner and promptly thereafter demonstrates to the
reasonable satisfaction of Owner that there was a material and substantial mistake in the
preparation of its Bid, that Bidder may withdraw its Bid and the Bid security will be
returned. Thereafter, that Bidder will be disqualified from further bidding on the Work
to be provided under the Contract Documents.
12~
Opening of Bids.
Bids will be opened and (unless obviously non-responsive) read aloud publicly. An abstract
of the amounts of the base Bids and major alternates (if any) will be made available to Bidders
after the opening of Bids.
13.
Bids to Remain Subject to Acceptance.
All bids will remain subject to acceptance for sixty (60) days after the day of the Bid opening,
but Owner may, in its sole discretion, release any Bid and return the Bid security prior to that
date.
14.
Award of Contract.
14.1 Owner reserves the right to reject any and all Bids, to waive any and all informalities not
involving price, time or ch<:!l1ges in the Work and to negotiate contract terms with the
Successful Bidder, and the right to disregard all nonconforming, nonresponsive,
unbalanced or conditional Bids. Also, Owner reserves the right to reject the Bid of any
Bidder if Owner believes that it would not be in the best interest of the Project to make
an award to that Bidder, whether because the Bid is not responsible or the Bidder is
unqualified or of doubtful financial ability or fails to meet any other pertinent standard
or criteria established by Owner. Discrepancies in the multiplication of units of Work
and unit prices will be resolved in favor of the unit prices. Discrepancies between the
indicated sum of any column of figures and the correct sum thereof will be resolved in
favor of the correct sum.
14.2 In evaluating Bids, Owner will consider the qualifications of the Bidders, whether or not
the Bids comply with the prescribed requirements, and such alternates, unit prices and
other data, as may berequested in the Bid Form or prior to the Notice of Award.
.
14.3 Owner may consider the qualifications and experience of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and
other persons and organizations propdsed for those portions of the Work as to which the
identity of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other persons and organizations must be
submitted as provided in the Supplementary Conditions. Owner also may consider the
operating costs, maintenance requirements, performance data and guarantees of major
items of materials and equipment proposed for incorporation in the Work when such
data is required to be submitted prior to the Notice of Award.
ID-5
K:\42706\ADMIN\SPECS\INST .BID
14.4 Owner may conduct such investigations as Owner deems necessary to assist in the
evaluation of any Bid and to establish the responsibility, qualifications and financial
ability of Bidders, proposed Subcontractors, Suppliers and. other persons and
organizations to perform and furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract
Documents to Owner's satisfaction within the prescribed time.
14.5 If the contract is to be awarded, it' will be awarded to the lowest Bidder whose evaluation
by Owner indicates to Owner that the award will be in the best interests of the Project.
14.6 If the contract is to be awarded, Owner will give the Successful Bidder a Notice of
Award within forty-five (45) days after the day of the Bid opening.
15.
Contract Security.
Paragraph 5.1 of the General Conditions and the Supplementary Conditions set forth Owner's
requirements as to performance and payment Bonds. When the Successful Bidder delivers the
executed Agreement to Owner, it must be accompanied by the required performance and
payment Bonds.
16.
Signing of Agreement.
When owner gives a Notice of Award to the Successful Bidder, it will be accompanied by the
required number of unsigned counterparts of the Agreement with all other written Contract
Documents attached. Within fifteen (15) days thereafter Contractor shall sign and deliver the
equired number of counterparts of the Agreement and attached documents to Owner with the
required Bonds. Within ten (10) days thereafter Owner shall deliver one (1) fully signed
counterpart to Contractor. Each counterpart is to be accompanied by a complete set of the
Drawings with appropriate identification.
IB-6
K:142706\ADMIN\SPECS\INST. BID
I
I
I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
. GENERAL CONDITIONS
I ARTICLE I-DEFINITIONS
Wherever used in these General Conditions or in the other 'Cootr~t
I Documents the following terms have the meanings indi~terl which
are applicable to both the singular and plural thereof:
Addenda-Written or graphic Instruments issued prior to the
I opening of Bids which clarify, correct or change the bidding
documents or the Contract Documents. -
. Bid-- The offer or proposal of the bidder submitted on the
I prescribed form setting forth the prices for' the Work to be
performed. .
I Bonds--Bid, performance and payment bonds and other
instruments of security.
Change Order-A document recommended by ENGlNE:ER which
I is signed by CONTRACTOR and OWNER and authorizes an
addition, deletion or revision in the Work, or an adjustment in the
Contract Price or the Contract Time, issued 00 or after the
I Effective Date of the Agreement.
Contract Documents-The Agreement, Addenda (whi~h pertain to
I the Contr~t Documents), CONTRACTOR's Bid (mcluding
documentatlOn accompanying the Bid and any post Bid
documentation submitted prior to the Notice of Award) when
attached as an exhibit to the Agreement, the Bonds; these General
I Conditions, the Supplementary Conditions, the Specifications and
the Drawings as the same are more specifically identified in the
Agreement, together with all amendments, modifications and
I supplements issued pursuant to paragraphs 3.4 and 3.5 on or after
the Effective Date of the Agreement C
_ Contract Price-The moneys payable by OwNER to. CON-
I TRACTOR under the Contract Documents as. stated intbe
Agreement (subject to the provisions of paragraph 11.9;1 in the
case of Unit Price Work).. . --
I Contract Time-The number of days (computed as provided in
paragraph I? .2) or the date stated in the Agreeffient for the C
completion of the Work. - .
I CONTRACTOR- The person, fIrm or corporation 'with whom
OWNER has entered into the Agreement. . .
I
I
Defective--An adjectiv~ which when modifying the word Work
refers to Work that is unsatisfactory, faulty or deficient, or does not
conform to the Contract Documents, or does not meet the
requirem~ts of any inspection, reference standard, test or approval
referred to 10 the Contract Documents, or has b~ damaged prior
to ENGINEER's recommendation of final payment (unless
responsibility for the protection thereof has been assumed by
OWNER at Substantial Completion in accordance with paragraph
14X or 14.10).
Drawings-The drawings which show the character and scope of
the Work to be performed and which have been prepared or
approved by ENGINEER and are referred to in the Contract
Documents.
Effective DaJe of the Agreement-The date indicated in the
Agreement on which it becomes effective, but if no such date is
in~cated it means the date on which the Agreement is signed and
dehvered by the last of the two parties to sign and deliver.
ENGINEER-The person, fum or corporation named as such in
the Agreement.
Freld Order-A written order issued by ENGINEER which orders
minor changes in the Work in accordance with paragraph 9.5 but
which does not mvolve a change in the Contract Price or the
Contract Time.
General Requirements-Sections of Division I of the Speci-
fications .
Laws and Regulations,' Laws or ReguIations--Laws, rules,
regulations, ordinances, codes and/or orders.
Notke of Award--The written notice by OWNER to the apparent
successful bidder stating that upon compliance by the apparent
successful bidder with the conditions precedent enumerated
therein, within the time specified, OWNER will sign and deliver
the Agreement.
Notice 10 Proceed-A written notice given by OWNER to
CONTRACTOR (with a copy to ENGINEER) fixing the date on
which the Contract Time will commence to nul and on which
CONTRACTOR shall start to perform CONTRACTOR'S
obligations under the Contract Documents.
OWNER-The public body or authority, corporation, association,
firm or person with whom CONTRACTOR has entered into the
Agreement and for whom the Work is to be provided.
Partial UtiJization-Placing a portion of the Work in service for the
purpose for which it is intended (or a related purpose) before
reaching Substantial Completion for all the Work. .
Project-The total construction of which the Work to be provided
under the Contract Documents may be the whole, or a part as
indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents. -
FlL E:H:IACCTGlCONTRAC1\MASffiRSI 1910.8
Resident Project Representative-- The authorized representative of
ENGINEER who is assigned to the site or any part thereof.
Shop Drawings-All drawings, diagrams, ill~ations, schedules
and other data which are specifically prepared by or for
CONTRACTOR to illustrate some portion of the Work and all
illustrations, brochures, standard schedules, performance charts,
instructions, diagrams and other information prepared by a
Supplier and submitted by CONTRACTOR to illustrate material
or equipment for some portion of the Work.
Specijications-- Those portions of the Contract Documents
consisting of written technical descriptions of materials, equipment,
construction systems, standards and workmanship as applied to the
Work and certain administrative details applicable thereto.
SubcontriUtor-An individual, firm or corporation having a direct
contract with CONTRACTOR or with any other Subcontractor for
the performance of a part of the Work at the cite.
Substantial Completion-The Work (or a specified part thereot)
has progressed to the point where, in the opinion of ENGINEER
as evidenced by ENGINEER's definitive certificate of Substantial
Completion, it is sufficiently complete, in acCordance with the
Contract Documents, so that the Work (or specified part) can be
utilized for the purposes for which it is intended; or if there be no
such certificate issued, when fmal payment is due in accordance
with paragraph 14.13. The tenns "substantially complete" and
"substantially completed" as applied to any Work refer to
Substantial Completion thereof.
Supplementary Conditions-The part of the Contract Documents
which amends or supplements these General Conditions .
Supplier--A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor,
materialman or vendor.
Underground FiUilities--AlI pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables,
wires, manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels or other such facilities
or attachments, and any encasementS containing such facilities
which have been installed underground to furnish any of the
following services or materials: electricity, gases, steam, liquid
petroleum prOducts, telephone or other communications, cable
television, sewage and drainage removal, traffic or other
control systems or water.
Unit Price Work--Work to be paid for on the basis of unit
pnces .
Work-- The entire completed construction or the various sep-
arately identifiable parts thereof required to be furnished under
the Contract Documents. Work is the result of performing
services, furnishing labor and furnishing and incorporating
materials and equipment into the construction, alias required
by the Contract Documents.
Work Directive Change--A written directive to CONTRAC-
TOR, issued on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement I
and signed by OWNER and recommended by ENGINEER,
ordering an addition, deletion or revision in the Work, or I
responding to differing or unforeseen physical conditions under
which the Work is to be 'performed as provided in paragraph
4.2 or 4.3 or to emergencies under paragraph 6.22. A Work I
Directive Change may not change the Contract Price or the
Contract Time, but is evidence that the parties expect that the
change directed or documented by a Work Directive Change I
will be incorporated in a subsequently issued Change Order
foUowing negotiations by the parties as to its effect, if any, on
the Contract Price or Contract Time as provided in paragraph I
10.2.
Written Amendment-A written amendment of the Contract
Documents, signed by OWNER and CONTRACTOR on or I
after the Effective Date of the Agreement and normally dealing
with the non engineering or nontechnical rather than strictly
Work-related aspects of the Contract Documents. I
ARTICLE 2--PRELIMINAR Y MA TIERS
I
Delivery of Bonds:
2.1. When CONTRACTOR delivers the executed Agreements I
to OWNER, CONTRACTOR shall also deliver to OWNER
such Bonds as CONTRACTOR may be required to furnish in
accordance with paragraph 5.1.
I
Copies of Documents:
2.2. OWNER shall furnish to CONTRACTOR up to ten
copies (unless otherwise specified in the Supplementary Con- I
ditions) of the Contract Documents as are reasonably nec-
essary for the execution of the Work. Additional copies will be
furnished, upon request, at the cost of reproduction.
I
Commencement of ContriUt Time; Notice to Proceed:
2.3. The Contract Time will commence to run on the thirtieth I
day after the Effective Date of the Agreement, or, if a Notice
to Proceed is given, on the day indicated in the Notice to
Proceed. A Notice to Proceed may be given at any time within
thirty days after the Effective Date of the Agreement. In no I
event will the Contract Time commence to run later than the
seventy-fIfth day after the day of Bid opening or the thirtieth
day after the Effective Date of the Agreement, whichever date I
is earlier.
Starting the Project: I
2.4. CONTRACTOR shall start to perform the Work on the
date when the Contract Time commences to run, but no Work
shall be done at the site prior to the date on which the Contract I
Time commences to run.
Before Starting Construction:
2.5. Before undertaking each part of the Work, CON- I
2
F1LE:H:\ACCTGlCON1ll.AC1\MASTERSI 191 0.8
I
I TRACTOR shall carefully study and c9mpare the Contract
Documents and check and verify pertinent figures shown
I thereon and all applicable field measurements. COl'fTRAC-
TOR shall promptly report in writing to ENGiNEER any
conflict, error or discrepancy which CONTRACTOR may
I discover and shall obtain a written interpretation ,or Clarifi-
cation from ENGINEER before proceeding with any Work
affected thereby; however, CONTRACTOR shall not be liable
I to OWNER or ENGINEERfor failure to report any conflict,
error or discrepancy in the Contract Documents, unless
CONTRACTOR had actual knowledge thereof or should
I reasonably have known thereof.
2.6. Within ten days after the Effective Date of the Agree-
ment (unleSs otherwise specified in the General Requirements),
I CONTRACTOR shall submit to ENGINEER for review:
I
I
2.6.1. an estimated progress schedule iDdicating the
starting and completion dates of the various stages of the
Work
2.6.2. a preliminary schedule of Shop Drawing sub-
missions; and
I
2.6.3. a preliminary schedule of values for all of the
Work which will include quantities and prices' o(items
aggregating the Contract Price and will subdivide the Work
into component parts in sufficient detail to serve as the
basis for progress payments during construction. Such
prices will include an appropriate amount of overhead aDd
profit applicable to each item of Work which will be con- "
firmed in writing by CONTRACTOR at the time of sub-
mISSIOn.
I
I
I 2:7. Before any Work at the site is started, CONTRAC-
TOR shall deliver to OWNER, with a copy to ENGINEER,
certificates (and other evidence of insurance requested by
I OWNER) which CONTRACTOR is required to purchase and
maintain in accordance with paragraphs 5.3 and 5.4, and
. OWNER shall deliver to CONTRACTOR certificates (and
I other evidence.of insurance requested by CONTRACTO~)
which OWNER is required to purchase and maintain ,'in
accordance with paragraphs 5.6 and 5:7. .
I Preconstruction Conference:
2.8. Within twenty days after the Effective Date of the
Agreement., but before CONTRACTOR starts the Work at the
I site, a conference attended by CONTRACTOR; ENGINEER
and others as appropriate will be held to discuss the schedules
referred to in paragraph 2.6, to discuss procedures for handling
I Shop Drawings and other submittals and for 'processing
Applications for Payment, and to establish a working
understanding among the parties as to the Work.
I
I
FinalWng Schedules:
2.9. At least ten days before submission of the fITst Appli-
cation for PaYID,ent a conference attended by CONTRACTOR,
ENGINEER and others as appropriate will be held to frnalize
the schedules submitted in accordance with paragraph 2.6. The
finalized progress schedule will be acceptable to. ENGINEER
as providing an orderly progression of the Work to completion
within the Contract Time, but such acceptance will neither
impose on ENGINEER responsibility for the progress or
scheduling of the Work nor relieve CONTRACTOR from full
responsibility there for. The fmalized schedule of Shop
Drawing submissions will be acceptable to ENGINEER as
providing a workable arrangement for processing the
submissions. The finalized schedule of values will be
acceptable to ENGINEER as to form and substance.
ARTICLE 3--CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT,
AMENDING, REUSE
InJenJ:
3.1. The Contract Documents comprise the entire agree-
ment between OWNER and CONTRACTOR concerning the
Work. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is
called for by one is as binding as if called for by all. The
Contract Documents will be construed in accordance with the
law of the place of the Project.
3.2. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to describe
a functionally complete Project (or part thereof) to be con-
structed in accordance with' the Contract Documents. Any
Work, materials or equipment that may reasonably be inferred
from the Contract Docwnents as being required to produce the
intended result will be supplied whether or not specifically
called for. When words which have a well-known technical or
trade meaning are used to describe Work, materials or
equipment such words shall be interpreted in accordance with
that meaning. Reference to standard specifications, manuals or
codes of any technical societY, organization or association, or
to the Laws or Regulations of any goveinmental authority,
whether such reference be specific or by implication, shall
mean the latest standard specific.ation, manual, code or Laws
or Regulations in effect at the time of opening of Bids (or, on
the Effective Date of the Agreement if there were no Bids),
except as may be othenvise specifically stated. However, no
. provision of any referenced standard specification, manual or
code (whether or not specifically incorporated by reference in
the Contract Documents) shall be effective to change the duties
and responsibilities of 0-WNER, CONTRACTOR or
ENGINEER, or any of their consultants, agents or employees
from those set forth in the Contract Documents, nor shall it be
effective to assign to ENGINEER, or any of ENGINEER's
consultants, agents or employees, any duty or authority to
supervise or direct the furnishing or performance of the Work
. or any duty or authority to undertake responsibility contrary to
3
FILE:H:IACCTG\CONTRACTlMASTERSlI910.8
the provisions of paragraph 9.15 or 9.16. Clarifications and
interpretations of the Contract Documents shall be issued by
ENGINEER as provided in paragraph 9.4.
3.3. If, during the performance of the Work, CONTRAC-
TOR fmds a conflict, error or discrepancy in the Contract
Documents, CONTRACTOR shall so report to ENGINEER
in writing at once and before proceeding with the Work
affected thereby shall obtain a written interpretation or
clarification from ENGINEE~ however, CONTRACTOR
shall not be liable to OWNER or ENGINEER "for failure to
report any conflict, error or discrepancy in the Contract
Documents unless CONTRACTOR had actual knowledge
thereof or should reasonably have known thereof.
Amending and Supplementing ConJrtut Documents:
3.4. The Contract Documents may be amended to provide
for additions, deletions and revisions in the Work or to modify
the terms and conditions thereof in one or more of the
following ways:
3.4.1. a formal Written Amendment,
3.4.2. a Change Order (pursuant to paragraph 10.4), or
3.4.3. a Work Directive Change (pursuant to paragraph
10.1).
As indicated in paragraphs 11.2 and 12.1, Contract Price and
Contract Time may only be changed by a Change Order or a
Written Amendment.
3.5. In addition, the requirements of the Contract Docu-
ments may be supplemented, and minor variations and devia-
tions in the Work may be authorized, in one or more of the
following ways:
3.5.1. a Field Order (pursuant to paragraph 9.5),
3.5.2. ENGINEER's approval of a Shop Drawing or
Sample (pursuant to paragraphs 6.26 and 6.27), or
3.5.3. ENGINEER's written interpretation or clarifi-
cation (pursuant to paragraph 9.4).
Reuse of Documents:
3.6. Neither CONTRACTOR nor any Subcontractor or
Supplier or other person or organization performing or fur-
nishing any of the Work under a direct or indirect contract with
OWNER shall have or acquire any title to or ownership rights
in any of the Drawings, Specifications or other documents (or
copies of any thereof) prepared by or bearing the seal of
ENGINEER; and they shall not reuse any of them on
extensions of the Project or any other project without written
consent of OWNER and ENGINEER and specific written I
verification or adaptation by ENGINEER.
I
ARTICLE 4-A V AllABILITY OF LANDS; PHYSICAL
CONDmONS: REFERENCE POINTS I
A vailability of Lands:
4.1. OWNER shall fuinish, as indicated in the Contract I
Documents, the lands upon which the Work is to be performed,
rights-of-way and easements for access thereto, and such other
lands which are designated for the use of CONTRACTOR.
Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in I
existing facilities will be obtained and paid for by OWNER,
unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. If
CONTRACTOR. believes that any delay in OWNER's I
furnishing these lands, rights-of-way or easements entitles
CONTRACTOR to an extension of the Contract Time,
CONTRACTOR may make a claim there for as provided in I
Article 12. CONTRACTOR shall provide for all additional
lands and access thereto that may be required for temporary
construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment. I
Physical Conditions:
4.2.1. Explorations and Reports: Reference is made to I
the Supplementary Conditions for identification of those
reports ofe?qJlorations and tests of subsurface conditions at
the site that have been utilized by ENGINEER in prep-
aration of the Contract Documents. CONTRACTOR may I
rely upon the accuracy of the technical data contained in
such reports, but not upon nontechnical data, interpretations
or opinions. contained therein or for the completeness I
thereof for CONTRACTOR's purposes. Except as indi-
cated in the immediately preceding sentence and in para-
graph 4.2.6, CONTRACTOR shall have full responsibility I
with respect to subsurface conditions at the site.
4.2.2. Existing structures: Reference is made to the I
Supplementary Conditions for identification of those
drawings of physical conditions in or relating to existing
surface and subsurface structures (except Underground
Facilities referred to in paragraph 4.3) which are at or I
contiguous to the site that have been utilized by ENGI-
NEER in preparation of the Contract Documents. CON-
TRACTOR may rely upon the accuracy of the technical I
data contained in such drawings, but not for the complete-
ness thereof for CONTRACTOR's purposes. Except as
indicated in the immediately preceding sentence and in I
paragraph 4:2.6, CONTRACTOR shall have full respon-
sibility with respect to physical conditions in or relating to
such structures. I
4.2.3. Report of Differing Conditions: lfCONTRAC-
TOR believes that:
I
4
F1LE:H:\ACCTGlCONTRAC1\MASTI:RS\ \9\ 0.8
I
I
4.2.3.1. any technical data on which CONTRAC-
TOR is entitled to rely as provided in paragraphs 4.2.1
and 4.2.2 is inaccurate, or
I
. I.
f
4.2.3.2. any physical condition uncovered or
revealed .at the site differs materially from that indi-
cated, reflected or referred to. in the Contract Docu-
ments,
I
I CONTRACTOR shall, promptly after becoming aware thereof
and before performing any Work in connection therewith
I (except in an emergency as permitted by paragraph 6.22),
notify OWNER and ENGINEER in writing about the
inaccuracy or difference.
I
I
I
4.2.4. ENGINEERJs Review: ENGINEER will promptly
review the pertinent conditions, determine the necessity of
obtaining additional explorations or tests with respect
thereto and. advise OWNER in writing (with a copy to
CONTRACTOR) of ENGINEER's' . fmdings and
conclusions.
I
4.2.5. Possible Document Change: If ENGINEER
concludes that there is a material error in the Contract.
Documents' or that because of newly discovered conditions
a change in the Contract Documents is required, a Work
Directive Change or a Change Order will be- issued as
provided in Article 10 to reflect. and document the
consequences of the inaccuracy or difference;
I
I
- 4.2.6. Possible Price and Tune.AJQustmenJs: In each-such
case, an increase. or decrease in the Contract Price or. an
extension or shortening of the Contract Time, or any
combination thereof, will be allowable to the extent that
they are attributable to any such inaccuracy or difference.
If OWNER and CONTRACTOR are unable to wee as to
the amount or length thereof, a claim may be made there for
as provided in Articles 11 and 12.
I
I
Physical Conditions-Underground Faci/JJies:.
4.3.1. Shown or Indicated: The information and data
I shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with respect to
existing Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the site.is
based. on information and data furnished to OWNER or
I ENGINEER by the owners of such Underground Facilities or
by others. Unless it is otherwise expressly provided in the
Supplementary Conditions: . .
I
I
4.3.1.1. OWNER and ENGINEER shall.'not be
responsible for the accuracy or completeness of any such
information or data; and,
I
4.3.1.2. CONTRACTOR shall have full responsibility
for reviewing and checking all such information and data,
I
for locating all Underground Facilities shown or indicated
in the Contract Documents, for coordination of the Work
with the owners of such Underground. Facilities during
constrUction, for the safety and protection thereof as
provided in paragraph 6.20 and repairing any damage
thereto resulting from the Work, the cost of all of which
will be considered as having been included in the Contract
Price.
4.3.2. Not Shown or Indicated. If an Underground Facility
is uncovered or revealed at or contiguous to the site which was
not shown or indicated in the Contract Documents and which
CONTRACTOR could not reasonably have been expected to
be aware of, CONTRACTOR shall, promptly after becoming
aware thereof and before performing any Work affected
thereby (except in an emergency as permitted by paragraph
6.22), identify the owner of such Underground Facility and
give written notice thereof to that owner and to OWNER and
ENGINEER. ENGINEER will promptly review the
Underground Facility to determine the extent to which the
Contract Documents. should be modified to reflect and
document the consequences 'of the existence of the
Underground Facility, and the Contract Documents will be
amended or supplemented to the extent necessary. During such
time, CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the safety and
protection of such Underground Facility as provided in
paragraph 6.20. CONTRACTOR shall be allowed an increase
in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time, or
both, to the extent that they are attributable to the existence of
any Underground Facility that was not shown or indicated in
the Contract Documents and which CONTRACTOR could not
. reasonably have been expected to be aware of. If the parties
are unable to agree as to the amount or length thereof,
CONTRACTOR may make a claim there for as provided in
Articles 11 and 12.
Reference Points:
4.4. OWNER shall provide engineering surveys to establish
reference points for construction which in ENGINEER's
judgment are necessary to enable CONTRACTOR to proceed
with the Work. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for lay-
.ing out the Work (unless otherwise specified in the General
Requirements),. shall protect and preserve the established
reference points and shall make no changes or relocations
without the prior written approval of OWNER. CONTRAC-
TOR shall report to ENGINEER whenever any reference point
is lost or destroyed or requires relocation because of necessary
changes in grades or locations, and shall be responsible for the
accurate replacement or relocation of such reference points by
professionally qualifiedpersonneI.
ARTICLE 5--BONDS AND INSURANCE
. Performance f:lnd Other Bonds:
5
F1LE:H:IACCTGICONTRACl\MASfERS\ 19\ 0.8
5.1. CONTRACTOR shall furnish performance and pay-
ment Bonds, each in an amount at least equal to the Contract
Price as security for the faithful performance and payment of
all CONTRACTOR's obligations under the Contract Docu-
ments. These Bonds shall remain in effect at least until one
year after the date when final payment becomes due, except as
otherwise provided by Law or Regulation or by the Contract
Documents. CONTRACTOR shall also furnish such other
Bonds as are required by the Supplementary Conditions. All
Bonds shall be in the forms prescribed by Law or Regulation
or by the Contract Documents and be executed by such
sureties as are named in the current list of "Companies Holding
Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal
Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies" as published
in Circular 570 (amended) by the Audit Staff Bureau of
AccOlmts, U.S. Treasury Department. All Bonds signed by an
agent must be accompanied by a certified copy of the authority
to act.
5.2.'1f the surety on any Bond furnished by CONTRAC-
TOR is declared a bankrupt or becomes insolvent or its right
to do business is terminated in any state where any part of the
Project is located or it ceases to meet the requirements of
paragraph 5.1, CONTRACTOR shall within five days
thereafter substitute another Bond and Surety, both of which
must be acceptable to OWNER.
Contr~tor's LiIlbility Insurance:
5.3. CONTRACTOR shall purchase and maintain such
comprehensive general liability and other. insurance as is
appropriate for the Work being performed and furnished and
as will provide protection from claims set forth below which
may arise out of or result from CONTRACTOR's performance
and furnishing of the Work and CONTRACTOR's other
obligations under the Contract Documents, whether it is to be
performed or furnished by CONTRACTOR., by any
Subcontractor, by anyone directly or indirectly employed by
any of them to perform or furnish any of the Work, or by
anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable:
5.3.1. Claims under workers' or workmen's compen-
sation, disability benefits and other similar employee ben-
efit acts;
5.3.2. Claims for damages because of bodily injury,
occupational sickness or disease, or death of CONTRAC-
TOR's employees;
5.3.3. Claims for damages because of bodily injury,
sickness or disease, or death of any person other than
CONTRACTOR's employees;
5.3.4. Claims for damages insured by personal injury
liability coverage which are sustained (a) by any person as
a result of an offense directly or indirectly related to the I
employment of such person by CONTRACTOR., or (b) by
any other person for any other reason; I
5.3.5. Claims for damages, other than to the Work itself,
because of injury to or destruction of tangible property I
wherever located, including loss of use resulting
therefrom;
5.3.6. Claims arising out of operation of Laws or Reg- I
ulations for damages because of bodily injury or death of
any person or for damage to property; and
5.3.7. Clilimsfor damages because of bodily injury or I
death of any person or property damage arising out of the
ownership, maintenance or use of any motor vehicle. I
The insurance required by this paragraph 5.3 shall include the
specific coverages and be written for not less than the limits of I
liability and coverages provided in the Supplementary
Conditions, or required by law, whichever is greater. The
comprehensive general liability insurance shall include I
completed operations insurance. All of the policies of insur-
ance so required to be purchased and maintained (or the
certificates or other evidence thereof) shall contain a provision I
or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be
cancelled., materially changed or renewal refused until at least
thirty days' prior written notice has been given to OWNER and
ENGINEER by certified mail. All such insurance shall remain I
in effect until final payment and at all times there aft when
CONTRACTOR may be correcting, removing or replacing
defective Work in accordance with paragraph 13.12. In I
addition, CONTRACTOR shall maintain such complete
operations insurance for at least two years after fmal pay me
q and furnish OWNER with evidence of continuation of such I
insurance at final payment and one year thereafter.
Contr~tuaJ. Lability Insurance: I
5.4. The comprehensive general liability insurance required
by paragraph 5.3" will include contractual liability insurance
applicable to CONTRACTOR's obligations under paragraphs I
6.30 and 6.31.
Owner's LiIlbility Insurance:
5.5. OWNER shall be responsible for purchasing and I
maintaining OWNER's own liability insurance and, at
OWNER's option, may purchase and maintain such insurance
as will protect OWNER against claims which may arise from I
operations under the Contract Documents.
Property Insurance: I
5.6. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary
Conditions, OWNER shall purchase and maintain property
insurance upon the Work at the site to the full insurable value I
6
FILE: H:\ACCTG\COI'ITRACl\MASTERSI 191 0.8
I
I thereof (subject to such ,deductible amounts as may be pro-
vided in the Supplementary Conditions or required byLaws
I and Regulations). This insurance shall include the in~~!,ests of
OWNER, CONfRACTOR, Subcontractors, ENGINEER and
ENGINEER's consultants in the Work, all of whom shall be
I listed as insureds or additional insured parties, shall insure
against the perils of fire and extended coverage and shall
. include "all. risk" insurance for- physical loss and damage
I including theft, vandalism and malicious mischief; Collapse and
water damage,'and such other perils as may be provided in the
Supplementary Conditions, and shall include damages, losses
and expenses arising out of or resulting from any insured loss
I or incurred in the repair or replacement of any msured property
(including but not limited to fees and charges of engineers,
architects, attorneys and other professionals). If not covered
I under the "all risk" insurance or otherwise proviaed in the
Supplementary Conditions, CONTRACTOR shall purchase
and maintain similar property insurance on portions of the
I Work stored on and off the site or in transit when such portions
of the Work are to be included in an Application for Payment.
I
I
5 .7. OWNER shall purchase and maintain such boiler and
machinery insurance or additional propertY insUr~ce as may
be required by the Supplementary Conditions or Laws and
Regulations which will include the interests of OWNER,
CONTRACTOR, Subcontractors, ENGINEER AND
ENGINEER's consultants in the Work, all of whom shall be
listed as insured or additional insured parties. .
I
5.8. All the policies of insurance (or the certificates or other
evidence thereof) required to' be pUrchased and maintained by
I OWNER in accordance with paragraphs 5.6 and 5.7 will
contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded
will not be cancelled or materially changed or renewal refused
until at least thirty days"prior Written notice has been given to
CONTRACTOR by certified mail and will contain waiver-
provisions in accordance with paragraph 5.11.2.
I
I
5.9. OWNER shall not be responsible for purchasing and
maintaining .any property insurance to protect the interests of
I CONTRACTOR, Subcontractors or others in the Work to the .
extent of ,any deductible amounts that are provided in the
Supplementary, Conditions. The risk of loss within' the
deductible amount, will be borne by CONTRACTOR, Sub-
I contractor or others suffering any such loss and if any of them
wishes property insUrance coverage within the lim.its of such
amounts, each may purchase 'and maintain it at the purchaser's
I own expense.
I
I
I
5.10. If CONTRACTOR requests in writing ~at other
special insurance be included in the property ~surance policy,
OWNER shall, if possible, include such insurance; and the'
cost thereof will be charged to CONfRACTOR by appropriate
Change Order or Written Amendment. Prior to commencement
of the Work at the site, OWNER sh'all in writing advise
CONfRACTOR whether or not such other insurance has been
procured by.OWNER.
,'I .tl
Waiver of Rights:
5.11.1. OWNER and CONTRACTOR waive all rights
against each other for all losses and damages caused by any
of the perils covered by the policies of insurance provided
in response to paragraphs 5.6 and 5.7 and any other
property insurance applicable to the Work, and also waive
all such rights against the Subcontractors, ENGINEER,
ENGINEER's consultants and all other parties named as
insureds in such policies for losses and damages so caused.
As required by paragraph 6.11, each subcontract between
CONTRACTOR and a Subcontractor will contain similar
waiver provisions by the Subcontractor in favor of
OWNER, CONTRACTOR,. ENGINEER, ENGINEER's
consultants and all other parties named as insureds. None
. of the above waivers shall extend to the rights that any of
the insured parties may have to the proceeds of insurance
held by OWNER as trUstee or otherwise payable under any
policy, so issued.
5.11.2. OWNER and CONTRACTOR intend that any
policies provided in response to paragraphs 5.6 and 5.7
shall protect all of the parties insured and provide primary
coverage for all losses and damages caused by the perils
covered thereby. Accordingly, all such policies shall con- .
tain provisions to the effect that in the event of payment of
any loss or damage the insurer will have. no rights of
recovery against ,any of the parties named as insureds or
additional insureds, and if the insurers require separate
. waiver forms to be signed by ENGINEER or ENGI-
NEER's consultant. OWNER will obtain the same. and if
such waiver forms are required of any Subcontractor,
CONTRACTOR will obtain the same.
Receipt and Application of Proceeds:
5.12. Any insured loss under the. policies of insurance
required by paragraphs 5.6 and 5.7 will be adjusted with
OWNER and made payable to OWNER as trustee for the
insureds, as their interests may appear, subject to the require-
ments of any applicable 'mortgage clause and of paragraph
5.13. OWNER shall deposit in a separate account any money
so' received, and shall distribute it in accordance with such
agreement as the parties in interest may reach. If no other
special agreement is reached the damaged Work shall be
repaired or replaced, the moneys so received applied on
account thereof and the Work ilnd the cost thereof covered by
an appropriate Change Order or Written Amendment.
5.13. OWNER as trustee shall have power to adjust and
settle any loss with the insurers unless one of the parties in
interest shall object in writing, within fifteen days after the
7
FI LE: H :IACCfGlCOi'<ffiACI\MASTE RS\ 191 0.8
occurrence of loss to OWNER's exercise of this power. If such
objection be made, OWNER as trustee shall make settlement
with the insurers in accordance with such agreement as the
parties in interest may reach. If required in writing by any
party in interest, OWNER as trustee shall, upon the occurrence
of an insured loss, give bond for the proper performance of
such duties.
Acceptance of Insurance:
5.14. If OWNER has any objection to the coverage
afforded by or other provisions of the insurance required to be
purchased and maintained by CONTRACTOR in accordance with
paragraphs 5.3 and 5.4 on the basis of its not complying with
the Contract Docwnents, OWNER shall notify CONTRACTOR in
writing thereof within ten days of the date of delivery of such
certificates to OWNER in accordance with paragraph 2.7. If
CONTRACTOR has any objection to the coverage afforded by or
other provisions of the policies of insurance required to be
purchased and maintained by OWNER in accordance with
paragraphs 5.6 and 5.7 on the basis of their not complying with
the Contract Documents, CONTRACTOR shall notify OWNER in
writing thereof within ten days of the date of delivery of such
certificates to CONTRACTOR in accordance with paragraph
2.7. OWNER and CONTRACTOR shall each provide to the
other such additional information in respect of insurance
provided by each as the other may reasonably request. Failure
by OWNER or CONTRACTOR to give any such notice of
objection within the time provided shall constitute acceptance ,. .
of such insurance purchased by the other as complying with the
Contract Documents .
Partial Utilization-Property Insurance:
5.15. If OWNER fmds it necessary to occupy or use a
portion or portions of the Work prior to Substantial Comple-
tion of all the Work, such use or occupancy may be accom-
plished in accordance wi th paragraph 14.10; provided that no
such use or occupancy shall commence before the insurers
providing the property insurance have acknowledged notice
thereof and in writing effected the changes in coverage neces-
sitated thereby. The insurers providing the property insurance
shall consent by endorsement on the policy or policies, but the
property insurance shall not be cancelled or lapse on account
of any such partial use or occupancy..
ARTICLE 6--CONTRACfOR'S RESPONSmILITIES
Supervision and Superintendence:
6.1. CONTRACTOR shall supervise and direct the Work
competently and efficiently, devoting such attention th~reto and
applying such skills and expertise. as may be necessary to
perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible for the means,
methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of
construction, but CONTRACTOR shall not be responsible for
the negligence of others in the design or selection of a specific I
. means, method,. technique, sequence or procedure of
construction which is indicated in and required by the Contract I
Documents. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible to see that
the finished' Work complies accurately with the Contract
Documents. I
I
I
I
6.2. CONTRACTOR shall keep on the Work at all times
during its progress a competent resident superintendent, who
shall not be replaced without written notice to OWNER and
ENGINEER except under extraordinary circumstances. The
superintendent will be CONTRACTOR's representative at the
site and shall have authority to act on behalf of CON-
TRACTOR. ~l communications given to the superintendent
shall be as binding as if given to. CONTRACTOR.
Labor, Materials and Equipment:
6.3. CONTRACTO~ shall provide competent, suitably
qualified personnel to survey and layout the Work and per- I
form construction as required by the Contract Documents.
CONTRACTOR shall at all times maintain good discipline
and order at th.e site. Except in connection with the safety or I
protection of persons or the Work or property at the site or
adjacent thereto,. aI)dexcept as otherwise indicated in the
Contract Documents, all Work at the site shall be performed
during regular working hours, and CONTRACTOR will not I
permit overtime work or the performance of Work on Sat-
urday, Sunday or any lc;:gal holiday without OWNER's written
consent given after prior written notice to ENGINEER.
I
6.4. Unless otherwise specified in the General Require-
ments, CONTRACtOR shall furnish and assume full respon- I
sibility for all materials, equipment, labor, transportation,
construction equipment and machinery, tools, appliances, fuel,
power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary facilities,
temporary facilities and all other facilities and incidentals
necessary for the furnishing, performance, testing, start-up and
completion of the Work.
I
6.5. All materials and equipment shall be of good quality I
and new, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Doc-
uments. If required by ENGINEER, CONTRACTOR shall I
furnish satisfactory evidence (including reports of required
tests) as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment.
All materials and equipment shall be applied, installed, con- I
nected, erected, used, cleaned and conditioned in accordance
with the instructions of the applicable Supplier except as
otherwise provided in the Contract Documents; but no pro- I
vision of any such instructions will be effective to assign to
ENGINEER, or any of ENGINEER's consultants, ;1gents or
employees, any duty or authority to supervise or direct the I
furnishing or performance of the Work or any duty or authority
to undertake responsibility contrary to the provisions of
paragraph 9.15 or 9.16.
I
8
FI LE:H:\ACCTGlCONTRACI\MASTERSI 191 0.8
I
I
A4Jusdng Progress Schedule:
I 6.6. CONTRACTOR shall submit to ENGINEER for
acceptance (to the extent indicated in paragraph, 2.9) adjust-
. ments in the progress schedule to reflect the impac! thereon of
I new developments; these will conform generally to the
progress ~chedule then in effect and additionally will comply
with any provisions of the General Requirements applicable
I thereto.
I
I
I
I
Substitutes or "Or-Equal" Items:
6.7.1. Whenever materials or equipment are specified or
described in the Contract Documents by using the name of
a proprietary item or the name of a particular Supplier the
naming of the item is intended to establish the type,
fUnction and quality required. Unless the name is followed
by words indicating that no substitution is permitted,
materials or equipment of other Suppliers may be accepted
by ENGINEER if sufficient information is submitted by
CONTRACTOR to allow ENGINEER to determine that
the material or equipment proposed is equiv"alent or equal
to that named. The procedure for review by ENGINEER
will include the following as supplement~ in the General.
Requirements. Requests for review of substitute items of
material and equipment Will not be accepted by ENGI-
NEER from anyone other than CONTRACTOR If CON-
TRACTOR wishes to furnish or use a substitute item of..
material or equipment, CONlRACTOR shall make written -'
application to ENGINEER for acceptance thereof,
certifying that the proposed substitute will perform ade-
quately the functions and achieve the results called for by
the general design, be similar and of equal substance to that
specified and be suited to the same use as that specified.
The application will state that the evaluation and
acceptance of the proposed substitute will not prejudice
CONTRACTOR's achievement of Substantial Completion
on time, whether or not acceptance of the substitute for use
in the Work will require a change in any of the Contract
Documents (or in the provisions of any other direct contract
with OWNER for work on the Project) to adapt the design .
to the proposed substitute and whether or not incorporation
or use of the substitute in connection with the Work is
subject to payment of any license fee or royalty. All
variations of the proposed substitute from that specified
will be identified in the application and available
maintenance, repair and replacement service will be indi-
cated. The application will also contain an itemized esti-
mate of all costs that will result directly or indirectly from
acceptance of such substitute, including costs of redesign
and claims of other contractors affected by the resulting
change, all of which shall be considered by ENGINEER in
evaluating the proposed substitute. ENGINEER may
require CONTRACTOR to furnish at CONTRACTOR's
expense additional data about the proposed substitute.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
6.7.2. If a specific means, method, technique, sequence
or procedure of construction is indicated in or required by
the Contract Documents, c:ONTRACTOR may furnish or
utilize a substitute means, method, sequence, technique or
procedure of construction acceptable to ,ENGINEER, if
CONTRACTOR submits sufficient information to allow
ENGINEER to determine that the substitute proposed is
equivalent to that indicated or required by the Contract
Documents. The procedure for review by ENGINEER will
be similar to that provided in paragraph 6.7.1 as applied by
ENGINEER and as may be supplemented in the General
Requirements.
6.7.3.ENGlNEER will be allowed a reasonable time
within which to evaluate each proposed substitute. ENGI-
NEER will be the sole judge of acceptability, and no
s~bstitute will be ordered, installed or utilized without
ENGINEER's prior written acceptance which will be evi-
. denced by either a Change Order or an approved Shop
Drawing. OWNER may require CONTRACTOR to fur-
nish at CONTRACTOR's expense a special performance
guarantee or other surety with respect to any substitute.
ENGINEER will record time required by, ENGINEER and
ENGINEER's consultants in evaluating substitutions
proposed by CONTRACTOR and in making changes in the
Contract Documents.occasioned thereby. Whether or not
ENGINEER accepts a proposed substitute, CON-
TRACTOR shall reimburse OWNER for the charges of
ENGINEER and ENGINEER's consultants for evaluating
each proposed substitute.
Concerning SubcontrfUtors, Suppliers and Others:
6.8.'t. CONTRACTOR shall not employ any Subcon-
tractor, Supplier or other person or organization (including
those acceptable to OWNER and ENGINEER as indicated
. in paragraph 6.8.2), -whether initially or as a substitute,
against whom OWNER or ENGINEER may have
reasonable objection.. CONTRACTOR shall not be
required to employ any Subcontractor, Supplier or other
person or organization to furnish or perform any of the
Work against whom CONTRACTOR has reasonable
objection.
6.8.2. If the Supplementary Conditions. require the
identity of certain Subcontractors, Suppliers or other per-
sons or organizations (including those who are to furnish
the principalitems,ofmaterials and equipment) to be sub-
mitted to OWNER in advance of the specified date prior to ,
the Effective Date of the Agreement for acceptance by
OWNER and ENGINEER and if CONTRACTOR has
submitted a list thereof in accordance with the Supple-
mentary Conditions, OWNER's or ENGINEER's accept-
ance (either in \\'riting or by failing to make written objec-
9
FILE:H:IACCfGlCOi'fI'RAC1\MAS"ffiRS\ 191 0.8
tion thereto by the date indicated for acceptance or objec-
tionin the bidding documents or the Contract Documents)
of any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or
organization so identified may be revoked on the basis of
reasonable objection after due investigation, in which case
CONTRACTOR shall submit an acceptable substitute, the
Contract Price will be increased by the difference in the
cost occasioned by such substitution and an appropriate
Change Order will be issued or Written Amendment
signed. No acceptance by OWNER or ENGINEER of any
such Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or
organization shall constitute a waiver of any right of
OWNER or ENGINEER to reject defective Work.
6.9. CONTRACTOR shall be fully responsible to OWNER
and ENGINEER for all acts and omissions of the'Subcon-
tractors, Suppliers and other persons and organizations per-
forming or furnishing any of the Work under. a direct or
indirect contract with CONTRACTOR just as CONTRAC-
TOR is responsible for CONTRACTOR's own acts and omis-
sions. Nothing in the Contract Documents shall create any
contractual relationship between OWNER or ENGINEER and
any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other' person or
organization, nor shall it create any obligation oil the part of
OWNER or ENGINEER to payor to see to the payment of
any moneys due any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other
person or organization except as may otherwise be required by
Laws and Regulations.
6.10. The divisions and sections of the Specifications and
the identifications of any Drawings shall not control CON-
TRACTOR in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or
Suppliers or delineating the Work to be performed by any
specific trade.
6.11. All Work performed for CONTRACTOR by a Sub-
contractor will be pursuant to an appropriate agreement
between CONTRACTOR and the Subcontractor which
officially binds the Subcontractor to the applicable terms and
conditions of the Contract Documents for the benefit of
OWNER and ENGINEER and contains waiver provisions as
required by paragraph 5.11. CONTRACTOR shall pay each
Subcontractor a just share of any insurance moneys received
by CONTRACTOR on accOlmt of losses under policies issued
pursuant to paragraphs 5.6 and 5.7.
PatenJ Fees and Royalties:
6.12. CONTRACTOR shall pay all license fees and roy-
alties and assume all costs incident to the use in the perfor-
mance of the Work or the incorporation in the Work of any
invention, design, process, product or device which is the
subject of patent rights or copyrights held by others. If a
particular invention, design, process, product or device is
specified in the Contract Documents for use in the performance
of the Work and if to the actual knowledge of OWNER or I
ENGINEER its use is subject to patent rights or copyrights
calling for the payment of any license fee or royalty to others, I
the existence of such rights shall be disclosed by OWNER in
the Contract Documents. CONTRACTOR shall indemnify and
hold harmless OWNER and ENGINEER and anyone directly I
or indirectly employed by either of them from and against all
claims, damages, losses aild expenses (including attorneys' fees
and court and arbitration costs) arising out of any infringement I
of patent rights or copyrights incident to the use in the
performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation
in the' Work of any invention, design, process, product or I
device not specified in the Contract Documents, and shall
defend all such claims in connection with any alleged
infringement of such rights.
I
PermiJs:
6.13. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary
Conditions, CONTRACTOR shall obtain and pay for all con- I'
'struction permits and licenses. OWNER shall assist CON-
TRACTOR, when necessary, in obtaining such permits and
licenses. CONTRACTOR shall pay all governmental charges I
and inspection fees necessary for the prosecution of the Work,
which are applicable at the time of opening of Bids, or if there
are no Bids on the Effective Date of the Agreement. CON-
TRACTOR shall pay all charges of utility owners for con- I
nections to the Work, and OWNER shall pay all charges of
such utility owners for capital costs related thereto such as
plant investment fees. I
Laws and Regulations:
6.14.1. CONTRACTOR shall give all notices and I
comply with all Laws and Regulations applicable to fur-
nishing and performance of the Work. Except where oth-
erwise expressly required by applicable Laws and Regu- I
. lations, neither OWNER nor ENGINEER shall be respon-
sible for monitoring CONTRACTOR's compliance with
any Laws or Regulations. I
I
6.14.2. If CONTRACTOR observes that the Specifi-
cations or Drawings lire at variance with any Laws or
Regulations, CONTRACTOR shall give ENGINEER
prompt written notice thereof, and any necessary changes
will be authorized by one of the methods indicated in
paragraph 304. If CONTRACTOR performs any Work I
knowing or having reason to know that it is contrary to
such Laws or Regulations, and without such notice to
ENGINEER, CONTRACTOR shall bear all costs arising I
therefrom; however, it shall not be CONTRACTOR's pri-
mary responsibility to make certain that the Specifications
and Drawings are in accordance with such Laws and I
Regulations .
Taxes:
I
10
FILE:H:\AccrGlCON11l.ACl\MASTERSI 191 0.8
I
I
6.15. CONTRACTOR shall pay all sales; consumer, use
and other similar taxes required to be paid by CONTRACTOR
I in accordance with the .Laws and Regulatians .of the-'~lace .of
the Project which are applicable during the performance of the
Wark. '
I Use of Premises:
6.16. CONTRACTOR shall confme construction equip-
I ment, the storage of materials and equipment and the oper-
atians .of warkers ta the Praject site and land and areas iden-
tified in and permitted by the Contract Documents and other
land and areas permitted'by Laws and Regulations,. rights-
I .of-way, permits and easements, and shall nat unreasonably
encumber the premises with canstruction equipment .or ather
materials .or equipment. CONTRACTOR shall assume full
I responsibility far any damage ta any such land .or area, .or ta
the .owner or occupant thereof or of any land .or areas cantig-
uous thereto, resulting from the performance.of the Work.
I Shauld any claim be made against OWNER-ar ENGINEER
by any such owner or occupant because of the performance of
the Work, CONTRACTOR shall promptly attempt to settle
I with such ather party by agreement or otherwise resalve the
claim by arbitration or at law. CONTRACTOR shall, to the
fullest extent pe~tted by Laws and Regulatians,indemnify
I and hald OWNER and ENGINEER harmless frornand against
all claims, damages, losses and expenses (including, but not
limited ta, fees .of engineers, architects, attarneys~d ather
prafessionals and court and arbitration costs) arising directly,"
I indirectly or consequentially out of any action, legal or equi-
table, brought by any such other party against OWNER or
ENGINEER to the extent based on a claim arising out .of
I CONTRACTOR's performance of the Work.
I
I
6.17. During the progress of the Work, CONTRACTOR
shall keep the premises free from acc~ulations of waste
materials, rubbish and other debris resulting from the Work.
At the completion of the Work CONTRACTOR shall remove
all waste materials, rubbish and debris frani and abaut the
premises as well as all tools, appliances, canstructian .equip-
ment and machinery, and surplus materials, and shallJeavethe.
site clean and ready for occupancy by OWNER CON-
I TRACTOR shall restare ta original condition all property nat
designated for alteration by the Contract Documents.
I 6.18. CONTRACTOR shall nat laad nar permit any part .of
any structure to be loaded in any manner that will endanger the'
structure, nor shall CONTRACTOR subject any part .of the
I Work or adjacent property to stresses or pressures that will
endanger it.
I
Record Documents:
6.19. CONTRACTOR shall maintain in a safe place at the
site one record copy of all Drawings, Specifications, Addenda,
I Written Amendments, Change Orders, Work Directive
I
Changes, Field Orders and written interpretations and
clarifications (issued pursuant to paragraph 9.4) in good order
and annatale(Ha shaw all changes made during canstructian.
These recard documents together with all appraved samples
and a caunterpart .of all approved Shap Drawings will be
available to ENGINEER for reference. Upon completion of the
Work, these recarddocuments, samples and Shap Drawings
will be delivered ta ENGINEER for OWNER.
Sqfety and Protection:
6.20. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for initiating,
maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and pro-
grams in cannectian with the Work. CONTRACTOR shall
take all necessary precautions for the safety .of, and shall
. provide the necessary pratectian ta prevent damage, injury .or
lass ta:
6.20.1. all employees on ,the Wark and other persons
and .organizations wha may be affected thereby;
, 6.20.2. all the Work and materials and equipment to be
incarporated therein, whether in starage an .or .off the site;
and
6.20.3. ather praperty at the site .or adjacent thereta,
including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, raad-
ways, structures, utilities and Undergraund Facilities nat
designated far remaval, relacatian .or replacement in the
course .of canstructian.
CONTRACTOR shall camply with all applicable.Laws and
Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction for the
safety .of persans .or property .or ta protect them fram damage,
injury .or lass; and shall erect and maintain. all necessary
safeguards far such safety and pratectian. CONTRACTOR
shall natify .owners .of adjacent praperty and .of Undergraund
Facilities and utility owners. when prosecution of the Work
may affect them, and shall cooperate with them in the pro-
tection, removal, relocation and replacement of their property.
All damage, injury or loss to any property referred to in
paragraph 6.20.2 or 6.20.3 caused, directly or indirectly, in
whole or in part, by CONTRACTOR, any Subcantractar,
Supplier or any other person or .organization directly or indi-
rectly employed by any .of them ta perfarm .or furnish any .of
the Wark or anyane for whase acts any .of them may be liable,
shall be remedied by CONTRACTOR (except damage or loss
attributable to the fault .of Drawings .or Specificatians .or ta the
acts .or amissians .of OWNER .or ENGINEER .or anyane
employed by either .of them .or anyane far whase acts either .of
them n:mY be liable, and nat attributable, directly .or indirectly,
ih whale .or in. part; ta the fault .or negligence .of CON-
TRACTOR). CO~CTOR's duties and responsibilities far
the safety and protection of the. Work shall continue until such
time as all the Wark is campleted and ENGINEER has issued
II
F1LE:H:IACcrGlCONTRACTlMASl1:RS\ 191 0.8
a natice to'OWNER and CONTRACTOR in accardance with
paragraph 14.13 that the Wark is acceptab Ie (except as
.otherwise expressly provided in cannectian with Substantial
Campletian).
6.21. CONTRACTOR shall designate a responsible rep-
resentative at the site whase duty shall be the prevention of
accidents. This person shall be CONTRACTOR's superin-
tendent unless otherwise designated in writing by CON-
TRACTOR ta OWNER.
Emergencies:
6.22. In emergencies affecting the safety .or pratectian .of
persans .or the Wack .or praperty at the site .or adjacentthereta,
CONTRACTOR, withaut special instructian or autharizatian
fram ENGINEER .or OWNER, is .obligated ta act to prevent
threatened damage, injury .or lass. CONTRACTOR shall give
ENGINEER prampt written natice if CONTRACTOR
believes that any significant changes in the Wark .or variatians
fram the Cantract Documents have been . caused thereby. If
ENGINEER determines that a change in the Contract
Documents is required because .of the actian taken in response
ta an emergency, a Wark Directive Change .or Change Order
will be issued to document the consequences .of the changes or
variations.
Shop Drawings and Samples:
6.23. After checking and verifying all field measurements
and after complying with applicable procedures specified in the
General Requirements, CONTRACTOR shall submit ta
ENGINEER far review and appraval in accardance with the
accepted schedule .of Shap Drawing submissians (see para-
graph 2.9), .or for other appropriate action if so indicated in the
Supplementary Canditians, five capies (unless .otherwise
specified in the General Requirements) of all Shop Drawings,
which will bear a stamp .or specific written indication that
CONTRACTOR has satisfied CONTRACTOR's responsi-
bilities under the Cantract Documents with respect ta the
review .of the submissian. All submissians will be identified as
ENGINEER may require. The data shown an the Shap
Drawings will be camplete with respect ta quantities, dimen-
sians, specified perfarmance and design criteria, materials and
similar data to enable ENGINEER to review the infarmatian
as required.
6.24. CONTRACTOR shall alsa submit ta ENGINEER
far review and approval with such pramptness as to cause no
delay in Wark, all samples required by the Cantract Doc-
uments. All samples will have been checked by and accom-
panied by a specific written indicatian that CONTRACTOR
has satisfied CONTRACTOR's responsibilities under the
Cantract Dacuments with respect ta the review of the sub-
missian and will be identified clearly as ta material, Supplier,
pertinent data such as catalag numbers and the use for which
intended .
I
6.25.1. Befare submissian .of each Shap Drawing .or I
sample CONlRACTOR shall have determined and verified
all quantities; dimensians, specified perfarmance criteria,
installatian requirements, materials, catalag numbers and I
similar data with respect thereto and reviewed .or
coordinated each Shap Drawing .or sample with ather Shap
Drawings and samples and with the requirements .of the I
Work and the Contract Dacuments.
I
I
6.25.2. At the time .of each submissian,CONTRAC-
TOR shall give ENGINEER specific written natice of each
variatian that the Shap Drawings .or samples may have
fram the requirements .of the Cantract Documents, and, in
additian, shall cause a specific natatian ta be made an each
Shap Drawing submitted to ENGINEER far review and
appraval .of each such variatian.
6.26. ENGINEER will review and approve with reasonable I
promptness Shop Drawings and samples, but ENGINEER's
review and appraval will be .only far canfarmance with the I
design concept .of the PTaject and far campliance with the
infarmation given in the Contract Documents and shall not
extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences .or procedures I
.of constructian (except where a specific means, method,
technique, sequence or procedure of construction is indicated
in .or required by the Cantract Documents) .or ta safety
precautians or programs incident thereta. The review and I
approval of a separate item as such will not indicate approval
.of the assembly in which the item functians. CONTRACTOR
shall make carrectians required by ENGINEER, and shall I
return the required number of corrected copies of Shop
Drawings and submit as required new samples far review and
approval. CONTRACTOR shall direct specific attention in I
writing to revisians other than the correctians called far by
ENGINEER an previaus submittals.
I
I
6.27. ENGINEER's review and approval .of Shap Drawings
or samples shall not relieve CONTRACTOR fram
responsibility far any variatian fram the requirements .of the
Cantract Documents unless CONTRACTOR has in writing
called ENGINEER's attentian ta each such variatian at the
time .of submissian as required by paragraph 6.25.2 and
ENGINEER has given written appraval of each such variatian I
by a specific written natatian thereaf incarporated in .or
accompanying the Shop Drawing .or sample appraval; nar will
any approval by ENGINEER relieve CONTRACTOR fram I
responsibility far errars or amissians in the Shap Drawings .or
fram responsibility far having camplied with the provisians .of
paragraph 6.25. ] . I
6.28. Where a Shap Drawing .or sample is required by the
Specificatians, any related Wark performed priar to ENGI- I
12
FlLE:H:\ACCTG\COl'mV\C1\MASTERSI 19\ 0.8
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
NEER's review and approval of the pertinent'submission will
be the sale expense and responsibility of CONTRACTOR. .
Continuing the Work: '. ~
6.29. CONTRACTOR shall carry on the Wark and adhere
ta the pragress schedule during all disputes .or disagreements
with OWNER. Na Wark shall be delayed .or postponed pend-
ing resalutian .of any disputes .or disagreements, except as
permitted by paragraph 15.5 or as CONTRACTOR and
OWNER may .otherwise agree in writing.
Indemnification:
6.30. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regu-
latians CONTRACTOR shall indemnify and hald harmless
OWNER and ENGINEER and their consultants, agents and
emplayees fram and against all claims, damages, lasses and
expenses, direct, indirect .or cansequential (including but nat
limited ta fees and charges .of engineers, architects, attarneys
and ather prafessianals andcaurt and arbitratian costS) arising
out of .or resulting from . the performance of the Work, such
claim, damage, loss .or expense (a) is attributable ta bodily
injwy, sickness, disease .or death, .or ta injury to .or destruction
of tangible property (other than the Wark itself) including the
loss .of use resulting therefram and (b) is caused in whole or in
part by any negligent act .or amissian .of CONTRACTOR, any
Subcontractor, any persan .or arganizatian directly .or indirectly
emplayed by any of them ta perform or furnish any .of the
Work ar'anyane far whose acts any .of them may be liable,
regardless .of whether .or nat it is caused in part by a party
indemnified hereunder .or arises by .or is imposed by Law and
Regulatians regardless .of the negligence .of any such party.
6.31. In any and all claims against OWNER .or ENGI-
NEER .or any .of their consultants, agents or employees by any
employee of CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractar,any person
.or organizatian directly .or indirectly emplayed by any .of them
to perfarm .or furnish any .of the Wark .or anyane far whase
. acts any .of them may be liable, the indemnification obligation
under paragraph 6.30 shall nat be limited in any way by any
limitatian on the amount or type of damages, compensation or
benefits payable by or far CONTRACTOR or any .sl!cIl
Subcantractar.ar ather persan .or arganizatian under warkers'
or workmen's compensation acts, disability benefit acts or
ather employee benefit acts.
6.32. The obligations of CONTRACTOR wider paragraph
6.30 shall nat extend ta the liability .of ENGINEER,
ENGINEER's cansultants, agents .or employee~ arising aut .of
the 'preparatian .or appraval. .of maps, drawings, apinians,
reports, surveys, Change Orders, designs or specificatians.
ARTICLE 7 - OTHER WORK
I
I
Related Work at Site:
7.1. OWNER may perfarm ather W,ark related ta the Praj-
ect at the site by OWNER's own forces, have other wark
performed'byu.tility .owners or let ather direct.cantracts there
far which shall cantain General Canditians similar ta these. If
the fact that such other wark is ta be performed was nat nated
in the Contract Documents, written natice thereaf will be given
to CONTRACTOR priar to starting any such ather wark; and,
if CONTRACTqR believes that such performance will
invalve additianal expense ta CONTRACTOR .or requires
additional time and the parties are unable to agree as to the
. extent thereof, CONTRACTOR may make a claim there far as
pravided in Articles II and 12.
7.2. CONTRACTOR shall affard each utility .owner and
ather cantractar wha is a party ta such a direct contract (.or
OWNER, if OWNER is perfarming the additianal wark with
OWNER's emplayees) praper and safe access ta the site and
a reasanable .opportunity far the int;raductian and starage .of
materials and equipment and the executian of such wark, and
shall properly cannect and caardinate the Wark with theirs.
CONTRACTOR shall do all cutting, fitting and patching of the
Work that may be required ta make its several partS came
together properly and integrate with such ather work. CON-
TRACTOR shall nat endanger any wark .of .others by cutting,
excavating .or .otherwise altering .their wark and will only cut
.or alter their work with the written consent .of ENGINEER and
the .others whase wark will be affected. The duties and
responsibilities .of CONTRACTqR under this paragraph are
far the benefit .of such utility .owners <l!ld ather cantractars ta
the extent that there are camparable provisions far the benefit
.of CONTRACTOR in said direct cantracts between OWNER
and such utility .owners and other co~tractars.
7.3. If any part .of CONTRACTOR's Wark depends far
proper execution or results upon the work .of any such other
can tractor or utility owner (or OwNER), CONTRACTOR
shall inspect and promptly report to ENGINEER in writing
any delays, defects .or deficiencies in such work that render it
unavailable' or unsuitable for such proper execution and
results; CO~TRACTqR's.. failure sa .ta report will canstitute
an acceptance .of the ather wark as fit and praper far integra-
. tion with CONTRACTOR's Work except for latent or non
apparent defects and deficiencies in tJte ather wark.
Coordination:
7.4. If OWNER contracts with .others far the perfarmance
.of ather wark' an the Praject at the site, the persan .or
arganizatian wha will have autharity and respansibility far
coordinatian .of the activities among the variaus prime can
tractars will be identified in the Supplementary Conditions,
and the specific matters ta be cavered by such autharity and
13
FILE:H:IACCfGlCONTRACl\MASTERS\1910.8
responsibility will be itemized, and the extent .of such autharity
and responsibilities will be provided, in the Supplementary
Canditians. Unless otherwise pravided in the Supple~entary
Conditians, neither OWNER nor ENGINEER shall have any
autharity .or responsibility in respect .of such coordinatian.
ARTICLE 8--0WNER'S RESPONSIBILmES ..
8.1. OWNER shall issue all communicatians ta CON-
TRACTOR thraugh ENGINEER.
8.2. In case .of terminatian .of the emplayment .of ENGI-
NEER, OWNER shall appoint an engineer against whom
CONTRACTOR makes no reasanable objection, whose status
under the Can tract Documents shall be that .of the farmer
ENGINEER Any dispute in connectian with such appointment
shall be subject ta arbitratian.
8.3. OWNER shall furnish the data required .of OWNER
under the Cantract Documents pramptly and shall make pay-
ments to CONTRACTOR promptly after they are due as
pravided in paragraphs 14.4 and 14.13. .
8.4. OWNER's duties in respect .of praviding lands and
easements and providing engineering surveys to establish
reference points are set forth in paragraphs 4.1 and 4.4. Para-
graph 4.2 refers to OWNER's identifying and making avail-
able to CONTRACTOR copies .of reports afexplaratians and.
tests of subsurface conditians at the site and in existingstruc-
tures which have been utilized by ENGINEER in preparing the
Drawings and Specificatians.
8.5. OWNER's responsibilities in respect of purchasing
and maintaining liability and property insurance are set farth
in paragraphs 5.5 thraugh 5.8.
8.6. OWNER is .obligated ta execute Change Orders as
indicated in paragraph 10.4.
8.7.' OWNER's responsibility in respect of certain
inspectians, tests and appravals is set farth in paragraph 13.4.
8.8. In cannectian with OWNER's right ta stap Wark .or
suspend Wark,seeparagraphs 13.10 and 15.1. Paragraph 15.2
deals with OWNER's right ta terminate services of CON-
TRACTOR under certain circumstances.
ARTICLE 9-ENGINEER'S STATUS DURING
CONSTRUCfION
Owner's Representative:
9.1. ENGINEER will be OWNER's representative during
the constructian period. The duties and responsibilities and the I
limitatians of authority .of ENGINEER as OWNER's
representatlve dunng construchan are set farth m the Cantract I
Documents and shall not be extended withaut written cansent
.of OWNER and ENGINEER.
I
I
VISits to Site:
9.2. ENGINEER will make visits ta the site at intervals
appropriate to the variaus stages .of canstructian ta .observe the
pragress and quality .of the, executed W ark and ta determine,
in general, if the Wark is praceeding in accardance with the
Cantract Documents. ENGINEER will nat be required ta
make exhaustive .or continuaus an-site inspectians ta check the I
quality .or quantity .of the Wark. ENGINEER's effarts will be
directed taward providing far OWNER a greater degree .of
canfidence that the completed Wark will canfarm ta the I
Cantract Documents. On the basis .of such visits and on-site
abservatians as an experienced and qualified design profes-
sianal; ENGINEER will keep OWNER infarmed .of the prag- I
ress .of the Wark and will endeavar ta guard OWNER against
defects and deficiencies in the Wark.
I
I
Project Representation:
9.3. If OWNER and ENGINEER agree, ENGINEER will
furnish a Resident Praject Representative ta assist
ENGINEER in .observing the perfarmance .of the Wark. The
duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of any such
Resident Praject Representative and assistants will be as
provided in the Supplementary Conditions. If OWNER I
designates anather agent to represent OWNER at the site wha
is nat ENGINEER's agent .or emplayee, the duties,
respansibilities and limitatians .of autharity .of such ather I
persan will be as provided in the Supplementary Conditians.
I
I
I
I
Clarifications and Interpretations:
9.4. ENGINEER will issue with reasanable promptness
such written clarificatians .or interpretatians .of the require-
ments .of the Cantract Doc~ents (in the farm .of Drawings .or
.otherwise) as ENGINEER may determine necessary, which
shall be consistent with or reasanably inferable from the
overall intent .of the Can tract Documents. If CONTRACTO R
believes that a written clarificatian or interpretatian justifies an
increase in the Contract Price .or an extensian .of the Contract
Time and the parties are unable ta agree ta the amaunt .or
extent thereof, CONTRACTOR may make a claim there far as
provided in Article 11 or Article 12.
Authorized Variations in Work: I
9.5. ENGINEER may authorize minar variations in the
Wark fram the requirements .of the Can tract Documents which
do nat involve an adjustment in the Cantract Price .or the I
Contract Time and are consistent with the overall intent of the
Cantract Dacuments. These may be accamplished by a Field
)
Order and will be binding an OWNER, and alsa an I
14
FILE:H:IACCTGlCOr-rrRACJ\MASTERSI 191 0.8
I
I CONTRACTOR wha shall perform the Wark invalved
promptly. If CONTRACTOR believes that aF;ielgOrder
I justifies an increase in the Contract Price or an exte~l(j~ of the
Cantract Time and the parties are unable ta agree'as to the
amaunt .or extent thereof, CONTRACTOR may make a claim
I there for as provided in Article liar 12.
. '
Rejecting Defective Work:
I 9.6. ENGINEER will have autharity ta disapprove or
reject Wark which ENGINEER believes ta be defective.- and
will alsa have autharity to require special inspection or testing
I .of the Work as provided in paragraph 13.9, whether or nat the
Wark is fabricated, installed .or campleted.
Shop Drawings, Change Orders and Payments:
I 9.7. In cannection with ENGINEER's responsibility far
Shap Drawings and samples, see paragraphs 6.23 through 6.29
inclusive.
I
I
9.8. In cannection with ENGINEER's responsibilities as
taChange Orders, see Articles 10, 11 and 12. .
9.9. In cannectian with ENGINEER's responsibilities in
respect .of Applicatians.far Payment, etc., see Article 14..
I Determinations for Unit Prices:
9.10. ENGINEER will determine the actual quantities and
classificatians .of Unit Price Wark perfarmed by CON-
TRACTOR ENGINEER will review with CONTRACTOR
ENGINEER's preliminary determinatians an su~h . matters
before rendering a written deci~ion thereOn (by recommen-
I datian .of an Application far Payment or .otherwise)'. ENGI-
NEER's written decisians therean will be fmal and binding
. upon OWNER and CONTRACTOR, unless, within ten days
I after the date of any such decisian, either OWNER .or CON-
. TRACTOR delivers to the ather party to the Agreement and
to ENGINEER written noti~ of intention to appeal from such
a decisian.
I
I
Decisions on Disputes: .
I 9.11. ENGINEER will be the initial interpreter .of the
requirements of the Can tract DocumentS andjudge .of the
acceptability of the Work thereunder. Claims, disputes and
I ather matters relating to the acceptability .of the Wark .or the
interpretatian .of the requirements .of the CantractDocuments
pertaining to the performance and furnishing of the Work and
claims under Articles 11 and 12 in respect of changes in the
I Can tract Price or Can tract Time will be referred initially to
ENGINEER in writing with a request far a formal decisian in
accardance with this paragraph, which ENGINEER will .
I render in writing within a reasanable time. Written natice .of
.each such claim, dispute and other matter will be delivered by
the claimant to ENGINEER and the other . party to the
Agreement promptly (but in na event later than thirty days)
I
I
after the .occurrence .of the event giving rise thereta, and
written supporting data \vill be submitted to ENGINEER and
the other party within sixty days after such occurrence unless
ENGINEER allows an additianal period .of time ta ascertain
mare accurate data in support .of the claim.
9.12. When functianing as interpreter and judge under
paragraphs 9.10 and 9.11, ENGINEER' will nat show par-
tiality ta OWNER .or CONTRACTOR and will nat be liable
in cannectian witlt any interpretatian .or decision rendered in
gaad faith in such capacity. The rendering .of a decisian by
ENGINEER pursuant ta paragraphs 9.10 and 9.11 with
respect to any such claim, dispute .or ather matter (except any
which have been waived by the making .or acceptance .of fmal
payment as pravided in paragraph 14.16) will be a canditian
precedent to any exercise by OWNER or CONTRACTOR .of
such rights or remedies as either may otherwise have under the
Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulatians in respect of
any such claim, dispute .or ather matter.
Limitations on ENGINEER's Responsibilities:
9.13. Neither ENGINEER's autharity ta act under this
Article 9 or elsewhere' in the Can tract Dacuments nar any
decisian made by ENGINEER in gaad faith either ta exercise
.or nat exercise such autharity shall give rise ta any duty .or
responsibility .of ENGINEER ta CONTRACTOR. any Sub-
cantractar, any Supplier, .or any ather persan .or arganizatian
perfarming any of the Wark, arta any surety far any .of them.
9.14. Whenever in the Cantract Dacuments the terms "as
ordered", "as directed". "as required", "as allawed", "as
appraved" .or terms .of like effect .or impart are used, .or the
adjectives '.'reasanable' " "suitable' " , 'acceptable", , 'proper"
or "satisfactory" or adjectives of like effect or import are used
ta describe a requirement, directian, review .or judgment .of
ENGINEER as ta the Wark, it is intended that such
requirement, direction, review or judgment will be solely to
evaluate the Work for compliance with the Contract Docu-
ments (unless there is a specific statement indicating other-
wise). The use of any such term or adjective shall not be
efIectiveto assign ta ENGINEER any duty .or autharity ta
supervise .or direct the furnishing .or perfarmance .of the Wark
or any duty or autharity to undertake responsibility contrary to
the pravisians .of paragraph 9.15 or 9.16.
9.15. ENGINEER will nat b.e responsible for CON-
TRACTOR's means, methads,techniques, sequences .or pro-
cedures .of constructian, or the safety precautians and pragrams
incident thereta, and ENGINEER will nat be responsible far
CONTRACTOR's failure to perfarm .or furnish the Work in
accardance with the Can tract Dacuments.
9.16. ENGINEER will not be responsible for the acts or
amissians .of CONTRACTOR .or .of any Subcantractar, any
15
FILE:H:\ACCTG\COr-rrRACTlMASTERS\1910.8
Supplier, .or .of any ather persan .or arganizatian perfarming .or
furnishing any of the Work.
ARTICLE 10--CHANGES IN THE WORK
10.1. Withaut invalidating the Agreement and withaut
natice ta any surety, OWNER may, at any time .or fram time
to time, order additions, deletions or revisions in the Work;
these will be autharized by a Written Amendment, a Change
Order, .or a Wark Directive Change. Upon receipt .of any such
document, CONTRACTOR shall pramptly proceed with the
Wark invalved which will be perfarmed under the applicable
canditians .of the Cantract Documents (except as .otherwise
specifically provided).
10.2. If OWNER and CONTRACTOR are unable ta
agree as to the extent, if any, of an increase or decrease in the
Cantract Price .or an extensian .or shartening .of the Cantract
. Time that shauld be alIawed as a result .of a Wark Directive
Change, a claim may be made there far as provided in Article
liar Article 12
10.3. CONTRACTOR shall nat be entitled to an increase
in the Contract Price or an extensian .of the Cantract Time with
respect ta any Work perfarmed that is nat required by the
Contract Documents as amended, modified and supplemented .
as provided in paragraphs 3.4 and 3.5, except in the case .of an
emergency as pravided in paragraph 6.22 and except in the
case .of uncovering Work as provided in paragraph 13.9.
10.4. OWNER and CONTRACTOR shall execute appra-
priate Change Orders (.or Written Amendments) covering:
10.4.1. changes in the Work which are ordered by
OWN ER pursuant to paragraph 10.1, are required because
.of acceptance of defective Wark under paragraph 13 .13 or
carrecting detective Wark under paragraph 13.14, .or are
agreed ta by the parties;
10.4.2. changes in the Cantract Price .or Contract Time
which are agreed ta by the parties; and
10.4. 3 . changes in the Contract Price .or Cantract
Time which embody the substance .of any written decisian
rendered by ENGINEER pursuant to paragraph 9.11;
pravided that, in lieu .of executing any such Change Order,
an appeal may be taken fram any such decisian in
accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents
and applicable Laws and Regulatians, but during any such
appeal, CONTRACTOR shall carry on the Wark and
adhere ta the progress schedule as pravided in paragraph
6.29.
10.5. If natice .of any change affecting the general scape .of I
the Work .or the provisians. of the Contract Documents
(including, but nat limited to, Contract Price .or Can tract Time) I
is required by the provisians .of any Band ta be given ta a
surety, the giving of any such notice will be CONTRACTOR's
responsibility, and the amaunt .of each applicable Band will be I
adjusted accordingly.
ARTICLE ll--CHANGE OF CONTRACT PRICE I
11.1. The Cantract Price canstitutes the tatal campen- I
satian (subject ta autharized adjustments) payable ta CON-
TRACTOR for perfarming the Wark. All duties, responsibil-
ities and abligatians assigned ta .or undertaken by CON- I
TRACTOR shall be at his expense without change in the
Can tract Price.
11.2. The Cantract Price may .only be changed by a I
Change Order or by a Written Amendment. Any claim far an
increase .or decrease in the Can tract Price shall be based an
written natice delivered by the party making the claim ta the I.
other party and to.ENGINEER pramptly (but in na event later
than thirty. days) after the occurrence .of the event giving rise
to the claim and stating the general nature of the claim. Notice I
.of the amaunt .of the claim with supporting data shall be
delivered within sixty days 'after such occurrence (unless
ENGINEER allaws an additianal periad .of time ta ascertain
mare accurate data in support .of the claim) and shall be I
accompanied by claimant's written statement that the amount
claimed cavers all knawn amaunts (direct, indirect and can-
sequential) ta which the claimant is entitled as a result .of the I
.occurrence .of said event. All claims far adjustment in the
Cantract Price shall be determined by ENGINEER in accar-
dance with paragraph 9.11 if OWNER and CONTRACTOR I
cannat .otherwise agree an the amaunt invalved. Na claim far
an adjustment in the Contract Price will be valid if nat
submitted in accardance with this paragraph 11.2.
I
11.3. The value .of any Wark cavered by a Change Order
.or .of any claim far an increase .or decrease in the Contract I
Price shall be determined in .one .of the fallawing ways:
11.3.1. Where the Wark invalved is covered by unit
prices contained in the Contract Dacuments, by applicatian I
of unit prices to the quantities .of the items involved (subject
ta the pravisiansaf paragraphs 11.9.1. thraugh I 1.9.3,
~us~. I
11.3.2. By mutual acceptance .of a lump sum (which
may include an allawance far .overhead and profit nat I
necessarily in accardance with paragraph 11.6.2.1).
11.3.3. On the basis .of the Cast .of the Wark (deter- I
16
F1LE:H:IACCTGlCONTRAC1\MASTIRS\ 191 0.8
.1
I mined as provided in paragraphs 11.4 and 11.5) plus a
CONTRACTOR's Fee far .overhead and prafit (de~~ed as
I provided in paragraphs 11. 6 and 11. 7). '
I Cost of the Work:
11. 4. The. term Cast .of the Wark means the sum .of all
costs necessarily incurred and paid by CONTRACTOR in the
I proper performance .of the Wark. Except as .otherwise may be
agreed ta in writing by OWNER, such costs shall be in
amaunts na higher than thaseprevailing in the locality .of the
I Praject, shall include .only the fallawing items and shall nat
include any of the costs itemized in paragraph 11.5:
I
I
I
11.4.1. Payroll costs for employees in the direct employ
.of CONTRACTOR in the perfarmance .of the Wark under
schedules .of jab classificatians agreed upon by OWNER
and CONTRACTOR. Payrall casts far employees nat
employed full time an the Wack shall be apportianed an the
basis of their time spent an the Work. Payroll costs shall
include, but nat be limited to, salaries and wages plus the
cast .of fringe ~enefits which shall include social security ,
. cantributians, unemplayment, excise and payrall taxes,
warkers' .or warkmen's compensation, health and retirement .
benefits, banuses, sick leave, vacatian and haliday pay
applicable thereto. Such emplayees shall include
superintendents and foremen at the site. The expenses of
perfarming Wack after regular warking hours, an Saturday,
SWlday or legal halidays, shall be included in the above to
the extent autharized by OWNER.
I
I
I
11.4.2. Cost of all materials and equipment furnished
and incarporated in the Wark, including costs .of trans-
portationand storage thereaf,.and Suppliers' field. services
required in cannectian therewith. All cash discounts shall
accrue to CONTRACTOR unless OWNER deposits funds
. with CONTRACTOR with which to ma1<e payments, in
which case the cash diSCOWlts shall accrue to OWNER. All
trade discaunts, rebates and refunds and all returns fram
sale of surplus materials and equipment shall ac;crue to .
OWNER, and CONTRACTOR shall make pravisians sa
that they may be .obtained.
I
I
I
I,
11.4.3. Payments made by CONTRACTOR.ta the
Subcantractars far Wark perfarmed by Subcantractars. If
required by OWNER, CONTRACTOR shall .obtain
competitive bids fram Subcantractars acceptable ta CON-
TRACTOR and shall deliver such bids to OWNER who
will then determine, with the advice .of ENGINEER, which
bids will be, accepted. If a subcontract pravidesthat the
Subcantractar is ta be paid an the basis .of Cast .of the
Work Plus a Fee, the Subcontractor's Cost of the Work
shall be determined in the same manner as CONTRAC-
TOR's Cost .of the Wark. All subcantracts shall be subject
I
I
I
I
to the other pravisians of-the Contract Documents insofar
as applicaRle.
11.4.4. Casts of special-consultants (including but not
limited ta engineers, ~chitects, testing labarataries, sur-
veyars, attorneys and accountants) emplayed for services
specifically related to the Wark. .
11.4.5. Supplemental casts\!iicluding the fallawing:
\Y-.'! .-~,
11.4.5.1.. The praportiarl' .of necessary transparta-
tian, travel and subsistence expenses .of CONTRAC-
TOR's emplayees incurred in discharge of duties con-
nected with the Wark.
11.4.5.2. Cast, including transpartation and main-
tenance, .of all materials, supplies, equipment, machin-
ery, appliances, .office and temparary facilities at the
site and hand tools nat awned by the warkers, which are
consumed m the perfarmance .of the Wark, and cost less
market value .of such items used but nat cansumed
which remain the praperty .of CONTRACTOR.
11.4.5.3. Rentals .of all canstructian equipment and
machinery and, the parts thereaf whether rented fram
CONTRACTOR .or .others in accardance with rental
agreements approved by OWNER with the advice of
ENGINEER, and the castS .of transportatian, laading,
unloading, installatiolJ, dismantling and removal
thereof-~all in accardance with terms .of said rental
agreements. The rental .of any such equipment, machll-
ery .or parts shall cease when the use thereaf is na
langer necessary far the Wark.
11.4.5.4. Sales, cansumer, use .or similar taxes
related ta the Wark, and far which CONTRACTOR is
liable, imposed by Laws and Regulations.
11.4.5.5. Deposits last far causes ather than negli-
gence of CON1RACTOR, any Subcontractor or anyone
directly .or indirectly emplayed by any .of them or far
whase acts any .of them may be liable, and royalty
payments and fees for permits and licenses.
11.4.5.6. Lasses and damages (and related
expenses), nat campensated by insurance .or .otherwise,
to the Wark or .otherwise sustained by.CONTRACTOR
in connectian with the performance and furnishing .of
the Wark (except lasses and damages within the
deductible amaWlts .of praperty insurance established by
OWNER in accardance with paragrl!ph 5.9), pravided
they have resulted from causes other than the negligence
. .of CONTRACTOR, any Subcantractar, .or anyone
directly .or indirectly emplayed by any .of them .or far
17
FI LE: H :IACCTG\CONTRAC1\MASlCRSI 191 0.8
whase acts any .of them may be liable. Such lasses shall
include settlements made with the wri.tten consent and
appraval .of OWNER. No such lasses, damages and
expenses shall be included in the Cost .of the Work far
the purpose .of determining CONTRACTOR's Fee. If,
hawever, any such lass .or damage requires
reconstructian and CONTRACTOR is placed in charge
thereof, CONTRACTOR shall be paid far services a fee
proportianate;to ~at stated in paragraph 11.6.2.
11.4.5.7. Tlie cost .of utilities, fuel and sanitary
facilities at the site.
11.4.5. 8. Minar expenses such as telegrams, lang
distance telephane calls, telephane service at the site,
express age and similar petty cash items in connection
with the Wark.
11.4.5.9. Cast of premiums far additional Bands
and insurance required because .of changes in the Wark
and premiums for property insurance coverage within
the limits .of the deductible amaunts established by
OWNER in accordance with paragraph 5.9.
II. 5.' The term Cost .of the Wark shall nat include any of
the fallowing:
11.5.1. Payrall costs and ather compensatian .of CON-
TRACTOR's .officers, executives, principals (.of partner-
ship and sale proprietorships), general managers, engineers,
architects, estimatars, attarneys, auditars. accountants,
purchasing and contracting agents, expediters, timekeepers,
clerks and ather personnel employed by CONTRACTOR
whether at the site .or in CONTRACTOR's principal .or a
branch .office far general administratian of the Wark and
nat specifically included in the agreed upon schedule .of jab
classificatians referred ta in par -a graph 11.4.1 .or
specifically covered by paragraph 11.4.4-- all .of which are
ta be considered administrative costs cavered by the
CONTRACTOR's Fee.
11.5.2. Expenses .of CONTRACTOR's principal and
branch .offices ather than CONTRACTOR's office at the
site
11.5.3. Any part .of CONTRACTOR's capital expenses,
including interest on CONTRACTOR'S capital emplayed
far the Wark and charges against CONTRACfOR far
delinquent payments.
11.5.4. Cost of premiums for all Bands and for all
insurance whether .or nat CONTRACTOR is required by
the Contract Documents to purchase and maintain the same
(except for the cost .of premiums covered by sub- paragraph
11.4.5.9 abave).
I
11.5.5. Costs due to the.negligence .of CONTRACTOR, I
any Subcontractar, .or anyane directly .or indirectly
emplayed by any of them .or for whose acts any .of them
may be liable, including but nat limited ta, the correction .of I
defective Work, disposal .of materials .or equipment
wrangly supplied and making good any damage ta praperty.
, 11.5.6. Other .overhead .or general expense costs of any I
kind and the casts .of any item nat specifically and
expressly included in paragraph 11.4.
CONTRACTOR'S Fee:
I
11.6. The. CONTRACTOR's Fee allawed ta I
CONTRACTOR far .overhead and profit shall be detennined
as fallaws:
11.6.1. a mutually acceptable fixed fee; .or if none can I
be agreed upon,
11.6.2. a fee based an the fallawing percentages of the I
various portions .of the Cost of the Work:
11.6.2.1. for costs incurred under paragraphs 11.4.1 I
and 11.4.2, the CONTRACTOR's Fee shall be fIfteen
percent;
I
11.6.2.2. for costs incurred under paragraph 11.4.3,
the CONTRACfOR's Fee shall be five percent; and if
a subcontract is an the basis .of Cast .of the Wark Plus a I
Fee, the maximum allawable to CONTRACTOR on
account .of .overhead and profit .of all Subcantractars
shall be fifteen percent;
I
11.6.2.3. na fee shall be payable an the basis .of
casts itemized under paragraphs 11.4.4, 11.4.5 and I
11.5:
11.6.2.4. the amaunt .of credit ta be allawed by I
CONTRACTOR ta OWNER far any such change
which results in a net decrease in cast will be the
amaunt .of the actual net decrease plus a deductian inl
CONTRACTOR's Fee by an amaunt equal ta ten
percent .of the net decrease: and
11.6.2.5. when bath additians and credits are I
involved in anyone change, the adjustment in CON-
TRACTOR's Fee shall be camputed an the basis .of the
net change in accordance with paragraphs 11.6.2.1 I
thraugh 11.6.2.4. inclusive.
11.7. Whenever the cost .of any Wark ista be determined I
18
F1LE:H :\ACCTG\COr-ITRAC1\MAS"ffiRS\ 191 0.8
I
I pursuant ta paragraph 11.4 .or 11.5, CONTRACTOR will
submit in form acceptable to ENGINEER an itenufed cost
I breakdown together with supporting data.
Cash Allowances:
I 11.8. It is understood that CONTRACTOR has included in
. the Can tract Price all allawances. sa named in the Cantract
Documents and shall cause the Work so covered to be done by
I such Subcontractors .or Suppliers and far such sums within the
limit .of the allawances as may'be acceptable ta ENGINEER.
CONTRACTOR agrees that:
I
I
I
11.8.1. The allowances include the cost .ta CON-
TRACTOR (less any applicable trade discaunts) afmate-
rials and equipment required by the allowances to be deliv-
ered at the site, and all applicable taxes: and
11.8.2. CONTRACTOR's casts far unlaading and
handling on the site, labor, installation casts, overhead,
profit and other expenses contemplated for the allowances
have been included in the Cantract Price and nat in the
allawances. Na demand far additianal payment on accaunt
.of any thereof will be valid.
I
'I Priar ta fmal payment, an apprapriate Change Order will be
issued as recammended by ENGINEER ta reflect actual
amaunts due CONTRACTOR an account of Wark covered by
allawances, and the Cantract Price shall be carrespondingly'
I adjusted.
I
I
I
Unit Price Work:
II ;9.1. Where the Cantract Documents pravide that all -
or part .of the Wark is to be Unit Price Wark,initially the
Contract Price will be deemed ta include far all Unit Price
. Wark an amaunt equal ta the sum .of the established unit
prices far each separately identified item of Unit Price
. Wark times the estimated quantity of each item as indicated
in th~ Agreement The estimated quantities of items.of Unit
Price Wark are nat guaranteed and are salely far the
purpose of comparison, of Bids and determiniDg an initial
Contract Price. Determinatians .of the actual quantities and
classificatians .of Unit Price Wark perfanned by
, CONTRACTOR will be made by ENGINEER in accor-
dance with Paragraph 9.10.
I
I
11.9.2. Each unit price will be deemed to include an
amaunt considered by CONTRACTORta be adequate ta
cover CONlRACTOR's .overhead and profit for each sep-
arately identified item.
I
I
11.9.3. Where the quantity .of any item .of Unit Price
Work performed by CONTRACTOR differs materially and
significantly from the estimated quantity .of such item
indicated in the Agreement and there is no corresponding
I
I
adjustment with respect ta any ather item .of Wark and if
CONTRACTOR believes that CONTRACTOR has
incurred additianal expense as a result thereof, CON-
TRACTOR may make a claim far an increase in the Can-
tract Price in accordance with Article 11 if the parties are
unable ta agree as ta the amaunt .of any such increase.
ARTICLE 12--CHANGE OF CONTRACf TIME
12.1. The Can tract Time may .only be changed by a
Change Order .or a Written Amendment. Any claim for an
extensian .or shartening .of the Cantract Time shall be based an
written natice delivered by the party making the claim ta the
ather party and to ENGINEER promptly (but in na event later
than thirty days) after the occurrence of the event giving rise
ta the claim and stating the general nature of the claim. Natice
.of the extent .of the claim ~ith supparting data shall be deliv-
ered within sixty days after such. occurrence (unless EN GI-
NEER allaws an additional periad of time to ascertain mare
accurate data in support .of the claim) and shall be accam-
panied by the claimant's written statement that the adjustment
claimed is the entire adjustment ta which the claimant has
reasan ta believe it is entitled as a result .of the occurrence of
said event. All claims far adjustment in the Cantract Time 24
shall be determined by ENGINEER in accardance with para-
graph 9.11 if OWNER and CONTRACTOR cannat .otherwise
agree. Na claim far an adjustment in the Cantract Time will be
valid if not submitted in accordance with the requirements of
this Paragraph 12.1.
12.2. The Cantract Time will be extended in an amaunt
equal ta time last due ta delays beyand the cantral .of CON-
TRACTOR if a claim is made there far as pravided in para-
graph 12.1. Such delays shall include, but nat be limited to,
acts or neglect by OWNER .or others perfarming additianal
wark as contemplated by Article 7, or ta fires, floods, labar
disputes, epidemics, abnarmal weather canditions or acts of
Gad.
12.3. All time limits stated in the Cantract Dacuments are
.of the essence .of the Agreement. The pravisians .of this Article
12 shall not exclude recovery for damages (including but not
l~ted ta fees and charges .of engineers, architects, attarneys
and ather prafessianals and caurt and arbitratian casts) far
delay by either party.
ARTICLE 13--WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE;
TESTS AND INSPECTIONS;
CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR
ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK
19
FILE:H:\ACcrG\CONTRAC1\MASTI:RSI 191 0.8
Warranty and Guarantee:
13.1. CONTRACTOR warrants and guarantees ta
OWNER and ENGINEER that all Wark will be in accardance
with the Contract Documents and will not be defective. Prampt
natice .of all defects shall be given ta CONTRACTOR. All
defective Work, whether or not in place, may be rejected,
carrected .or accepted as pravided in this Article 13 .
Access to Work:
13.2. ENGINEER and ENGINEER's representatives, ather
representatives .of OWNER, testing agencies and gavernmental
agencies with jurisdictianal interests will have access ta the
Wark at reasanable times far their abservatian, inspecting and
testing. CONTRACTOR shall pravide praper and safe
canditians far such access.
Tests and Inspections:
13.3. CONTRACTOR shall give ENGINEER timely
natice .of readiness .of the Wark far all required inspectians,
tests or approvals.
13.4. If Laws .or Regulatians .of any public body having
jurisdictian require any Wark (.or part thereof) to specifically
be inspected, tested or approved. CONTRACTOR shall
assume full responsibility there far, pay all casts in connectian
therewith and furnish ENGINEER the required certificates .of
inspection, testing or approval. CONTRACTOR shall also be
responsible far and shall pay all costs in connectian with any .
inspectian .or testing required in cannectian with OWNER's .or
ENGINEER's acceptance of a Supplier of materials .or
equipment proposed ta be incarporated in the Wark, .or .of
materials .or equipment submitted far approval pric;>r ta CON-
TRACTOR's purchase thereoffar incorporatian in the Wark.
The cast .of all inspectians, tests and appravals in additian ta
the above which are required by the Can tract Documents shall
be paid by OWNER (unless otherwise specified).
13.5. All inspectians, tests .or appravals ather than thase
required by Laws .or Regulatians .of any public body having
jurisdictian shall be perfarmed by arganizatians acceptable ta
OWNER and CONTRACTOR (or by ENGINEER if so
specified) .
13.6. If any Wark (including the wark .of .others) that is ta
be inspected, tested .or approved is covered withaut written
cancurrence of ENGINEER, it must, if requested by ENGI-
NEER, be uncavered far abservatian. Such uncovering shall
be at CONTRACTOR's expense unless CONTRACTOR has
given ENGINEER timely natice .of CONTRACTOR's inten-
tian ta caver the same and ENGINEER has not acted with
reasanable pramptness in respanse ta such natice.
13.7. Neither abservatians by ENGINEER nor inspec-
tians, tests .or appravals by .others shall relieve CONTRAC-
TOR from CONTRACTOR's .obligations to perform the Work I
in accardance with the Cantract Documents.
I
Uncovering Work:
13.8. If any Wark is cavered contrary ta the written
request of ENGINEER, it must, if requested by ENGINEER, I
be uncovered far ENGINEER's abservatian and replaced at
CONTRACTOR's expense.
13.9. If ENGINEER cansiders it necessary .or advisable I
that cavered Wark be .observed by ENGINEER .or inspected
.or tested by .others', CONTRACTOR, at ENGINEER's request,
shall uncaver, expose .or otherwise make available far
abservatian,inspectian ar'testing as ENGINEER may require,
that partian .of the Warkin questian, furnishing all necessary
labar, material and equipment. If it is faund that such Wark is
defective, CONTRACTOR shall bear all direct, indirect and
consequential costs .of such wicovering, expasure, abservatian,
inspectian and testing and .of satisfactory reconstruction,
(including but nat limited to fees and charges .of engineers,
architects, attarneys and other prafessianals), and OWNER
shall be entitled ta an appropriate decrease in the Can tract
Price, and, if the parties are unable ta agree as ta the amaunt
thereof, may make a claim there far as pravided in Article 11.
If, hawever, such Work is nat found ta be deFective,
CONTRACfOR shall be allowed an increase in the C~ntract I
Price or an extension of the Contract Time, or both, directly
attributable ta. such uncavering, exposure, abservatian,
inspectian, testing and recanstructian: and, if the parties are I
unable ta agree as ta the amaunt .or extent thereaf,
CONTRACTOR may make a claim there far as provided in
Articles 11 and 12.'
I.
I
I
I
I
Owner May Stop the Work:
13.10. If the Wark is defective, .or CONTRACTOR fails I
ta supply sufficient skilled warkers .or suitable materials .or
equipment, .or fails to furnish .or perfarm the Wark in such a
way that the completed Wark will canfarm ta the Cantract I
Documents, OWNER may .order CONTRACTOR ta stap the
Wark, .or any portian thereof, until the cause far such order has
been eliminated; hawever, this right of OWNER to stop the I
Wark shall not give rise to any duty an the part .of OWNER ta
exercise this right far the benefit of CONTRACTOR .or any
ather party.
I
Correction or Removal of Defective Work:
13 .11. Ifrequired by ENGINEER, CONTRACTOR shall
promptly, as directed, either carrect all defective Work, I
whether .or' nat fabricated, installed or campleted, .or, if the
Wark has been rejected by ENGINEER, remave it fram the
site and replace it with nan defective Wark. CONTRACTOR I
shall bear all direct, indirect and cansequential casts .of such
correctian or removal (including but nat limited to fees and
charges .of engineers, architects, attarneysand ather profes- I
20
FILE: H:IACCTG\COI'ITRACl\MASTERSI 191 0.8
I
I sionals) made necessary thereby.
lOne Year Correction Period:
13.12. If within one year after the date .of Substantial
Completian .or such langer period .of time as may be prescribed
I. by Laws .or Regulatians .or by the terms .of any applicable
special guarantee required by the Contract Documer:tts or by
any specific pravisian .of the Can tract Documents, any Wark
I is faund ta be defective, CONTRACTOR shall promptly,
without cost to OWNER and in accordance with OWNER's
written instructians, either carrect such defective Wark, .or, if
I it has been rejected by OWNER, remove ,it fram the site and
replace it with non defective Work. If CONTRACTOR does
nat promptly comply with the terms .of such instructians, .or in
an emergency where delay would cause serious risk .of loss or
I damage, OWNER may have the defective Wark corrected .or
the rejected Wark remaved and replaced, and all direct,
. indirect and cansequential costs of such remaval and
I replacement (including but not limited to'fees and charges .of
engineers, architects, attorneys and ather professianals)will be
paid by CONTRACTOR. In special circumstances where a
I particular item .of equipment is placed in continuous service
befare Substantial Campletion .of all the Wark, the correctian
period for that item may start to run fram an earlier date if so
I pravided in the Specificatians .or by Written Amendment.
I
Acceptance of Defective Work:
13 .13. If, instead of requiring carrectian .or removal and
replacement .of defective Wark, OWNER. (and; prior ta
ENGINEER's recammendatian .of final payment, alsa
ENGINEER)prefers to accept it, OWNER may do so. CON-
I TRACTOR shall bear all direct, indirect and consequential
, casts attributable ta OWNER's evaluatian .of and determi~'
natian ta accept such defective Wark (such costs ta be
I approved by ENGINEER as to reasanableness and to include
but nat be limited ta fees and charges .of engineers, architects,
attameys and other professionals). If any such acceptance
I occurs prior ta ENGINEER's recommendatian ,.of fmal
payment, a Change Order will be issued incarporating the
necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to
I the Wark; and OWNER shall be entitled ta ,an apprapriate
decrease in the Contract Price, and, if the parties are unable ta
agree as to the amount thereof, OWNER may make a claim
there for as provided in Article 11. .If the acceptance occurs
I after such recommendatian, an apprapriate amaunt will be paid
by CONTRACTOR ta OWNER..
I OWNER May Correct Defective Work:
13.14. If CONTRACTOR fails within a reaianable time
after written natice .of ENGINEER ta proceeo tocorrect and
Ita carrect defective Work .ar ta remave and replace rejected
Work as required by ENGINEER in accordance with para-
graph 13. U; or if CONTRACTOR fails to 'perform the Work
I in accardance with the Contract Dacuments, .or if CON-
I
TRACTOR fails to comply with any other provision .of the
Contract Doc~ents, OWNER may, after seven days' written
notice to CONTRACTOR, correct and remedy any such
deficiency. In exercising the rights and remedies under this
paragraph OWNER shall proceed expeditiausly. To the extent
necessary ta camplete carrective and remedial actian,
OWNER maY exclude CONTRACTOR fram all .or part of the
site, take possessian .of all .or part .of the Wark, and suspend
CONTRACTOR's services related thereta, take possessian .of
CONTRACTOR's tools, appliances, constructian equipment
and machinery at the site .and incarporatein the Wark all
. materials and equip,ment stared at the site .or far which OWN
ER has paid CONTRACTOR but which are stared elsewhere.
CONTRACTOR shall allow OWNER, OWNER's represen-
tatives, agents and employees such access ta the site as may be
necessary ta enable OWNER ta exercise the rights and
remedies under this paragraph. All direct, indirect and con-
sequential costs .of OWNER in .exer9ising such rights and
remedies will be charged against CONTRACTOR in an
amaunt appraved as ta reasanableness by ENGINEER, and a
Change Order wiU be issued incarporating the necessary
revisians in the Contract Dacuments with respect to the Wark;
and OWNER shall be entitled to an apprapriate decrease in the
Contract Price, and, if the parties are unable ta agree as ta .the
amaunt thereof, OWNER may make a claim there far as
pravided ~ Article 11. Such direct, indirect and cansequential
casts will include but not be limited ta fees and charges .of
engineers, architects, attarneys and other prafessianals, all
court . and arbitratiancasts and all costs of repair and
replacement .of work .of .others destrayed .or damaged by
carrection, removal .or replacement .of CONTRACTOR's
defective Wark, CONTRACTOR shall nat be allawed an
extensian .of the Can tract Time because .of any delay in per-
farmance .of the Wark attributable ta the exercise by OWNER
of OWNER's rights and remedies hereunder.
ARTICLE 14--PA YMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND
COMPLETION
Schedule of Values:
14.1. The schedule .of values established as provided in
paragraph 2.9 will serve as the basis for progress payments
and will be incorporated into a fonn of Application for Pay-
ment acceptable ta ENGINEER,Pragress payments an
accaunt .of Unit Price Wark will be based an the number .of
units completed.
Applicationfor Progress Payment:
14.2: At least twenty days befare each pragress payment is
scheduled (but nat lllare .often than .once a manth), CON-
TRACTOR shall submit to ENGINEE~ for review an Appli-
catian for Payment filled aut and signed by CONTRACTOR
covering the Wark completed as .of the date .of the Applicatian
21
FILE:H:IACCfG\CONTRACJ\MASJt:RS\ 19\ 0.8
and accampanied by such supparting documentatian as is
required by the Contract Dacuments. If payment is requested
an the bas~ .of materials and equipment nat mcorporated in the
Wark but delivered and suitably stared at the site .or at anather
locatian agreed to in writing, the Applicatian far Payment shall
also be accompanied by a bill of sale, invaice .or ather
dacumentatian warranting that OWNER has received the
materials and equipment free and clear .of all liens, charges,
security interests and encumbrances (which are hereinafter in
these General Conditians referred ta as "Liens") and evidence
that the materials and equipment are covered by appropriate
property insurance and ather arrangements ta pratect
OWNER's interest therein, all of which will be satisfactary ta
OWNER. The amaunt .of retain age with respect ta progress
payments will be as stipulated in the Agreement.
CONTRACTOR's Warranty of Tule:
14.3. CONTRACTOR warrants and guarantees that title
ta all Wark, materials and equipment cavered by any Appli-
catian far Payment, whether incorporated in the Praject .or nat,
will pass to OWNER na later than the time .of payment free
and clear .of all Liens.
Review of Applications for Progress Payment:
14.4. ENGINEER will, within ten days after receipt .of
each Application for Payment, either indicate in writing a
recommendation of payment and present the Applicatian to
OWNER, .or return the Applicatian ta CONTRACTOR indi-
cating in writing ENGINEER's reasons far refusing ta rec-
ammend payment. In the latter case, CONTRACTOR may
make the necessary carrectians and resubmit the Applicatian. .
Ten days after presentatian .of the Applicatian for Payment
with ENGINEER's recommendation, the amaunt recommended
will (subject to the pravisians of the last sentence of paragraph
14.7) became due and when due will be paid by OWNER ta
CONTRACTOR.
14.5. ENGINEER's recammendatian .of any payment
requested in an Application far Payment will constitute a
representatian by ENGINEER ta OWNER, based an ENGI-
NEER's an-site abservatians .of the Wark in progress as an .
experienced and qualified design prafessianal and on ENGI-
NEER's review .of the Applicatian far Payment and the
accampanying data and schedules that the Wark has pra-
gressed to the point indicated; that, to the best of ENGINEER's
knawledge, information and belief, the quality of the Work is
in accardance with the Cantract Documents (subject to an
evaluation of the Work as a functianing whale prior to .or upon
Substantial Campletian, to the results .of any subsequent tests
called far in the Cantract Documents, ta a fmal deteiminatian
.of quantities and classificatians far Unit Price Wark under
paragraph 9.10, and to any other qualifications stated in the
recammendation); and' that CONTRACTOR is entitled to
payment .of the amaunt recammended. Hawever, by
recommending any such payment ENGINEER will nat thereby I
be deemed ta have represented that exhaustive .or continuous
an-site inspectians have been made ta check the quality .or the I
quantity .of the Wark beyand the responsibilities specifically
assigned ta ENGINEER in the Cantract Documents .or that
there may nat be ather matters .or issues between the parties I
that might entitle CONTRACTOR ta be paid additianally by
OWNER . or OWNER ta withhald payment ta
CONTRACTOR.
I
14.6. ENGINEER's recommendation offmal payment will
canstitute an additianal representatian by ENGINEER ta I
OWNER that the conditions precedent to CONTRACTOR's
being entitled ta final payment as set farth in paragraph 14.13
have been fulfilled.
I
I
14.7. ENGINEER may refuse ta recammend the whale .or
any part .of any payment if, in ENGINEER's apinian, it wauld
be incarrect ta make such representatians ta OWNER.
ENGINEER may also refuse to recommend any such payment,
.or, because .of subsequently discavered evidence .or the results
.of subsequent inspectians .or tests, nullify any such payment I
previausly recommended, ta stich extent as may be necessary
in ENGINEER's opinian to pratect OWNER fram lass
because:
14.7.1. the Wark is defective. or completed Wark has I
been damaged requiring correction or replacement,
14.7.2. the Cantract Price has been reduced by Written I
Amendment .or Change Order,
14.7.3. OWNER has been required ta correct defective I
Wark .or camplete Work in accardance with paragraph
13.14, or
14.7.4. of ENGINEER's actual knawledge .of the I
occurrence .of any of the events enumerated in paragraphs
15.2.1 thraugh 15.2.9 inclusive.
I
I
OWNER may refuse to make payment .of the full amaunt
recommended by ENGINEER because claims have been made
against OWNER an accaunt .of CONTRACTOR's per-
farmance .or furnishing of the Wark .or Liens have been filed in
connectian with the Wark .or there are ather items entitling
OWNER ta a set-aff against the amaunt recammended, but I
OWNER must give CONTRACTOR immediate written natice
(with a copy ta ENGINEER) stating the reasans far such
actian. I
I
I
Substantial Completion:
14.8. When CONTRACTOR cansiders the entire Wark
ready for its intended use CONTRACTOR shall natify
OWNER and ENGINEER in writing that the entire Work is
substantially camplete (except far items specifically listed by
22
F1LE:H:IACCTG\COl'ITRAC1\MASTERS\191 0.8
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I-
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
CONTRACTOR as incomplete) and request that ENGJNEER
issue a certificate of Substantial Campletian:: Within a
reasanable time thereafter, OWNER, CONTRACTOR and
ENGINEER shall make an inspectian .of the Wark ta deter-
mine the status .of campletian. If ENGINEER does nat con-
sider the Wark substantially complete, ENGINEER will natify
CONTRACTOR in writing giving the reasons there far. If
ENGINEER considers the Wark substantially complete,
ENGINEER will prepare and deliver ta OWNER a tentative
certificate of Substantial Completion which shall fix the date
.of Substantial Campletian. There shall be attache<i ta the
certificate a tentative list of items ta be completed or carreC?ted
before fmal payment. OWNER shall have seven days after
receipt .of the tentative certificate during which ta make written
o~jectian to ENGINEER as to any provisions of the certificate
.or attached list. If, after cansidering such' abjectians,
ENGINEER cancludes that the Wark is nat substantially
camplete, ENGINEER will within fourteen,' days after
submissian af.the tentative certificate to OWNER notify
CONTRACTOR in writing, stating the reasans there far. If,
after cansideratian of OWNER's objectians, ENGINEER
considers the Wark substantially complete, ENGINEER will
within said faurteen days. execute and deliver ta OWNER and
CONTRACTOR a defmitive. certificate .of Substantial
, Campletian (with a revised tentative. list .of items to be cam-
pleted .or corrected) reflecting such changes fram the tentative
certificate as ENGINEER believes justified after cansideratian
.of any abjections from OWNER. At the time .of delivery .of the . ';
tentative certificate .of Substantial Campletian. ENGINEER
will deliver ta' OWNER and CONTRACTOR a written.
recommendatian a,s to division .of responsibilities pending fmal
payment between OWNER and CONTRACTOR with. respect
to security, operatian, safety, maintenance, heat, utilities,
insurance and warranties. Unless OWNER' arid
CONTRACTOR agree otherwise in writing and so inform
ENGINEER prior ta ENGINEER's issuing the - definitive
certificate afSubstantialCompletian, ENGINEER's afaresaid
recommendatian will be binding an- OWNER and CON-
TRACTOR until final payment.
14.9. OWNER shall have the right ta exclude CON-
TRACTOR fram theWark after the date .of Substantial Cam-
pletian, but OWNER shall allow CONTRACTOR reasonable
access ta camplete .or carrect items an the tentative list.,.
mg:
14.10.1. OWNER at any time may request CON-
TRACTOR in writing ta permit OWNER ta use any such
part .of the Wark which OWNER believes ta be ready far
its intended use and substantially camplete. If CON-
TRACTOR agrees, CONTRACTOR will certify ta OWN
ER and ENGINEER that said part .of the Work is
substantially'camplete and request ENGINEER ta issue a
certificate of Substantial Campletion far that part of the
Wark. CONTRACTOR at any time may natify OWNER
and ENGINEER in writing that CONTRACTOR considers
any such part .of the Wark ready far its intended use and
substantially camplete and request ENGINEER ta issue a
certificate .of Substantial Completian for that part of the
Wark. Within a reasanable time after either such request,
OWNER, CONTRACfOR and ENGINEER shall make an
inspectian .of that part of the Work ta determine its status .of
campletian. If ENGINEER does not consider that part of
the Wark ta be substantially camplete, ENGINEER will
natify OWNER and CONTRACTOR in writing giving the
reasons there far. If ENGINEER considers that part of the
Wark ta be substantially camplete, the provisians .of para-
graphs 14.8 and.l4.9 will apply with respect ta certification
. .of Substantial Campletian .of that part .of the Wark and the
division of responsibility in respect thereof and access
thereta .
14:10.2. OWNER may at any time'request CON-
TRACTOR in writing ta permit OWNER ta take aver
aperatian .of any such part of the Wark althaugh it. is not
substantially complete. A copy .of such request will be sent
. ta ENGINEER and within a reasanable time thereafter
OWNER, CONTRACTOR and ENGINEER shall make an
inspection of that part .of the Work to determine its status .of
completian aIJd will prepare a list .of the items remaining ta
be completed or corrected thereon befare fmal payment. If
CONTRACTOR does nat object in writing ta OWNER
and ENGINEER that such part .of the Work is nat ready far
separate operation by OWNER, ENGINEER will finalize
. the list .of items ta be campleted .or carrected and will
deliver such list to O~R and CONTRACTOR tagether
with a written recommendation as to the division of
responsibilities pending fmal payment between OWNER
and CONTRACTOR with respect to security, .operation,
'safety, maintenance, utilities, insurance, warranties and
guarantees far that part of the Work which will become
binding upon OWNER and CONTRACTOR at the time
when OWNER takes over such operatian (unless they shall
have .otherwise agreed in writing and sa infarmed
ENGINEER). During such .operation and prior ta
Substantial Completian .of such part .of the Wark, OWNER
shall allow CONTRACTOR reasanable access ta camplete
or carrect items on said list and to complete other related
23
FILE:H:\ACCfG\COr-rrRACI\MASTERS\1910.8
Wark.
14.10.3. Na occupancy .or separate aperatian .of part .of
the Wark will be accamplished priar ta compliance with
the requirements .of paragraph 5.15 in respect .of praperty
msurance .
Final Inspection:
14.11. Upon written natice fram CONTRACTOR that the
entire Wark .or an agreed portian thereof is camplete,~ENGI-
NEER will make a [mal inspection with OWNER arid CON-
TRACTOR and will natify CONTRACTOR in writing .of all
particulars in which this inspectian reveals that the Wark is
incamplete .or defective. CONTRACTORshall immediately
take such measures as are necessary ta remedy such defi-
CIenCIes .
Final Application for Payment:
14.12. After CONTRACTOR has campleted all such car-
rectians ta the satisfactian .of ENGINEER and delivered all
maintenance and .operating instructians, schedules, guarantees,
Bonds, certificates .of inspectian, marked-up record documents
(as provided in paragraph 6.19) and ather dacuments-:"all as
required by the Cantract Documents, and after ENGINEER
has indicated that the Wark is acceptable (subject to the
provisions of paragraph 14.16), CONTRACTOR may make
application for [mal payment following the procedUre for
progress payments. The final Applicatian far Payment shall be
accampanied by all documentation called far in the Cantract
Dacuments, together with camplete and legally effective
releases .or waivers (satisfactary ta OWNER) .of all Liens
arising aut .of .or filed in cannectian with the Wark. In lieu
thereaf and as appraved by OWNER, CONTRACTOR may
furnish receipts or releases in full; an affidavit .of CON-
TRACTOR that the releases and receipts include all labar,
services, material and equipment for which a Lien could be
filed, and that all payralls, material and equipment bills. and
ather indebtedness connected with the Wark for which
OWNER or OWNER's proPerty might in any way be respon-
sible, have been paid .or .otherwise satisfied; and consent .of the
surety, if any, ta [mal payment. If any Subcontractar .or
Supplier fails ta furnish a release .or receipt in full, CON-
TRACTOR may fwnish a Bond .or other collateral satisfactory
ta OWNER ta indemnify OWNER against any Lien.
Final Payment and Acceptance:
14.13. If, an the basis .of ENGINEER's .observation .of the
Wark during construction and final inspection, and
ENGINEER's review .of the final Applicatian far Payment and
accompanying documentatian--all as required by the Contract
Dacuments, ENGINEER is satisfied that the Wark has been
completed and CONTRACTOR's ather .obligations under the
Contract Documents have been fulfilled, ENGINEER will,
. within ten days after receipt .of the [mal Applicatian far
Payment, indicate in writing ENGINEER's recammendatian .of 'I
payment and preSent the Application to OWNER for payment.
Thereupon ENGINEER will give written natice ta OWNER I
and CONTRACTOR that the Wack is acceptable subject ta the
provisians .of paragraph 14.16. Otherwise, ENGINEER will
return the Application ta CONTRACTOR, indicating in I
writing the reasans far refusing ta recammend [mal payment,
in which case CONTRACTOR shall make the necessary
carrectians and resubmit the Applicatian. Thirty days after I
presentatian to OWNER .of the Applicatian and accampanying
documentation, in appropriate form and substance, and with
. ENGINEER's recommendatian and natice .of acceptability, the I
amaunt recommended by ENGINEER will became due and
will be paid by OWNER ta CONTRACTOR.
14.14. If, thraugh na fault .of CONTRACTOR, fmal cam-I
pletian .of the Wack is significantly delayed and if ENGINEER
sa confirms, OWNER shall, upon receipt .of CONTRACTOR's
[mal Applicatian far Payment and recammendatian .of I
EN GINEER, and withaut terminating the Agreement, make
payment .of the balance due far that portian .of the Work fully
completed and accepted. If the remaining balance ta be held by I
OWNER far Wark nat fully campleted .or carrected is less
than the retain age stipulated in the Agreement, and if Bands
have been furnished as required in paragraph 5.1, the written
consent .of the surety to the payment of the balance due for that I
portion of the Wark fully completed and accepted shall be
submitted by CONTRACTOR ta ENGINEER with the
Applicatian far such payment. Such payment shall be made I
ooder the ten:ils and conditions governing final payment, except
that it shall nat constitute a waiver .of claims.
Contractor's Continuing Obligation: I
14.15. CONTRACTOR's obligatian ta perfarm and com-
plete the Work in accardance with the Cantract Dacuments I
shall be absolute. Neither recammendatian .of any progress .or
final payment by ENGINEER, nar the issuance .of a certificate
.of Substantial Campletian, nar any payment by OWNER ta I
CONTRACTOR under the Cantract Documents, nar any use
.or occupancy .of the Work .or any part thereaf by OWNER, nar
any act .of acceptance by OWNER nar any failure ta da sa, nar
any review and approval .of a Shap Drawing .or' sample I
submission, nor the issuance .of a notice .of acceptability by
ENGINEER pursuant to paragraph 14.13, nar any carrectian
.of defective Wark by OWNER will canstitute an acceptance I
afWark natin accordance with the Contract Dacuments .or a
release .of CONTRACTOR's abligatian ta perfarm the Wark
in accardance with the Cantract Documents (except as I
provided in paragraph 14.16).
24
FlLE:H:IACcrG\CONTRACl\MASTERS\ 191 0.8
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
14.16.1. a waiver .of all claims by OWNER:against
CONTRACTOR, except claims arising fram u'nSJrlled
Liens, from deftctive Wark appearing after fmal'inspection
pursuant to paragraph 14.1 1 .or from failure to cOmply with
the Cantract Documents .or the terms .of any special
guarantees specified therein; hawever, it will not constitute
a waiver by OWNER .of any rights in respect .of
CONTRACTOR's continuing obligations under the Can-
tract Documents; and
14.16.2. a waiver of all claims by CONTRACTOR
against OWNER ather than thase previausly made in writ-
ing and still unsettled.
ARTICLE 15--SUSPENSION OF WORK AND
TERMINATION
Owner May Suspend Work:
15.1. OWNER may, at any time and without cause, sus-
pend the Wark .or. any portian thereaffar a period ofnat mare
than ninety days by natice in writing to CONTRACTOR and
ENGINEER which will fix the date an which Wark will be
resumed. CONTRACTOR shall resume the Wark an the date
so fixed. CONTRACTOR shall be allowed an increase in the
Cantract Price .or an extension .of the Contract Time, or both,
directly a~butable ta any suspensian if CONTRACTOR
makes an- approved claim there far as provided in Articles 11
and 12.
Owner May Terminate:
15.2. Upon the occurrence .of any .one .or mare .of the
following events:
15.2.1. if CONTRACTOR commences a valuntary
case under any chapter of the Bankruptcy Code (Title 11,
United States Code), as naw .or hereafter in effect, .or if
CONTRACTOR tal<es any equivalent .or similar actian by
filing a petitian .or .otherwise under any ather federal .or
state law in effect at such time relating to the bankruptcy .or
insalvency;
15.2.2. if a petitian is filed against CONTRACTOR
under any chapter .of the Bankruptcy Code as naw .or
hereafter in effect at the time of filing, .or if a petition is
filed seeking any such equivalent or similar relief against
CONTRACTOR under any other federal .or state law in
effect at the time relating to bankruptcy or insolvency;
15.2.3. if CONTRACTOR makes a general assignment
far the benefit .of creditars;
15.2.4. if a trustee, receiver, custodian .or agent .of
CONTRACTOR is appointed under applicable law .or
under can tract, whase appaintment .or autharity ta take
charge .of property of CONTRACTOR is far the purpose .of
enforcing a Lien against such praperty .or far the purpose .of
general administration .of such praperty far the benefit .of
CONTRACTOR's creditars;
15.2.5. if CONTRACTOR admits in writing an inabi-
lity ta pay i~ debts generally as they became due:
15.2.6. if CONTRACTOR persistently fails ta perf arm
the Wark in accardance with the Can tract Dacuments
(including, but nat limited ta, failure ta supply sufficient
. skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment or
failure to adhere to the pragress schedule established under
paragraph 2.9 as revised fram time ta time);
15.2.7. if CONTRACTOR disregards Laws .or Regu-
latians of any public bady having jurisdictian;
15.2.8. if CONTRACTOR disregards the autharity .of
ENGINEER; .or
15.2.9. if CONTRACTOR .otherwise vialates in any
substantial way any provisians of the Contract Documents:
OWNER may, after giving CONTRACTOR (and the surety,
. if there be .one) seven days' written natice and to the extent
permitted by Laws and Regulatians, terminate the services .of
CONTRACTOR, exclude CONTRACTOR from the site and
take possessian .of the Wark and .of all CONTRACTOR's
tools, appliances, constructian equipment and machinery at the
site and use the same ta the full extent they cauld be used by
CONTRACTOR (withaut liability ta CONTRACTOR far
trespass .or canversian), incarporate in the Wark all materials
and equipment stared at the site .or far which OWNER has
paid CONTRACTOR but which are stored elsewhere, and
finish the Warkas OWNER may deem expedient. In such case
CONTRACTOR shall nat be entitled ta receive any further
payment mtil the Wark is finished. If the unpaid balance .of the
Can tract Price exceeds the direct, indirect and cansequential
costs of completing the Work (including but not limited ta fees
and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys and other
prafessianals and caurt and arbitratian casts) such excess will
25
FILE:H:\ACCTGlCONTRAClIMASTERS\1910.8
be paid ta CONTRACTOR If such casts exceed such unpaid
balance, CONTRACTOR shall pay the difference to OWNER
Such costs incurred by OWNER will be approved as to
reasanableness by ENGINEER and incarporated in a Change
Order, but when exercising any rights .or remedies under this
paragraph OWNER shall nat be required to obtain the lowest
price far the Wark perfanned.
15.3. Where CONTRACTOR's services have been sa
terminated by OWNER, the terminatian will nat affect any
rights or remedies of OWNER against CONTRACTOR then
existing .or which may thereafter accrue. Any retentian .or
payment afmaneys due CONTRACTOR by OWNER will nat
release CONTRACTOR from liability.
15.4. Upon seven days' written natice to CONTRACTOR
and ENGINEER, OWNER may, withaut cause and withaut
prejudice ta any ather right .or remedy, elect to abandan the
Work and terminate the Agreement. In such case.
CONTRACTOR shall be paid for all Work executed and any
',expense sustained plus reasonable terminatian expenses, which
will include, but not be limited to, direct, indirect and con-
sequential costs (including, but nat limited to, fees and charges
of engineers, architects, attorneys and other prafessionals and
caurt and arbitratian casts).
Contractor May Stop Work or Terminate:
15.5. If, thraugh na act .or fault .of CONTRACTOR, the
Wark is suspended far a period .of mare than ninety days by
OWN ER or Wlder an .order of court or other public autharity,
.or ENGINEER fails ta act an any Applicatian far Payment
26
within thirty days after. it is submitted, .or OWNER fails far I
thirty days to pay CONTRACTOR any sum fmally determined
to be due, then CONTRACTOR may, upon seven days' written I
natice to OWNER and ENGINEER, terminate the Agreement
and recover from OWNER payment far all Wark executed and
any expense sustained plus reasanable termination expenses. I
In additian and in lieu .of terminating the Agreement, if
ENGINEER has failed to act an an Applicatian far Payment
.or OWNER has failed ta make any payment. as afaresaid, I
CONTRACTOR may upon seven days' written natice to
OWNER and ENGINEER stop the Work until payment of all
amaunts then due. The provisians .of this paragraph shall not
relieve CONTRACTOR of the obligatians under paragraph I
6.29 to carry on the Work in accardance with the progress
schedule and withaut delay during disputes and disagreements
with OWNER I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
[The remainder of this page was left blank
intentionally. ]
F1LE:H:IACCTGICOl'ITR.AcnMASTERSI 191 0.8
I
I ARTICLE 16--ARBITRA TION
16.2. Na demand far arbitratian of any claim, dispute .or
other matter that" is required to be referred ta ENGINEER
initially far decisian in accordance with paragraph 9.11 will be
made until the earlier of (a) the date an which ENGINEER has
rendered a decisian .or (b) the tenth day after the parties have
I presented their evidence ta ENGINEER ifa written decision
has not been rendered by ENGINEER befare that d'!te, No
demand far arbitratian .of any such claim, dispute .or ather
matter will be made later than thirty days after the date an
I which ENGINEER has rendered a written decisianin respect
thereofin accardance with paragraph 9.11; and the failure ta
demand arbitration within said thirty days' period shall result
I in ENGINEER's decisian being fmal and binding upon
OWNER and CONTRACTOR If ENGINEER renders a
decisian after arbitratian proceedings have been initiated, such
I decision may be entered as evidence but will nat supersede the
arbitration proceedings, except where the decision is
acceptable to the parties concerned. No demand far arbitration
I of any written decision afENGlNEER rendered in accordance
with paragraph 9.10 will be made later than ten days after the
party making such demand has' delivered written notice :of
I intentian ta appeal as pravided in paragraph 9.10.
I
I
I
16.3. Notice of the demand for arbitratian will be filed in
writing with the ather party ta the Agreement and with. the
American Arbitratian Associatian, and a copy will be sent to
I
I
~ ."
ENGINEER for infarmatian. The demand far arbitration will
be made within the thirty-day or ten-day period specified in
paragraph 16.2 as applicable, and in all ather cases within a
reasanable time after the claim, dispute or ather matter in
questian has arisen, and in na event shall any such demand be
made after the date when institutian .of legal .or equitable
proceedings based an such claim, dispute .or ather matter in
question wauld be barred by the applicable statute .of limi-
tations .
16.4. Na arbitratian arising aut .of .or relating ta the Can-
tract Dacuments shall include by cansolidatian, joinder .or in
any ather manner any ather person or entity (including
ENGINEER, ENGINEER's agents, emplayees .or cansultants)
wha is nat a party ta this cantract unless:
16.4.1. the inclusian .of such other persan .or entity is
necessary if complete relief is to be afforded amang those
wha are already parties ta the arbitratian,
16.4.2. such ather persan .or entity is substantially
involved in a questian of law .or fact which is common to
thase wha are already parties ta thearbitratian and which
will arise in such proceedings, and
16.4.3. the written cansent .of the ather persan .or entity
sought to be included and of OWNER and CONTRAC-
TOR has been .obtained far such inclusian, which cansent
shall make specific reference ta this paragraph; but no such
consent shall constitute consent to arbitratian of any dispute
nat specifically described in such cansent .or ta arbitratian
with any party not specifically identified in such consent.
16.5. The award rendered by the arbitrators will be fmal,
judgment may be entered upan it in any court having juris-
diction thereof, and will not be subject to modification or
appeal except to the extent permitted by Sections 10 and 11 of
the Federal Arbitratian Act (9 U.S.c. 10,11).
[The remainder .of this page was left blank intentianally.)
27
F1LE:H:IACCTG\CQI'(ffiAC1\MASTI;RSI 19\ 0.8
ARTICLE 17-MISCELLANEOUS
Giving Notice:
17.1. Whenever any pravisian of the Contract Documents
requires the giving of written natice, it will be deemed ta have
been validly given if delivered in persan ta the individual .or ta
a member .of the fInn .or to an officer of th.e corporation far
wham it is intended, .or if delivered at .or sent by registered .or
certified mail, postage prepaid, ta the last business address
knawn ta the giver of the natice.
Computation Or Tune:
17.2.1. When any periad of time is referred to in the
Cantract Documents by days, it will be computed ta
exclude the first and include the last day .of such period. If
the last day .of any such period falls an a Saturday .or
Sunday .or an a day made a legal haliday by the law .of the
applicable jurisdictian, such day will be omitted from the
computatian.
17.2.2. A calendar day of twenty-faur haurs measured
fram midnight to the next midnight shall constitute a day.
General:
17.3. Should OWNER or CONTRACTOR suffer injury or
damage ta persan .or property because .of any errar, amissian
.or act .of the ather party .or .of any .of the ather party's I
emplayees .or agents .or .others far whase acts the ather party is
legally liable, claim will be made in writing to the ather' party I
within a reasonable time of the first observance of such injury
.or damage. The pravisians .of this paragraph 17.3 shall nat be
construed as a substitute far .or a waiver .of the provisions of I
any applicable statute .of limitatians .or repose.
17.4. The duties and abligatians imposed by these General I
Conditians and the rights and remedies available hereunder ta
the parties hereto, and, in particular but withaut limitatian, the
warranties, guarantees and abligatians imposed upon
CONTRACTOR by paragraphs 6.30,13.1,13.12,13.14,14.3 I
and 15.2 and all .of the rights and remedies available ta
OWNER and ENGINEER thereunder, are in additian ta, and
are nat to be construed in any way as a limitatian .of, any rights I
and remedies available ta any .or all .of them which are
.otherwise imposed .or available by Laws .or Regulatians, by
special warranty' .or guarantee .or by ather provisians .of the I
Contract Documen~, and the provisians of this paragraph will
be as effective as if repeated specifically in the Can tract
Documents in connectian with each particular duty, abligatian, I
right and remedy to which they apply. All representations,
warranties and guarantees made in the Cantract Documents
will survive final payment and terminatian .or completian .of the I
Agreement.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
28
F1LE:H:IACCTGlCONTRACl\MASrnRS\1910.8
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS
SC-l. These supplementary conditions amend or supplement the Standard General Conditions of
the Construction Contract and other provisions of the Contract Documents as Indicated
below~ All provisions which are not so amended or supplemented remain in full force and
effect.
SC-2. The terms used in the supplementary condition which are defined in the Standard General
Conditions to the Construction Contract have the meanings assigned to them in the General
Conditions. '
SC-3. -Amend first sentence of paragraph 2.2.
, Owner shall furnish to Contractor up to five (5) copies. ..
SC-4. Revise paragraph 2.7 in its entireity and insert the following.
Before any work at the site is started, CONTRACTOR shall deliver to OWNER, with
a copy to ENGINEER,_,certificates (and other evidence of insurance requested by
OWNER) which CONTRACTOR is required to purchase and maintain in accordance
with paragraphs 5.3' and 5.4.
SC-5. Amend paragraph 4,1.
Add: Contractor shall schedule work as prioritized in the Pre-construction meeting.
SC-6. Amend paragraph 4.2.1
Add: Soil boring report is not available.
SC-7. The limits ofliability for the insurance required by paragraph 5.3 of the General Conditions
shall provide coverage.for not less than the following amounts or greater where required by
Laws and Regulations: .
, ,
a. Policies, Certificates, Limits and Disposition of Documents. - The Contractor shall
obtain at his expense insurjiiice with 'limits as shown hereinbelow unless the
Contractor desires to broaden the limits and obtain more protection.
[1] OWNER'S PROTECTIVE LIABILITY INSURANCE - Taken out in name
of the oWQ.er as insured. (See Invitation to Bid fot. exact legal name of
owner. )
Bodily injury, including death -limits of$l,OOO,OOO.OO for each person and
$2,000,000.00 for each accident.'
Property damage -limits of$500,000.00 for each accident and $1,000,000.00
for the aggregate of operations.
1
FILE\K:142706\AOMIN\SPECSISUPL.CON
DISPOSITION: Original policy must be deposited with owner prior to
commencement of work.
[2] CONTRACTOR'S PROTECTIVE LIABILITY INSURANCE - Taken out
in the name of the Contractor.
Bodily injury, including death -limits of$I,OOO,OOO.OO for each person and
$2,000,000.00 for each accident.
Property damage -limits of$500,000.00 for each accident and $1,000,000.00
for the aggregate of operations.
DISPOSITION: Certificate of insurance must be sent to owner prior to
commencement of work.
[3] CONTRACTOR'S PUBLIC LIABILITY INSURANCE - Taken out in the
name of the Contractor.
Bodily injury, including death -limits of$I,OOO,OOO.OO for each person and
$2,000,000.00 for each accident.
Property damage -limits of$500,000.00 for each accident and $1,000,000.00
for the aggregate of operations.
DISPOSITION: Certificate of insurance must be sent to Owner prior to
commencement of work.
[4] BUILDER'S RISK INSURANCE - Payable to the Contractor and Owner, as
their interests may appear, upon the entire structure and upon all materials in
or adjacent thereto which are to be made a part of the insured structure to
100% of the insurable value thereof covering fire, extended coverage,
vandalism and_malicious mischief.
DISPOSITION: Original policy must be deposited with Owner prior to
commencement of work.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
b.
Acceptability of Insurers to Owner. - No insurance will be acceptable unless written
by a company licensed by the State Insurance Commissioner to do business in
Georgia at the time the policy is issued, and the company must in addition be
acceptable to the Owner. To avoid inconvenience, any general contractor or
subcontractor must get in touch with the Owner to determine whether the insurance
company or companies he expects to use is or are acceptable to the Owner. All
policies and certificates must be signed or countersigned, as the case may be, by
resident Georgia agents.
c.
Termination of Obligation to Insure. - Unless otherwise expressly provided to the
contrary, the obligation to insure as prescribed herein shall not terminate until the
Engineer shall have executed the final certificate.
d.
Contractor shall purchase and maintain during the full course of construction "All
Risk" Builder's Risk Insurance coverage which names the Contractor, Owner and
Engineer as co-insured.
e.
The Contractor will turn over areas completed for construction prior to substantial
completion. ~ontractor shall maintain insurance on work he performs within
"battery limits".
2
FILE\K:\42706\ADM IN\SPECS\SUPL.CON
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SC-8. Add to paragraph 6.8.2.
The CONTRACTOR shall identify Utility Contractor at time of bid and mark the Bid
, with th Utility Contractor's Georgia License Number. Within two (2) days of being
notified that the CONTRACTOR is the apparent low bidder, the CONTRACTOR
shall submit a list to the ENGINEER of the following SUBCONTRACTORS that
he plans to use on this project. The list shall include:
a. Grading subcontractor
b. Tennis Court subcontractor
c. Paving subcontractor
d. . Concession Stand Supplier
e. Pa,:,ilion Supplier
.SC-9. Add paragraph 7.5
7.5. Should CONTRACTOR cause damage to the work or property of any
separate contractor at the site, or should any claim arising out of
CONTRACTOR's performance of the Work at the site be made by any
separate contractor against CONTRACTOR, OWNER, ENGINEER, the
Construction Coordinator or any other person, CONTRACTOR shall
promptly attempt. to settle with such other contractor by agreement, or to
otherwise resolve the dispute by arbitration or at law. CONTRACTOR shall,
to the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, indemnify and hold
OWNER, ENGINEER and the Construction: Coordinator harmless from and
against all claims; damages, losses and expenses (including, but not limited
to, fees of engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals and court
and arbitration costs) arising directly, indirectly or consequentially out of any'
action, legal or equitable, brought by any separate contractor against
OWNER; ENGINEER, or the Construction Coordiriator to the extent based
on a claim arising out of CONTRACTOR's performance of the Work.
Should a separate contractor cause damage to the W. ork or property of
CONTRACTOR .or should the performance of Work by any separate
contractor at the site give rise to any other claim, CONTRACTOR shall not
instinite any action, legal or equitable, against OWNER, ENGINEER or the
Construction Coordinator or permit any action against any of them to be
maintained and continued in its name or for its benefit in any court or before
any arbiter which seeks to impose liability on or to recover damages from
OWNER, ENGINEER or the Construction Coordinator on account of any
such damage or claim. If CONTRACTOR is delayed at any time in
performing or furnishing Work by any act or neglect of a separate contractor
and OWNER andCONTRACTOR are unable to agree as to t he extent of any
adjustmentin Contract Time attributable thereto, CONTRACTOR may make
a claim for an extension of time in accordance with Article 12. An extension
of the Contract Time shall be CONTRACTOR's exclusive remedy with
3
FILE\K:1427061ADM INlSPECSlSUPL ,CON
SC-lO.
SC-11.
respect to OWNER, ENGINEER and Construction Coordinator for any
delay, disruption, interference or hinderance caused by any separate
contractor. This paragraph does not prevent recovery from OWNER,
ENGINEER or Construction Coordinator for activities that are their
respective responsibilities.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Delete paragraph 9.10 of the General Conditions in its entirety and insert the following
in its place:
9.10 ENGINEER will have authority to determine the actual quantities and
classifications of items of Unit Price Work performed by CONTRACTOR,
and the written decisions of ENGINEER on such matters will be final,
binding on OWNER and CONTRACTOR and not subject to appeal (except
as modified by ENGINEER to reflect changed factual condition~).
Delete ARTICLE 16.
4
FILE\K:142706\ADMIN\SPECS\SUPL,CON
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT
BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR
ON THE BASIS OF A STIPULATED PRICE
THIS AGREEMENT is dated as of the
day of
October
in the year 1998
27th
by and between
and
Augusta-Richmond ComitY Commission
(hereinafter called OWNER)
Allen-Batchelor Construction. Inc.
hereinafter called CONTRACTOR).
OWNER and CONTRACTOR, in consideration of the mutual covenants hereinafter set forth, agree
as follows:
Article 1. WORK.
CONTRACTOR shall complete all Work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents. The
Work is generally described as follows:
May Park Improvements
The Project for which the Work under the Contract Documents may be the whole or only a part is
generally described as follows:
The installation of a new pavillion, concession stand, scoring towers, parking area, field lighting
and other improvements as shown 'on the construction drawings and in the project specifications
for May Par~ Augusta-Richmond County, GA.
Article 2. ENGINEER
The Project has been designed by: Johnson, Laschober & Associates, P.c.
. 1296 Broad Street
Augusta, GA 30901
who is hereinafter called ENGINEER and who is to act as OWNER's representative, assume all
duties and responsibilities and-have the rights and authority assigned to ENGINEER in the. Contract
Documents in connection with completion of the Work in accordance with th~ Contract Documents.
Article 3. CONTRACT TIME.
.3.1. The Work will be substantially completed on or before 150 days after notice to proceed,
. and completed and ready for final payment in accordance with paragraph 14.13 of the General
Conditions on or before 180 days after notice to proceed.
K:\42706\AOMIN\SPECS\ 1910.&6. 1
3.2. Liquidated Damages. OWNER and CONTRACTOR recognize that time is of the essence
of this Agreement and that OWNER will suffer financial loss if the Work is not completed
within the times, specified in p'aragraph 3.1 above, plus any extensions thereof allowed in
accordance with Article 12 of the General Conditions. They also recognize the delays, expense
and difficulties involved in proving in a legal or arbitration proceeding the actual loss suffered
by OWNER if the Work is not completed on time. Accordingly, instead of requiring any such
proof, OWNER and CONTRACTOR agree that as liquidated damages for delay (but not as
a penalty) CONTRACTOR shall pay OWNER One Hundred dollars
($ 100.00 ) for each day that expires after the time specIfied m paragraph 3.1 for Substantial
Completion until the Work' is substantially complete. After Substantial Completion if
CONTRACTOR shall neglect, refuse or fail to complete the remaining Work within the
Contract Time or any proper extension thereof granted by OWNER, CONTRACTOR shall pay
OWNER One Hundred dollars ($ 100.00) for each day that expires after
the time specIfied m paragraph 3. I for completion and readmess for final payment.
Article 4. CONTRACT PRICE.
4.1. OWNER shall pay CONTRACTOR for completion of the Work in accordance with the
Contract Documents in current funds as follows:
Base Bid
$
Add Alternates
Deductive Alternates
$
Total Contract Amount
$ 397,500
Base Bid including Add, Alts 1, 2, 3 and value engineering
items as reference in Allen-Batchelor letters dated 9/29/98
and 10/12/98.
Article 5. PAYMENT PROCEDURES.
CONTRACTOR shall submit Applications for Payment in accordance with Article 14 of the General
Conditions. Applications for Payment will be processed by ENGINEER as provided in the General
Conditions.
5.1. Progress Payments. OWNER shall make progress payments on account ofthe Contract
Price on the basis of CONTRACTOR's Applications for Payment as recommended by
ENGINEER, on or about the 15 day of each month during construction as provided below.
All progress payments will be on the basis of the progress of the Work measured by the
schedule of values established in paragraph 2.9 of the General.Conditions (and in the case of
Unit Price Work based on the number of units completed) or, in the event there is no schedule
of values, as provided in the General Requirements.
5.1.1. Prior to Substantial Completion, progress payments will be made in an amount
equal to the percentage indicated below, but, in each case, less the aggregate of payments
2
K:1427061ADMINlSPECSI 191 a.SA 1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
!:t_- -;
previously made and less such amounts as ENGINEER shall determine, or OWNER may
withhold, in accordance with paragraph 14.7 .of the General Conditions.
10 % of Work completed. If Work has been 50% completed as determined by
. .
ENGINEER, and if the character and progress ,of the Work have been satisfactory
to OWNER and ENGINEER, OWNER on recommendation of ENGINEER, may
determin~. that as long as the character and progress of the Work remain
satisfactory to them, there will be no additional retainage on account of Work
completed in which' case the remaining progress payments prior to Substantial
Completion wiIlbe in an amount equal to 100% ofthe Work completed.
5.1.2. Upon Substantial ~ompletion; in an amount sufficient to increase total payments
to CONTRACTOR to 95 % of the Contract Price, less such amounts as ENGINEER
snaIl determine, or OWNER may withhold, in accordance with paragraph 14.7 of the
General Conditions. .
5.2. Final Payment. Upon final completion and acceptance of the Work in accordance with
paragraph 14;13 of the General Conditions, OWNER shall pay the remainder of the Contract Price
as recommended by ENGINEER as provided in said paragraph 14.13.
Article 6. CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIONS.
In order to induce OWNER to enter into this Agreement CONTRACTOR makes the following
representations:
6.1. CONTRACTOR has familiarized itself with the nature and extent of the Contract
Documents, Work, site, locality, and all local conditions and Laws and Regulations that in any
manner may affect cost, progress, performance or fumishingofthe Work.
6.2. CONTRACTOR has obtained and carefully studied (or assumes responsibility for
.obtaining and carefully studying) all such examinations, investiga~ons, explorations, tests,
reports and studies which pertain to the, subsurface or physic!!l conditions at or contiguous to
the site or otherwise may affect the cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the Work as
CONTRACTOR considers necessary for the performance or furnishing of the Work at the
. .
Contract Price, within the Contract Time arid in accordance with the other terms and conditions
of the Contract Documents, including specifically the provisions of paragraph 4 . 2 of the
General Conditions; and no additional examinations, investigations, explora~ions, tests, reports,
studies or similar information or data are or will be required by CONTRACTOR for such
purposes.
6.3. CONTRACTOR has reviewed and checked all information and data shown or indicated
on t~e Contract Documents with res~ect to existing Underground Facilities at or contiguous
3
K:\42706\AOMIN\$PEcs\' 91 a.SA 1
to the site and assumes responsibility for the accurate location of said Underground Facilities.
No additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, reports, studies or similar
information or data in respect of said Underground Facilities are or will be required by
CONTRACTOR in order to perform and furnish the Work at the Contract Price, within the
Contract Time and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract
Documents, including specificaIiy the provisions ofparagraph 4 ~ 3 of the General Conditions.
6.4. CONTRACTOR has correlated the results of all such observations, examinations,
investigations, explorations, tests, reports and studies with the terms and conditions of the
Contract Documents.
6.5. CONTRACTOR has given ENGINEER written notice of all conflicts, errors or
discrepancies that he has discovered in the Contract Do~uments and the written resolution
thereof by ENGINEER is acceptable to CONTRACTOR.
Article 7. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS.
The Contract Documents which comprise the entire agreement between OWNER and
CONTRACTOR concerning the Work consist of the following:
7.1. This Agreement (pages 1 to 6, inclusive).
7.2. Exhibits to this Agreement Bid Form 9/24/98
Value Engineering Letter 9/29/98
Roof Deck Letter 10/12/98
7.3. Performance and Payment Bonds
7.4. Notice of Award.
7.5. General Conditions (pages 1 to 28 inclusive) .
7.6. Supplementary Conditions (pages 1 to 4, inclusive).
7.7. Specifications consisting of Divisions 1, 2 and 16, as listed in table of contents thereof.
7.8. Drawings, consisting of a cover sheet and sheets numbered CS.l through E1.2M
inclusive with each sheet bearing the following general title:
CS.l Cover Sheet
CO.IM
CO.IF
C1.1M
CO.IF
Cl.2M
C1.2F
C2.1M
C2.1F
C3.1F
E1.1M
E1.1F
E1.2M
4
K:\A2706\A0MINlSPECS\ '9IG.SA 1
I
I
I
.1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.1
7.9. Addenda number, inclusive.
7.10. CONTRACTOR's Bid (pages 1 to 7, inclusive).
7.11. . The following which may be delivered or issued after the Effective Date of the
Agreement and are not attached hereto: All Written Amendments and other documents
amending, modifying, or supplementing the Contract Documents pursuant to'paragraphs 3.4
and 3.5 of the General Conditions.
7.12. The documents listed in paragraphs 8.2 et seq. above are attached to this Agreement
(except as expressly noted otherwise above).
There are no Contract Documents other than those listed above in this Article 8. The Contract
Documents may only be amended, modified or supplemented as provided in paragraphs 3.4 and 3.5
of the General Conditions.
Article 8. MISCE,LLANEODS.
8 .1. Terms used in this Agreement which are defined in Article I of the General Conditions
will have the meanings indicated in the General Conditions. '
8.2. No assignment by a party hereto of any rights under or interests in the Contract
.Documents will be binding on another party hereto without the written consent of the party
sought to be bound; and specifically but without limi~atjon mQneys tliatmay 9~c~me due and
moneys that are due may not be assigned without such. consent (except' to. the extent that the
effect of this restriction may be limited by law), and un.l,ess specifically stated to the contrary 'I
in any written consent to an assignment no assignment will release or discharge the assignor
from any duty or responsibility under the Contract Documents.
8.3. OWNER and CONTRACTOR each binds itself, its partners, successors;'assigns and legal
representatives to the other party hereto, its partners, succes~ors, assign~. and legal
representatives in re~pect of all covenants, agreements~d .obligations ~ontaiiied in the
-Contract Documents: . . " . '"
.,.," ,
" .
c:., .
Article 9. OTHER PROVISIONS.
.- _..~ -.. ~ .,
" f..
0' '1...,;' ,t.,,~~:.. ." ."
~ .. - '-"'~'.:l}: -;. 1...-.1 ::,..... " .
9.1 GEORGIA PROMPT PAY ACT . . "'"~,,,":;:'>~(U~~~.f:..':-
This agreement is intended by the parties to, and does,supeiced~'~fu)Y'arid all .
.provisionsofthe Georgia Prompt Pay Act, O.C.G.A. ~ 13-11-1, et seq. In the event
.", .' .any pr~vision 'of this Agreement is inconsistent with any provision of the Prompt Pay
,,/ ,:' 'Act, .t~e p,rovisions of this Agreement shall control.
... 4 .' -~ ._.... .
~ .
.....r.<r
:: :92 _CONSENT: TO JURISDICTION
""' - -.'- . - .
,;:: . All.claiir!~,idisputes and other matters in question between the OWNER and the
-: ~.~< . " C01-,rrib\cToR arising out of or related to the Agreement, or the breach thereof,
..... - ....
"
.:,"
-''''''' ..,.....
5
K:IoI2706IAOMINlSPECSI191 O.a.. 1
This Agreement will be effective on
lO/~1
,199___.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
shall be decided in the Superior Court of Richmond County, Georgia. The
Contractor, by executing this Agreement, specifically consents to venue in Richmond
County and waives any right to contest the venue in the Superior Court of Richmond
County, Georgia.
9.3 RETAINAGE
Notwithstanding any provision of the law to the contrary, the parties agree that no
interest shall be due CONTRACTOR on any sum held.as retainage pursuant to this
Agreement and CONTRACTOR specifically waives any claim to same.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, OWNER and CONTRACTOR have signed this Agreement in triplicate. One
counterpart each has been delivered to OWNER, CONTRACTOR and ENGINEER. All portions of the .
Contract Documents have been signed or identified by OWNER and CONTRACTOR or by ENGINEER
on their behalf. .
OWNER An2nsla-Riehmond ConnlY Commission. ~ CONT
4186 C
rfY
~~
'~~....
..' :c".-
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
[CORPORATE SEAL]
Attest
~x-~
Address for giving notices
License No.
(If CONTRACTOR is a corporation, attach evidence
of authority to sign.)
r'tBo/-*
'"
", ..
6
.Pr~...",-.,", .,'.__ d
K:\ol270ll\AoMIN\SPECS\191 0,&0 1
.. A CORD :: mIEllilllmgmE::'~Ii. II~Blllml)::1 mSIl~lm.I'::::::",::,:+::C,. :....::. -:'-;-::;' . DATE (MMlDDIYY) ,
.. .. 1M .... :::::::",:,:::::::,::::::::',:,': .::::........'..............:::.:::':::::::.:::::.......:::=:::...................... .............. '.'.' .....::. .'. ':'.' '.':: .::....:.::...:..:,::::::::::::::::::::: 10 /2 8 / 19 9 8
PR6DUCER.t7'(6)65'O~'600'()" ......... "'FAX'( 7'06)650~6001'"''''
lanchard & Calhoun Ins Agency, Inc.
POBox 212359
Augusta, GA 30917-2359
ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE
HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR
ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW.
COMPANIES AFFORDING COVERAGE
Attn:
'iNSURED'"
Ext:
................. .. ..-.. .............". ...... ...... ................
COMPANY C i n c inn a t i Ins u ran c e Com pan y
A
COMPANY
B
ALLEN-BATCHELOR CONSTRUCTION CO INC
4189 CROSSTOWNE CT
EVANS GA 30809
COMPANY
C
COMPANY
o
::qQVRIp\9g~:::::::::::::::rr:::;..: :;;;.. .... ................... .ii;: ..::::::\::::::::::::::::::;::::::::::::::::::::::: ,;,;.;;;';;;;;';;;;;;;;;;;;;;;';;';":';;';;';;"":";,,;,.,., "::'::::':::::;:'::'::::}}}(;';"';";';;': . ::.. :...... ..... ?1......... ...::... .,.,....., ....... ...... ':'.:.' ....... ,. .;.;.;.:.;;;::;:.
........THis..rS.TCfc.ER.Tii=Y T"HAT TH"E"P'OLlCIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOV"E"FOR TH'E POLICY PER"lor)" .......
INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT. TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS
CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN. THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS,
EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS.
CO TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMBER POLICY EFFECTIVE .: POLICY EXPIRATION LIMITS
LTR DATE (MM/DDIYY) DATE (MMlDDIYY)
GENERAL LIABILITY GENERAL AGGREGATE S
COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY PRODUCTS. COMPIOP AGG $
CLAIMS MADE OCCUR PERSONAL & ADV INJURY $
OWNER'S & CONTRACTOR'S PROT EACH OCCURRENCE $
FIRE DAMAGE (Anyone fire) $
..... ................,.........
MED EXP (Anyone person) S
AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY
COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT $
ANY AUTO
ALL OWNED AUTOS BODILY INJURY
(Per person) $
. SCHEDULED AUTOS
HIRED AUTOS BODILY INJURY
(Per accidenl) S
'. NON-OWNED AUTOS
.. .................................... PROPERTY DAMAGE $
GARAGE LIABILITY AUTO ONLY. EA ACCIDENT $
ANY AUTO OTHER THAN AUTO ONLY:
EACH ACCIDENT' S
.....,.................
S
EXCESS LIABILITY EACH OCCURRENCE S
UMBRELLA FORM AGGREGATE $
....... ............
OTHER THAN UMBRELLA FORM S
WORKERS COMPENSATION AND
EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY
THE PROPRIETORl INCL
PARTNERs/EXECUTIVE ..
OFFICERS ARE: EXCL EL DISEASE. EA EMPLOYEE
OTHER
BUILDERS RISK $1,800,000. STRUCTURE UNOER
A PP0692328 03/24/1998 03/24/2001; CONSTRUCTION, $1,000. OED,
SPECIAL COVERAGE
DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS/LOCATIONSNEHICLES/SPECIAL ITEMS
Praject: $397,500. May Park Improvements
AUGUSTA RICHMOND CO COMMISSION
PURCHASING DEPT, ROOM 605
MUNICIPAL BLDG
530 GREENE ST
AUGUSTA, GA 30911
SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE
EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING COMPANY WILL ENDEAVOR TO MAIL
-1.0..- DAYS WRITTEN NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE LEFT,
BUT FAILURE TO MAIL SUCH NOTICE SHALL IMPOSE NO OBLIGATION OR LIABILITY
OF ANY I<IND UPON THE COMPANY,ITS AGENTS OR REPRESENTATIVES.
AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE
...... AcORD@ .....:.....~.I.~.!.~~..~!..aJ..f.I.~.I9~..'.........,...............,.......:........:ii:.... ...::...:.............................., ................................ ,..... :.:.:.:.:.:.:......:...........: ~~72i;'~~;7~"
'Tiiisei'iNDERISAfEMPoRARy'iNsURANcE'coNTRAcT','sUB'JEcTTo'THE'COND'TIONS'SHOWNoN.ft.ie'R'e'iiERsEsloEfoi= 'THis'FORM:'
.PRObuceif....PHONE'.... ..... .coMpANy........................................... . BINDER# ..............
(A.JC,..No, Ext): (:.0.6.)650-6000
FAX (706)650-6001
Cincinnati Insurance Company
.............. ..... ......EFFECTIVE.......
Blanchard & Calhoun Ins Agency, Inc.
POBox 212359
Augusta. GA 30917-2359
DATE
TIME
.B981001193
.........EXPIRATlON
DATE
10/28/1998
12:01
x
AM
PM
CODE: 10 0 8 7
~3~g~~~loO 00012'37"
INSURED
SUB CODE:
THIS BINDER IS ISSUED TO EXTEND COVERAGE IN THE ABOVE NAMED COMPANY
PER EXPIRING POLICY #:
DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONSNEHICLES/PROPERTY (Including Location)
AUGUSTA RICHMOND CO COMMISSION
530 GREENE ST
AUGUSTA GA 30911
BASIC
CAUSES OF LOSS
BROAD .
SPEC
GENERAL LIABILITY
UMBRELLA FORM
OTHER THAN UMBRELLA FORM
. RETRO DATE FOR CLAIMS MADE:
GENERAL AGGREGATE S 2,000.000
PRODUCTS - COMP/OP AGG S
PERSONAL & ADV INJURY S
EACH OCCURRENCE S 1 000 000
FIRE DAMAGE (Anyone fire) S
MED EXP (Anyone person) S
COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT S
BODILY INJURY (Per person) S
BODILY INJURY (Per accident) S
PROPERTY DAMAGE S
MEDICAL PAYMENTS S
PERSONAL INJURY PROT S
UNINSURED MOTORIST S
S
ACTUAL CASH VALUE
STATED AMOUNT S
OTHER
AUTO ONLY - EA ACCIDENT S
OTHER THAN AUTO ONL Y:
EACH ACCIDENT S
AGGREGATE S
. EACH OCCURRENCE S
................ ..,.....
AGGREGATE S
STATUTORY LIMITS
ACCIDENT S
..... ....................,...
DISEASE. POLICY LIMIT S
DISEASE. EACH EMPLOYEE S
COMMERCIAL GENERA.L LIABILITY
CLAIMS MADE
.. .
OCCUR :
X OWNER'S & CONTRACTOR'S PROT
.................
: RETRO DATE FOR CLAIMS MADE:
AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY
ANY AUTO
ALL OWNED AUTOS
SCHEDULED AUTOS
HIRED AUTOS
NON.OWNED AUTOS
AUTO PHYSICAL DAMAGE DEDUCTIBLE
COLLISION:
OTHER THAN COL:
GARAGE LIABILITY
. ALL VEHICLES
SCHEDULED VEHICLES
ANY AUTO
EXCESS LIABILITY
WORKER'S COMPENSATION
AND
EMPLOYER'S LIABILITY
SPECIAL OCP FOR $397,500. PROJECT FOR MAY PARK IMPROVEMENTS
CONDITIONS/
OTHER
COVERAGES
. MORTGAGEE
LOSS PAYEE
LOAN'#
ADDITIONAL INSURED
AUTHORIZED REPRESE~TATIVE
'\ , .~: "....1...,.
: ',.--,f ..... ;-::.~.~____.
I ......., M 0 r r isM 0 5 5 . .;,
.~ 't
JV\. ~
l ~-----..
.18PBR{~.:;~:qW3n
.....................
......,....... ..
..............,...
......,...... ...
...............,.
.................
.:rNPT~~}~~95~~NI~.I1TfINP~~~r\9~2NJ~~V.ERSE?'9g(:; ...
)).~At;PR[:n~QR~Q~TIQN:1!}~:r
ACORD' mIRllelm~mB':~18 el~1311lli111! IN~IIFmrY'ml:"":."..' .:: ....::..,..:;
TlI .:.: :':-:'>:':-:':-:':':'::';':';';",'." ,...,. ............. ,", .
"OATE(MMlODNYj' .
10/29/1998
.....:.:.:.;.:.:.; .............
"PRO-Ci'UC"ER'" ( 7 0 6) (j'5'O'~'60 0 0 ..........................FAX. (706) 6 50- 6001
lanchard & Calhoun Ins Agency, Inc.
POBox 212359
Augusta. GA 30917-2359
ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE
HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND. EXTEND OR
ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW.
COMPANIES AFFORDING COVERAGE
Attn: Ext:
COMPANY
A
.... .................
Cincinnati Insurance Company
iNsuRED'
Allen-Batchelor Construction Co Inc
4186 CROSSTOWNE CT
EVANS. GA 30809
COMPANY
B
,..,., ........ ......."."",..
Home Builders Assoc. of. GA
COMPANY
C
COMPANY
D
:i99Yf2.Mi9f. . ......... ........... .... .":::::::::::;:: :.:.:::.::::::;:::::<:;::...::::........:.:.:;} '.......::..... .... .":.. /;.::.'::':: ......
........i'His..IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD
INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS
CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS.
EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS,
CO
LTR
TYPE OF INSURANCE
POLICY NUMBER
POLICY EFFECTIVE '. POLICY EXPIRATION
DATE (MMlDDIYY) DATE (MMlDDIYY)
LIMITS
GENERAL LIABILITY
X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY
CLAIMS MADE X OCCUR
OWNER'S & CONTRACTOR'S PROT
: GENERAL AGGREGATE
A
PP0692328
03/24/1998
. PERSONAL & ADV INJURY
03/24/2001 ...................."."
. EACH OCCURRENCE
s
: PRODUCTS - COMP/OP AGG S
S
S
: FIRE DAMAGE (Anyone fire) S
S
.......2..!.q.q.o.,! 000
..........,~,!.,o.~.~,....o.o.O.
. ~..OOO...Oo.O.
.~.O.O.!..O.OO..
5.000
: MED EXP (Anyone peffion)
AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY
ANY AUTO
ALL OWNED AUTOS
SCHEDULED AUTOS
X HIRED AUTOS
X NON-OWNED AUTOS
: .COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT
S
... ...~.!.o.o.O.~.Oo..~.
, BODILY INJURY
: (Per person)
s
A
P0692328
03/24/1998 03/24/2001
. BODILY INJURY
: (Per Betidenl)
s
PROPERTY DAMAGE S
GARAGE LIABILITY
ANY AUTO
EXCESS LIABILITY
A X UMBRELLA FORM
OTHER THAN UMBRELLA FORM
WORKERS COMPENSATION AND
. EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY
CCC4440035
AUTO ONLY. EA ACCIDENT S
OTHER THAN AUTO ONLY:
EACH ACCIDENT, S
AGGREGATE' S
:. E;/\~~, ?~C.U.~~~~,C.~. ......."" ...s,..,. .....~.!..o..o. ~..'.. ~.o.o..
03/24/1998 03/24/2001: AGGREGATE S ......J...OOP..qoo
s
B
THE PROPRIETOR!
PARTNERs/EXECUTIVE
OFFICERS ARE: X
OTHER
PROPERTY OF OTHERS
INCL
EXCL
3405441
07/01/1998
07/01/1999
EL DISEASE. POLICY LIMIT S
EL DISEASE. EA EMPLOYEE S
100.000
$50,OOO.LEASED. RENTED OR
A
PP0692328
03/24/1998 03/24/2001
BORROWED. $500. DED
DESCRIPTION OF OPERA TIONSllOCA TIONSNEHICLES/SPECIAL ITEMS
ROJECT: MAY PARK IMPROVEMENTS
AUGUSTA RICHMOND CO COMMISSION
PURCHASING DEPT. ROOM 605
MUNICIPAL BLDG
530 GREENE ST
AUGUSTA, GA 30911
SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE
EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF. THE ISSUING COMPANY WILL ENDEAVOR TO MAIL
-1..0..- DAYS WRITTEN NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE LEFT.
BUT FAILURE TO MAIL SUCH NOTICE SHALL IMPOSE NO OBLIGATION OR LIABILITY
7: _ ~
Band Na. PPF 4S307f)-f)
PERFORMANCE BOND
Conforms with The American Institute of Architects
A.I.A. document No. A-31 1
KNOW ALL BY THESE PRESENTS: that ALLEN SA TCHELOR CONSTRUCTION, INC.,
4186 Crosstowne Court, Evans, Georgia 30809 (Here insert full name and address or legal title of Contractorl
as Principal. hereinafter called Contractor. and. COMMERCIAL CASUALTY INSURANCE COMPANY OF GEORGIA,
160 Technoloov Parkwav. Norcross. Georoia 30092 (Here insert full name and address or legal title of Surety)
as Surety. hereinafter called Surety. arc held and firmly bonnd nnto AUGUSTA-RICHMOND COUNTY COMMISSION,
530 Greene Street, Augusta, Georgia 30911
(Here insert full name and address or legal title of Owner)
as Obligee. hereinafter called Owncr. in the amount of Three Hundred Ninety Seven Thousand Five Hundred and 00/1 00 - - -
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Dollars ($ 397,500.00 ).
for the payment whereof Contractor and Surety bind themselves, their heirs. executors. administrators, successors and assigns, jointly
and severally, firmly by these presents,
WHEREAS.
Contractor has by written agreemcnt datcd
'Lt.-~
"2.1
. \c.f't.B ' entered into a contract
with Owner for FLEMING TENNIS CENTER IMpROVEMENTS & MAY PARI< IMPROVEMENTS
(Here insert full name. address and description of project)
in accordance with Drawings and Specifications prepared by.
\'2.9y ~ 4~.' b..!y,\lS.Tf-\..1 ~p. ~I
~/ ~?tb~ ~ ~c:..\lSf~, ~ <.:.
(Here insert full name and address or legal title of Architect)
which contract is by rcference 1I1ade a part hereoL and is hereinafter referred 10 as the Contract.
S-l 219/GEEF 10/96
Page 1 of 2
~
.,
PERFORMANCE BOND
PPF 453070-0
NOW. THEREFORE. THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION is such that. if Contractor shall promptly and faithfully pcrform said
Contract. thcn this obligation shall bc null and void: othcrwisc it shall rcmain in full forcc and cfTcct.
Thc Surcty hereby waives notice of any. altcralion or
extcnsion of timc made by the Owner.
Whcncvcr Coni ractor shall bc. and dcclared by Owncr to be
in dcfault undcr thc Contract. thc Owncr having performed
Owncr's obligations thereundcr. thc Surety may promptly remedy
thc dcfault. or shall promptly
I) Complete the Contract in accordance with its terms and
conditions. or
2) Obtain a bid or bids for completing the Contract in accordance
with its terms and conditions. and upon detcnninalion by Surcty
of the lowest responsiblc bidder. or. if the Owner elects. upon
dctermination by thc Owncr and thc Surely jointl~"of thc lo\\'est
responsible bidder. arrangc for a contract bClween such bidder
and O\\'ner. and m:lke aV;lilablc as Work progresscs (cven though
thcrc should bc a default or a succession of defanlls under the
Signcd and scaled this
-i~0
da\' of
Nt::N'~~~
Q t"
/t-/~,. 'I (1",
') - ,
../' . J
;'
I
'.-
fJ..'- j ".
( >_t(,~i
(W i t ncss)
1---
(?\\J~'.'~ \
'1, _' t....,'t ~l ,,-) \j'Yl ~ }
Debbie Jones
(Wi tness)
~ .c:- -:> '1 '
L 111lb~:=,id!,^-d:t2,---
(UJNIERS i2D: Christopher B. hbrtham, State of Georgia
Licensed Resident Agent
S.l 21 9/GEEF 10/96
Page 2 of 2
contract or contracts of complction arranged undcr this paragraph)
sufficient funds to pay t he cost of completion Icss the balance of the
contract pricc: but uot excccding, including other costs and
damages for which the Surcty may be liablc hereundcr. the amounl
set forth in thc first piHagraph hereof. The term "balance of the
contract price." as uscd in this paragraph. shall mean the total
amount payable by Owner to Contractor under the Contract and
any amendments thereto, less' the amount properly paid by Owner
to Contractor.
Any suit undcr this bond must bc instituted before the
expiration of two (2) years from thc date on which final payment
under the Contract falls duc.
No right of action shall accnre on this bond to or for the use
of any person or corporation other than the Owner named herein or
the heirs. executors. administrators or successors of the Owner.
~CI.
. J ~ V<.,J .
ALLEN BATC CONSTRUCTION, INC.,
towne Court, Evans, Georgia
{
(Tille)
(Seal)
(Principal)
Co\.. ERCJL CASUAL TV INSURANCE
C~~F GEORGIA,
{ 160 Technology Parkway, Norcross, Georgia
~~~0:6n-Fact
(Seal)
(Surety)
(Ti!Jc;
..,
!Air:;i\~it"';':l
.:.~~...: .~J dt'_:
,?.,..,
,-(
;.~M!"'iit'~G
'!AR 1'.11 NG
~'4C~
\tl
'l'. ..... ~
lABOR AND MATERIAL PAYMENT BOND
Band Na. PPF 453070-0
Conforms with The American Institute of Architects
A.I.A. Document No. A-311
THIS BOND IS ISSUED SIMULTANEOUSLY WITH PERFORMANCE BOND IN FAVOR OF THE
OWNER CONDITIQNED ON THE FULL AND FAITHFUL PERFORMANCE .oF THE CONTRACT
KNOW ALL BY THESE PRESENTS: that ALLEN BATCHELOR CONSTRUCTION, INC.,
4186 Crosstowne Court, Evans, Georgia 30809 (Here insert full name and address or legal title of Contractor)
as Principal, hcreinafter callcd Principal, and. COMMERCIAL CASUALTY INSURANCE COMPANY OF GEORGIA,
160 Technoloay Parkway, Norcross. Georqia 30092 (Here insert full name and address or legal title of Surety)
as Snrety, hereinafter called Surcty. arc held and firmly bound unto AUGUSTA-RICHMOND COUNTY COMMISSION,
530 Greene Street, Augusta, Georgia 30911 (Here insert full name and address or legal title of Owner)
as Obligee, hereinafter called Owner. for the use and benefit of claimants as hereinbelow defined, in the amount of Three Hundred
Ninety Seven Thousand Five Hundred and 00/100 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Dollars($ 397,500.00).
for the payment whereof Principal and Surety bind themselves. their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly
and severally, firmly by these presents.
WHEREAS.
Principal has by written agrecmcnt dated . CL\(..~ '2:T
, ~ ' entered into a contract
with Owner for FLEMING TENNIS CENTER IMPROVEMENTS & MAY PARI< IMPROVEMENTS
(Here insert full name, address and description of project)
in accordance with Drawings and Spccifications prepared by ~o~l-l..J ~~ .~ ~c...\~ ~.i- '
\,2.~"" ~f:.(} c:::.""~ A\lCf\JsrA "1^ 3t"'t 0 '\ (Here insert full name and address or legal title of Architect)
I \
which contract is by reference made a part hereof. and is hereinafter referred to as the Contract.
S.' 220/GEEF 2/97
. Page 1 of 2
"
LABOR AND MATERIAL PAYMENT BOND
PPF 453070-0
NOW, THEREFORE, HIE CONDITION OF TI.llS OBLIGATION is such that, if Principal shall promptly make pa}1nent to all claimants as hereinaller
dclined, for all labor and material used or reasonably relJuired for use in the pertonnance of the Contract, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise it
shall remain in tilll force and el1i.:ct, subject. however, to the tollowing conditions:
\. A claimant is detined as one having a direct wntract with the
Principal or with a Subcontractor of the Principal tor labor, material, or
both, used or reasonably required for use in the perfonnancc of the
Contract, labor and material being construed to include that part of water,
gas, power, light, heat, oil, gasoline, telephone service or n:ntal of
equipment directly applicable to the Contrac!.
2. TIle above named Principal and Surety hereby jointly and
severally agree with the 0\\11er that every claimant as herein detined,
who has not been paid in full betore thc cxpiration of a period of ninety
(90) days alter the date on which the last of such claimant's work or labor
was done or perfonned, or materials were fumished by such claimant,
may sue on this bond for the use of such claimant, prosccute the suit to
tinal judgment tor such sum or sums as may be justly'due claimant, and
have exccution thereon. '1l1e (h\11er shall not bc liable tar thc paymcnt of
any costs or expenses orany such suit.
3. No suit or action shall be commenced hereunder by any claimant:
a) Unless claimant, other than one having a direct contract with the
Principal, shall have given \ITitten notice to any two of the following: the
Principal, the Ch\11er, or the Suret\' aboyc namcd, within nim:ty (<)()) days
alter such claimant did or pertanned the last of the work or labor, or
fumished the last of the materials lar which said daim is made, stating
with substantial accuracy the amount claimed and the name of the party
to whom the materials
Signcd and scalcd this
.~o
day of
~~~
&L~
1
\
\
(Witncss)
g" 11J--~\~~)
Debbie Jones (Witncss)
~d, '.+:,'P.::<;~
(~ Christopher B, Irbrtham, State of Georgia
Licensed Resident Agent
S-1220IGEEF 2197
Page 2 of 2
were fumished, or tor whom the work or labor was done or perfonned.
Such notice shall be served by mailing the same by registered mail or
certitied mail, postage prepaid, in an envelope addressed to the Principal,
OI\11er or Surety, at any place where an ol1ice is regularly maintained tor
the transaction of business, or served in any malUler in which legal process
may be served in the state in which the aforesaid project is located. save
that such service need not be made by a public ot1icer.
h) Aller the expiration of one (I) year tollowing the date on which
Principal ceased Work on said Contract, it being understood, however, tlwt
if any limitation embodied in this bond is prohibited by allY law
controlling the construction hereof such limitation shall be deemed to be
amended so as to be equal to the minimum period of limitation pennitted
bv sllch law.
c) Other than m a state court of competent jurisdiction in and for the
cOllnty or other political subdivision of the state in which the Project, or
any part thereat: is situated, or in the United States District Court for the
cJistrict in which the Project, or any part thereof, is situated, al1d not
dsewhere.
4. The amount of this bond shall be reduced by and to the extent of
allY payment or payments made in good tbith hereunder, inclusive of tlle
paymcnt by Surety of mechanics' liens which may be tiled of record against
saicJ improvement, whether or not claim tor the amount of such lien bc
presented under and against this bond.
t?\ ,e>
{
(Title)
(Seal)
(Principal)
MERC L CASUALTY INSURANCE
CO OF GEORGIA,
{ ~eehnOlogy Pa,kway, Noreoss, Georg;a
Bradfo~B~~~e~{!Faet
(Seal)
(Surety)
(Titk:)
1:
- -liS ". ';.'.;":;~.!." j _
. :::::=. " .;.< "':'.;-.:D iF T~"':~ PQVIJEn
.:~:....:=.: ;' '." ~-...lEf'.J ,W!S FO\VE:=: OF
VARNING
= .;;-~.-: .~t-=v
.-.-.::.. :c:....
,'IARNING
.VARNING \1/ARNING
~z(
EJGTG~
~
..~,....
~
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
. NOTICE OF AWARD.
Dated October 22. 1998
TO: Allen Batchelor Construction. Inc.
(Bidder)
-,
ADDRESS: 4186 Crosstowne Court
Evans. GA 30809
PROJECT May Park
ENGINEER'S PROJECT NO
42.706
CONTRACT FOR Construction of proposed improvements of May Park. Augusta-Richmond
County. GA
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
You are notified that your Bid dated September 24. 1998 for the above Contract has been
<;:onsidered. You are the apparent successful bidder and have been awarded a contract for the Base
Bid.
, The Contract Price of your contract is. 'Three Hundred Ninety Seven Thousand Five Hundred
Dollars ($397.500)
Three (3) copies of each of the proposed Contract Documents (including Drawings) accompany this
Notice of Award.
You must comply with the following conditions precedent within fifteen days of the date of this
Notice of Award, that is by November 6.1998
You must deliver to the OWNER t.l1fee fully executed counterparts of the Agreement including
all the Contract Documents. This mcludes the triplicate sets of Drawings. Each of the Contract
Documents must bear your signature on the cover of the specifications and every page of the
Drawings.
K,"'270l11A0MINlSPECS\ 1910.22
2. You must deliver with the executed Agreement the Contract Security (Bonds) as specified in
the Instructions to Bidders (par~graph 16), General Conditions (paragraph 5.1) and
Supplementary Conditions (paragraph SC-4).
General Contractors of America.
3. (List other conditions precedent).
Failure to comply with these conditions within the time specified will entitle OWNER to consider
your bid abandoned, to annul this Notice of Award and to declare your Bid Security forfeited. .
Within ten days after you comply with those conditions, OWNER will return to you one fully
signed counterpart of the Agreement with the Contract Documents attached.
Augusta-Richmond County Commission
B~WN~ 6~~ ~
(AUTH~TURE)
-
Charles 1. Johnson, P.E. - Project Engineer
(TITLE)
Copy to ENGINEER
(Use Certified Mail,
Return Receipt Requested or
Hand Deliver)
K;\42706\ADMINISPECSI 191 0.22
I~
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
NOTICE TO PROCEED
Dated
TO:
(Contractar)
ADDRESS:
PROJECT May Park Improvements
ENGINEER'S PROJECT NO. 42.706
CONTRACT FOR Construction of proposed improvements to May Park
Augusta-Richmond County. GA
You are notified that the Contract Time under the above contract will commence to run on DATE.
By that date, you are to start. performing your obligations under the Contract Documents. In
accordance with Article 3 of the Agreement, the dates of Substantial Completion and Final
Completion are 150 Days and 180 Days after this notice to proceed respectively.
Before you may start any Work at the.site, paragraph 2.7 of the General Conditions provides that you
must each deliver to the owner (with copies to ENGINEER) certificates of insurance which each is
required to purchase and maintain in accordance with the Contract Documents.
Augusta-Richmond County Conimission
(OWNER)
By
(AUTHORIZED SIGNATURE)
Charles J. Johnson, P.E. - Project Engineer
(TITLE)
K:142706\AOMINISPECS\ 191 0.23
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,I
I
I
I
I
APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT NO.
To: Augusta-Richmond County Board of Commissioners
Contract far: Construction of Proposed Improvements to May Park
. ENGINEER's Project No: 42.706
(OWNER)
For Work accomplished thraugh the date .of
ITEM ,CONTRACTOR's Schedule of Values Wark Cainpleted
Unit Price Quantity Amaunt Quantity Amaunt
$ $ $
Tatal $ $
(Orig. Cantract)
C. O. No. 1
C. O. Na. 2
Accampanying Dacumentation:
GROSS AMOUNT DUE ............. $
LESS % RETAlNAGE ............. $
AMOUNT DUE TO DATE ........... $
LESS PREVIOUS PAYMENTS ....... $
AMOUNT DUE THIS APPLICATION ., $
CONTRACTOR'S Certificatian:
The undersigned CONTRACTOR certifies that (I) all previaus progress payments received fram OWNER an account
of Work done under the Contract referred to above have been applied to discharge in full all obligations of
CONTRACTOR incurred in connection with Work covered by prior Applications far Payment numbered I through
inclusive; and (2) title to all materials and equipment incorparated in said Wark or otherwise listed in or
cavered by this Applicatian for Payment will pass ta OWNER at time of payment free and clear .of all liens, claims,
security interests ~d encumbrances (except such as.cavered by Bond acceptable to OWNER). .
Dated
.'
Contractor
By
Payment of the above AMOUNT DUE THIS APPLICATION is recommended.
Dated
JOHNSON,LASCHOBER & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
Engineer
By
EJCOC NO. 1910.8-E
APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT
INSTRUCTIONS
A. GENERAL INFORMATION
This standard farm is intended as a guide .only. Many projects require' a much more extensive form with space far
numerous items, descriptians .of Change Orders, identificatian of variable quantity adjustments, summary .of materials
and equipment stored at the site and other infarmation. It is expected that a separate form will be developed by Engineer
or Contractor at the time Cantractor's Schedule .of Values is fmalized. Nate alsa that the farmat far retain age must be
changed if the Agreement permits (.or the Law provides), and Cantractor elects, the deposit .of securities in lieu .of retain
age. Refer to Article 14 of the General Conditians for pravisions cancerning payments ta Contractor.
B. COMPLETING THE FORM
The Schedule .of Values, submitted and approved as pravided in paragraphs 2.6.3 and 2.9 .of the General Conditions,
should be copied in the space indicated an the Applicatian For Payment form. Nate that the cost .of materials and
equipment is often listed separately from the cast of their installatian. All Change Orders affecting the Cantract Price
should be identified and include such supplemental Schedules .of Values as required far progress payments.
The farm is suitable far use in the Final Application far Payment as well as for Pragress Payments; hawever, the
required accompanying dacumentation is usually more extensive far final payment. All accampanying documentatian
should be identified in the space pravided an the form.
C . ENGINEER'S REVIEW
Engineer must review all Applications for Payment with care to avoid recommending any payments not yet earned by
Contractor. All accompanying documentation oflegal nature, such as lien waivers, should be reviewed by an attorney,
and Engineer shauld sa advise Owner.
EJCOC NO. 1910.B-E
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
CHANGE ORDER
No.
PROJECT: May Park Improvements DATE OF ISSUANCE:
OWNER: Augusta-Richmond County Board of Commissioners
CONTRACTOR:
ENGINEER: Johnson, Laschober & Assoc., P.C.
CONTRACT FOR: May Park Improvements
ENGINEER's Project No. 42.706
You are directed to make the fallawing changes in the Contract Documents.
Description:
Purpase .of Change Order:
Attachments: (List documents supparting change)
CHANGE IN CONTRACT PRICE:
Original Contract Price
$
CHANGE IN CONTRACT TIME:
Original Cantract Time
Previaus Change Orders Na
$
toNa
Net change from previous Change Orders
CantractPrice priar to this Change Order
:)
Cantract Time Prior ta this Change Order
Net Increase (decrease) of this Change Order
.
:)
Net Increase (decrease) .of this Change Order
Contract ~rice with all approved Change Orders
$
Contract Time with all appraved Change Orders
RECOMMENDED:
APPROVED:
by'
APPROVED:
by
by
Engineer
Owner
Cantractor
K:\42706\ADM INISPECS\ 191 0.8B
CHANGE ORDER
INSTRUCTIONS
A. GENERAL INFORMATION
This document was develaped ta provide a unifann fannat far handling cantract changes that affect Cantract Price or
Contract Time. Changes that have been initiated by a Work Directive Change must be incarporated into a subsequent
Change Order if they affect Price or Time.
Changes that affect Cantract Price .or Contract Time shauld be promptly cavered by a Change Order. The practice .of
accumulating change order items to reduce the administrative burden may lead to unnecessary disputes.
Far supplemental instructians and minar changes not invalving a change in the Cantract Price .or Cantract Time. a Field
Order may be used.
B.COMPLETINGTHECHANGEORDERFORM
Engineer initiates the form, including a descriptian of the changes involved and attachments based upon documents and
propasals submitted by Contractar, .or requestsfram Owner, .or both.
Once Engineer has campleted and signed the farm, all capies shauld be sent ta Cantractar far approval. After appraval
by Contractor, all capies should be sent to Owner for approval. Engineer should make distribution .of executed copies
after approval by Owner.
If a change only applies to price .or ta time, crass aut the part of the tabulation that daes not apply.
K:142706\ADMIN\SPECS\ 191 0.8B
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I'
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
CERTIFICATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
ENGINEER's Project Na: 42.706
Project: May Park Improvements
CONTRACTOR
Contract Date
Contract For
Construction of May Park Improvements
Augusta-Richmond County. GA
.This Certificate of Substantial Completion applies to all Work under the Contract Documents or to
the following specified parts thereof: .
Storm Drainage, Tennis Court Construction, Tennis Court Resurfacing, Paving, Field Lighting & Grading, Play
Equipment Installation, Concession Stand Installation, Pavilion Installation, Bleacher Installation, Table and
Bench Installation, Community Center Door Installation, and Erosion Control Practices.
To: Augusta-Richmond County Commission
(OWNER)
And To:
(CONTRACTOR)
The Work to which this Certificate applies has been inspected by authorized representatives of
OWNER, CONTRACTOR and ENGINEER, and that Work is hereby declared to be substantially
complete in accordance with the ContracfDocuments .
180 Days After Notice To Proceed
Date of Substantial Completion
A tentative list of items to be completed or corrected is attached hereto. This list may not be
all-inclusive, and the failure to include ~ item in it does not alter the responsibility of
CONTRACTOR to complete all the W orkin accordance with the Contract Documents. The items
in the tentative list shall be completed or corrected by CONTRACTOR 'by
K:\42706\AOMIN\SPECS\ 1910,8-0
The responsibilities between OWNER and CONTRACTOR for security, operation, safety,
maintenance, heat, utilities, insurance and warranties shall be as follows:
RESPONSffiILITIES:
OWNER:
CONTRACTOR:
The following documents are attached to and made a part of this Certificate: None
This certificate does not constitute an acceptance of Work not in accordance with the Contract
Documents nor is it a release of CONTRACTOR's obligation to compl~te the Work in accordance
with the Contract Documents.
Executed by ENGINEER on
JOHNSON, LASCHOBER & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
By
ENGINEER
CONTRACTOR accepts this Certificate of Substantial Completion on
CONTRACTOR
By
OWNER accepts this Certificate of Substantial Completion on .
OWNER
K:\42706\ADMINISPECS\ 191 O.8-D
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 01010 - SUMMARY OF WORK
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary .
Conditions and other Division I, Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS,
A. The Project consists of:
Construction of May Park Improvements.
1. Project Location: Augusta-Richmond County, Georgia.
2.
Owner:
Augusta-Richmond County Board of Commissioners
Recreation and Parks Department
P.O.Box 5596
Augusta, Ga. 30916-5596
B. Contract Documents, dated March 3, 1998 were prepared for the Project by:
Johnson, Laschober & Associates, P.C.
1296 Broad Street
Augusta~ Ga. 30901
C. The Work consists 6f:
M~Park: ,
Demolition, resurfacing one (1) existing court, court lighting, court fencing,
paving, field lighting and grading, bleacher installation, backstop installation,
pavilion installation, concession stand installation, play equipment installation,
sidewalk improvements, .table and bench installation, scoring tower installation
and erosion' control installation and maintenance.
D. The Work will be constructed under a single prime contract.
. 1.3 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES
A. General: During the construction period the Contractor shall have full use of the premises
for construction operations, including use of the site. The Contractor's use ofthe premises
SUMMARY OF WORK
01010 - I
is limited only by the Owner's right to perform work or to retain other contractors on
portions of the Project.
B. Use of the Site: Limit use of the premises to work in areas indicated. Confine operations
to areas within contract limits indicated. Do not disturb portions of the site beyond the
areas in which the Work is indicated.
1. Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways and entrances serving the premises
clear and available to the Owner, the Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles
at all times. Do n~t use these areas for parking or storage of materials. Schedule
deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and
equipment on-site.
1.4 OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS
A. Partial Owner Occupancy: The Owner reserves the right to occupy and to place and
install equipment in completed areas prior to Substantial Completion; provided such
occupancy does not interfere with completion of the Work. Such ,placing of equipment
and partial occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work. Contractor shall
maintain all insurance coverage for the entire site until such time the Substantial
Completion is issued for ALL the work on the entire site. Partial' occupancy does not
relieve the Contractor of this obligation to maintain insurance for the entire project site.
1. The Engineer will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion for each specific
portion of the Work to be occupied prior to Owner occupancy.
2. Prior to partial Owner occupancy, electrical systems shall be fully operational.
Required inspections and tests shall have been successfully completed. Upon
occupancy, the Owner will operate and maintain electrical systems.
3. Upon occupancy, the Owner will assume responsibility for maintenance and
custodial service for occupied portions of the site.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION 01010
SUMMARY OF WORK
01010 - 2
I
I
I
I
I
'1
I
I
I
I
I
.1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 01027 - APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
~~
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings arid general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this ,Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This. Section specifies administrative and' procedural requirements governIng the
Contractor's Applications for Payment.
, '
B. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements governing contractor's
Applications for Payment.
1. Coordinate the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment with the
Contractor's Construction Schedule, Submittal Schedule, and List of Subcontracts.
1.3 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of the
Contractor's Construction Schedule.
1. Submit the Schedule of Values to the Architect at the earliest possible date but no
later than 7 days before the date scheduled for'submittal of the initial Applications
for Payment.
B. Format and Content: Use the'Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish the
.fonnat for the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification
. Section.
1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of
Values:
a. Project name an~' location. .
b. Name of the Engineer.
c. Project number.- ,
d. Contractor's name and address.
. e. Date of submittal.
APPLICA nONS FOR PAYMENT
01027 - 1
2. Arrange the Schedule'ofValues in tabular form with separate columns to indicate
the following for each item listed:
a. Related Specification Section or Division.
b. Description of Work.
c. Name of subcontractor.
d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator.
e. Name of supplier.
f. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value.
g. Dollar value.
1) Percentage of Contract Sum to nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted
to total 100 percent.
3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in sufficient detail to facilitate continued
evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the
Project Manual table of contents. Break principal subcontract amounts down into
several line items.
4. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; the total shall equal the Contract Sum. '
5. Provide a separate li~e item in the Schedule of Values for each part of the Work
where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment, purchased or
fabricated and stored, but not yet installed.
a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. Include
requirements for insurance and bonded warehousing, if required.
6. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values prior to the next
Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives
result in a change in the Contract Sum.
1.4 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and
payments as certified by the Engineer and paid for by the Owner.
1. The initial Application for Payment, the Application for Payment at time of
Substantial Completion, and the final Application for Payment involve additional
requirements.
B. Payment-Application Times: The date for each progress payment is the 15th day of each
month. The period covered by each Application for Payment starts on the day following
the end of the preceding period and ends 15 days prior to the date for each progress
payment.
C. Payment-Application Forms: Use forms provided by the Owner for Applications for
Payment. Sample copies are included at the end of this Section.
APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
01027 - 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on the form. Include notarization and
execution by a person authorized to:sign legal documents on behalf of the Contractor.
The Engineer will return hic~mplete applications witb.6ut action. .
1. Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and the Contractor's
Construction Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made.
2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued
prior to the last day of the construction period covered by the application.
E. Transmittal: Submit 3 signed and notarized original copies of each .Application for
Payment to the, Engineer by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall
be complete, including waivers of lien and similar attachme:p.ts; when required.
1.. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording
appropriate information related to the application, in a manner acceptable to the
Engineer.
F. Waivers of Mechanics Lien: With each Application for .Payment, submit waivers of
mechanics liens from subcontractors, sub-subcontractors and suppliers for the
construction period covered by. the previous application.
1. Submit partial waivers on each item for the amount requested, prior to deduction_
for retainage, on each item.
2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit final or full waivers.
3. The Owner reserves the right to designate which entities i?volved in the Work must
submit waivers. '
4. Waiver Delays: Submit each Application for Payment with the Contractor's waiver
of mechanics lien for the period of construction covered by the application.
a. Submit final Applications for Payment with or preceded by final waivers
from every entity involved with performance of the Work covered by the
application who is -lawfully entitled to a lien.
5. Waiver Forms: Submit waivers of lien on forms, and executed in a manner,
acceptable to the Owner. '
G. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals, that must precede
or coincide with submittal of the first Application for Payment, include the following:
1. List of subcontractors.
2. List of principal suppliers and fabricators.
3. Schedule of Values..
4. Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not-final).
5. Schedule of principal products.
6. Schedule of unit prices. -
7. Submittal Schedule (preliminary if not final).
8. List of Contractor's staff assignments.
9. List of Contractor's principal consultants.
APPLICA nONS FOR PAYMENT
01027 - 3
10. Copies of building permits. ,
11. Copies of authorizatioris and licenses from governing authorities for performance
of the Work.
12. Initial progress report.
13. Report of preconstruct ion meeting.
14. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies.
15. Performance and payment bonds.
16. Data needed to acquire the Owner's insurance.
17. Initial settlement survey and damage report, if required.
H. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: Following issuance of the Certificate
of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment.
1. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued
previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.
2. Administrative actions and submittals that shall precede or coincide with this
application include:
a. Occupancy permits and similar approvals.
b. Warranties.(guarantees) and maintenance agreements.
c. Test/adjust/balance records.
d. Maintenance instructions.
e. Meter readings.
f. Startup performance reports.
g. Changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and
maintenance.
h. Final cleaning.
1. . Application for reduction of retain age and consent of surety.
J. Advice on shifting insurance coverages.
k. Final progress photographs.
1. List of incomplete Work, recognized as exceptions to Engineer's Certificate
of Substantial Completion.
1. Final Payment Application: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or
coincide with submittal of the final Application for Payment include the following:
1. Completion of Project closeout requirements.
2. Completion of items specified for completion after Substantial Completion.
3. Ensure that unsettled claims will be settled.
4. Ensure that incomplete Work is not accepted and will be completed without undue
delay.
5. Transmittal of required Project construction records to the Owner.
6. Certified property survey.
APPLICA nONS FOR PAYMENT
01027 - 4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
7. Proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid.
8. Removal of temporary facilities and services: i ~,'
9. Removal of surplus materials, rubbish, and similar elements.
10. Change of door locks to Owner's access.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION 01027
)1
APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
01027 - 5
.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 01030 - ALTERNATES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing Alternates.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Definition: An alternate is an amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form
for certain work defined in the Bidding Requirements that may be added to or deducted
from the Base Bid amount if the Owner decides to accept a corresponding change in
either the amount of construction to be completed, or in the products, materials,.
equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract-Documents.
1. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the
. .
Contract Sum to incorporate the Alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are
made to the Contract Sum.
1.3 PROCEDURES
A. Coordination: Modify or_adjust affected adjacent Work as necessary to completely and
fully integrate that Work into the Project.
1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and
similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not
mentioned as part of the Alternate.
B. Notification: Immediately following the award of the Contract, notify each party
involved, in writing, of the status of each alternate. Indicate whether alternates have been
accepted, rejected, or deferred for later consideration, Include a complete description of
negotiated modifications to alternates.
C. Execute accepte~ alternates under the same conditions as other Work of this Contract.
D. Schedule: A "Schedule of Alt~rnates" is included at the end of this Section. Specification
Sections referenced in the Schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to
achieve the Work described. under each alternate.
ALTERNATES
01030 - I
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES
A. Alternate No.1: Base Bid is 4" concrete sidewalk construction. Add Alternate is to
install concrete pavers as detailed on the drawings. .
B. Alternate No.2: Add sidewalk from pavilion to the community center as detailed on the
drawings.
C. Alternate No.3: Base Bid is to resurface existing Tennis Court 4 and install new fence,
nets, and wind screen around tennis court 3 & 4. Connect sidewalk north of tennis court
3 & 4 to sidewalk at Third Street. Add Alternate is to demo tennis court 4 and add parking
lot, sidewalk, revise fence around tennis court 3 and add 2 tennis court gates as detailed.
on the drawings. .
D. Alternate No.4: Add resurfacing of existing tennis courts 6,7,8,9 &10 as detailed on the
drawings.
E. Alternate No.5: Add wind screen to existing fence around tennis courts 6,7,8,9 & 10 as
detailed on the drawings.
END OF SECTION 01030
ALTERNATES
01030 - 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
'1
I
I
I
SECTION 01200 - PROJECT MEETINGS
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A.. . This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for project meetings,
including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Preconstruction conferences.
2. Preinstallation conferences.
3. . Progress meetings.
4. - Coordination meetings.
1.3 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE
A. . Schedule a preconstruction conference before starting-construction, at a time convenient
to the Owner and the Architect, but no later than .15 days after execution of the
Agreement. Hold. the conference at the Project Site or another convenient location..
Conduct the meeting to review responsibilities and personnel assignments.
B. Attendees: Authorized representatives of the Owner, Engineer, and their consultants; the
Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; manufacturers; suppliers; and
other concerned parties shall attend the conference. All participants at the conference
shall be familiar with the Project and authorized to conchidematters relating to the Work.
- '
C. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, iricluding the following:
1. T entati ve construction schedule.
2. Critical work sequencing.
3. Designation of responsible personnel.
4. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders.
5. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment.
6. Distribution of Contract Documents.
7. Submittal of Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Sample~.
8. Preparation of record documents.
9. Use of the premises. .
10. Parking availability:
11. Office, work, and storage areas.
PROJECT MEETINGS
01200 - I
12. Equipment deliveries and priorities.
13. Safety procedures.
14. First aid.
15. Security.
16. Housekeeping.
17 . Working hours.
1.4 PREINSTALLATION CONFERENCES
A. Conduct a preinstallation conference at the Project Site before each construction activity
that requires coordination with other construction.
B. Attendees: The Contractor, Sub-Contractors and Suppliers involved in or affected by the
installation, and its.coordination or integration with other materials and installations that
have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise the Engineer of scheduled
meeting dates.
1. Review the progress of other construction activities and preparations for the
particular activity under consideration at each preinstallation conference, including
requirements for the following:
a. Contract Documents.
b. Options.
c. Related Change Orders.
d. Purchases.
e. Deliveries.
f. Shop Drawings, Product Data, and quality-control samples.
g. Possible conflicts.
h. Compatibility problems.
1. Time schedules.
J . Weather limitations.
k. Manufacturer's recommendations.
1. Warranty requirements.
m. Compatibility of materials.
n. Acceptability of previously installed material.
o. Temporary facilities.
p. Space and access limitations.
q. Governing regulations.
r. Safety.
s. Inspecting and testing requirements.
t. Required performance results.
u. Recording requirements.
v. Protection.
2. Record significant discussions and agreements and disagreements of each
conference, and the. approved schedule. Promptly distribute the record of the
PROJECT MEETINGS
01200 - 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
meeting to everyone concerned, including the Owner and the Engineer.
3. Do not proceed with. the installation if thec~mference cannot be successfully
concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to.
performance of Work and reconvene the conference at the earliest feasible date.
1.5 PROGRESS MEETINGS
A. Conduct progress meetings at the Project Site at regular intervals. Notify the Owner and
the Engineer of scheduled meeting dates. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation
of the payment request.
B. Attendees: In addition to representatives of the Owner and the Engineer, each
subcontractor, supplier, or other"entity concerned with current progress or involved in
planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these
meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with the Project and
authorized to conclude matters relating to the.Work.
C. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of the previous progress meeting.
Review other items of significance that could affect progress.. Include topics for
discussion as appropriate to the' status of the Project. .
1. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting.
Determine where each activity is in relation" to the Contractor's Construction
Schedule, whether on tim~ or ahead or behind schedule. Determine how
construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties
involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to insure that
current and subsequent activities will be completed within "the Contract Time.
2. Review the present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:
a. Interface requirements.
b. Time. .
c. Sequences."
d. Status of submittals.
e. Deliveries.
f. Access.
g. Site utilization.
h. Temporary facilities arid services.
1. Hours of work.
J. Hazards and risks.
k. Housekeeping.
1.. Quality an~ work standards.
m. Change Orders.
n. Documentation of information for payment requests.
D. Reporting: No later than 3 days after each meeting, distribute minutes ofthe meeting to
each party present and to parties who should have been present. Include a brief summary,
PROJECT MEETINGS
01200 - 3
in narrative form, of progress since the previous meeting and report.
1. Schedule Updating: Revise the Contractor's Construction Schedule after each
progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized.
Issue the revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.
1.6 COORDINATION MEETINGS
A. Conduct project coordination meetings at regular intervals convenient for all parties
involved. Project coordination meetings are in addition to specific meetings held for
other purposes, such as regular progress meetings and special preinstallation meetings.
B. Request representation at each meeting by every party currently involved in coordination
or planning for the construction activities involved.
C. Record meeting results and distribute copies to everyone in attendance and to others
affected by decisions or actions resulting from each meeting.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION 01200
PROJECT MEETINGS
01200 - 4
-J
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.
.
I
'1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 01300 - SUBMITTALS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submittals required
for performance ofthe Work, including the following:
1.' Contractor's construction schedule.
2. Submittal schedule. ~
3. Daily construction reports.
4. Shop Drawings.
5. Product Data.
6. Quality assurance submittals.
B. . Administrative Submittals: Refer" to other Division 1 Sections and other Contract
Documents for requirements for administrative submittals. Such submittals include, but
are no.t limited to, the foll<?wing:
1. Permits.
2. Applications for Payment.
3. Performance aI].d payment bonds.
4. Insurance certificates. -
5. List of subcontractors.
1.3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES -
A: Coordination: ' Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance
of construction. activities. ,Transmit each submittal. sufficiently in advance of
performance of related construction activities to avoid delay.
1. Coordinate each subnrilliil with other submittals, and related activities that require
sequential activity. _ : _
2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related elements of the
Work so processing will not be delayed by the- need to review submittals
concurrently for coordi,nation.
a.
The Engineer reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring
SUBMITTALS
01300 - I
coordination with other submittals until all related submittals are received.
3. Processing: To avoid the need to delay installation as a result of the time required
to process submittals, allow sufficient time for submittal review, including time
for resubmittals.
a. Allow 2 weeks for initial review. Allow additional time if the Engineer
must delay processing to permit coordination with subsequent submittals.
b. If an intermediate submittal is necessary, process the same as the initial
submittal.
c. Allow'2 weeks for reprocessing each submittal.
d. No extension of Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to
transmit submittals to the Engineer sufficiently in advance of the Work to
permit processing.
B. Submittal Preparation.: Place a permanent label or title: block on each submittal for ..
identification. Indicate the name of the entity that prepared _each submittal on the label
or title block.
1. Provide a space approximately 4 by 5 inches (100 by 125 mm) on the label or
beside the title block on Shop Drawings to record the Contractor's review and
approval markirigs and the action taken.
2. Include the following information on the label for processing and recording action ..
taken.
a. Project name.
b. Date.
c. Name and address of the Contractor.
d. Name and address of the subcontractor.
e. Name and address of the supplier.
f. Name of the manufacturer.
g. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.
h. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
C. Submittal Transmittal: Package each submittal appropriately for transmittal and
handling. Transmit each submittal from the Contractor to the Engineer using a
transmittal form. The Engineer will not accept submittals received from sources other
than the Contractor.
1.4 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A. Bar-Chart Schedule: Prepare a fully developed, horizontal bar-chart-type, contractor's
construction schedule. Submit within 30 days after the date established for
"Commencement of the Work."
SUBMITTALS
01300 - 2
I
I
.1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
".
B. Cost Correlation: At the head of the schedule, provide a cost correlation line, indicating
planned and actual costs. . On the line, show-dollar volume of Work performed as of the
dates used for preparation of payment requests.
C. Distribution: Following.response to the initial submittal, print,and distribute copies to
the Engineer, Owner, subcontractors, and other parties required to comply with
scheduled dates. Post copies in the Project meeting room and temporary field office.
I. ,When revisions are made, distribute to the same parties and post in the same
locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their
assigned portion of the Wor~ and are no longer involved in construction activities.
D. Schedule Updating: Revise the schedule after each meeting, event, or activity where
revisions have been recognized or made. Issue the updated schedule concurrently with
the report of each meeting. -.
1.5 D~ Y CONSTRUCTION REPORTS
A.. ,Prepare a daily construction report recording the following information concerning
events at the site, and submit-duplicate copies to the Engineer at weekly intervals:
1. List of subcontractors at the site.
.2. Approximate count of personnel at the site.
3. High and low temperatures, general weather conditions.
4. Accidents 'and unusual events.
5. Meetings and significant.decisions.
6. Stoppages, delays, shortages, an~ losses.
7. Meter readings and similar recordings.
8. Emergency procedures;
9. Orders and requests of goveming authorities.
10. Change Orders received, implemented.
11. Services connecteo,discqnnected.
12. Equipment or system tests and startups.
13. Partial Completions, occupancies.
.14. Substantia) Completions authorized.
1.6 SHOP DRAWINGS'
A. Submit newly prepared information drawn accurately to scale. Highlight, encircle, or
othetwise indicate deviations from the Contract Documents. Do not reproduce Contract
Documents or copy standard information as the basis of Shop Drawings. Standard
information prepared without specific reference to the Project is not aShop Drawing.
SUBMITTALS
01300 - 3
1.7 PRODUCT DATA
A. Collect Product Data into a single submittal for each element of construction or system.
Product Data includes printed information, such as manufacturer's installation
instructions, catalog cuts, roughing-in diagrams and templates, standard wiring
diagrams, and performance curves.
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE SUBMITTALS
A. Submit quality-control submittals, including design data, certifications, manufacturer's
instructions, manufacturer's field reports, and other quality-contr91 submittals as required
under other Sections of the Specifications.
B. Certifications: Where other Sections of the Specifications require certification that a
product, material, or installation complies with specified requirements, submit a
notarized certification from the manufacturer certifying compliance with specified
requirements.
1. Signature: Certification shall be signed by an officer of the manufacturer or other
individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of the company.
C. Inspection and Test Reports: Submittal of inspection and test reports from independent
testing agencies.
1.9 ENGINEER'S ACTION
A. Except for submittals for the record or information, where action and return is required,
the Engineer will review each submittal, mark to indicate action taken, and return
promptly.
1. Compliance with specified characteristics is the Contractor's responsibility.
B. Action Stamp: The Engineer will stamp each submittal with a uniform, action stamp.
The Engineer will mark the stamp appropriately to indiqte the action taken,
C. Unsolicited Submittals: The Engineer will return unsolicited submittals to the sender
without action.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION 01300
SUBMITI ALS
01300 - 4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 01400 - QUALITY CONTROL
. PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and' general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. . This Section includes administrative and p'rocedural requirements for quality-control
servIces.
B. Quality-control services include inspections, tests, and related actions, including reports
performed by Contractor, by independent agencies, and by governing authorities. They
do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Engineer.
C. Inspection and testing services cp-e required to verify compliance with requirements
specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for
compliance with Contract Document requirements.
D. Requirements of this Section relate to customized fabrication and installation
procedures, not production of standard products.
1. Specific quality-control requirements for individual construction activities are
specified in the Sections that specify those 'activiti~s.. Requirements in those
Sections may also cover production of stand<;rrd products.
2. Specified inspections, tests, and related actions do not limit Contractor's quality-
control procedures that fac.ilitate compliance with Contract Document
requiremerits. .
3. Requirements for Contractor to proyide quality-control serVices required by
Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions
of this Section.
E. Related Sections: The following~ Sections contain requirements that relate to this
Section:
1. Division. 1. Section "Cutting and Patching" specifies requirements for repair and
restoration of construction disturbed by inspection and testing activities.
2. Division 1 Section "Submittals" specifies requirements for development of a
schedule of required tests and inspections.
QUALITY CONTROL
01400 - I
1.3 RESPONSffiILITIES
A. Contractor Responsibilities: Unless otherwise ii1dicated as the responsibility of another
identified entity, Contractor shall provide inspections, tests, and other quality-control
services specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents and required by authorities
having jurisdiction. Costs for these services are included in the Contract Sum.
1. Where individual Sections specifically indicate that certain inspections, tests, and
other quality-control services are the Contractor's responsibility, the Contractor
shall employ and pay a qualified independent testing agency to perform quality-
control services. Costs for these services are included in the Contract Sum.
B. Retesting: The Contractor is responsible for retesting where rbmlts of inspections, tests,
or other quality-control services prove unsatisfactory and indicate noncompliance with
Contract Document - requirements, regardless of whether the original test was
Contractor's responsibility.
1. The cost of retesting construction, revised or replaced by the Contractor, is the
Contractor's responsibility where required tests performed on original construction
indicated noncompliance with Contract Document requirements.
C.' Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required inspections, tests,
and similar services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify the
agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. . ..
Auxiliary services required include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Provide access to the Work.
2. Furnish incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate inspections and tests.
3. Take adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing
or assist the agency in taking samples.
4. Provide facilities for storage and curing of test samples.
5. Deliver samples to testing laboratories. .
6. Provide the agency with a preliminary design mix proposed for use for materials
mixes that require control by the testing agency.
7. Provide security and protection of samples and test equipment at the Proj ect Site.
D. Duties of the Testing Agency: The independent agency engaged to perform inspections,
sampling, and testing of materials and construction specified in individual Sections shall
cooperate with the Engineer and the Contractor in performance of the agency's duties.
The testing agency shall provide qualified personnel to perform required inspections and
tests.
1. The agency shall notify the Engineer and the Contractor promptly of irregularities
or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.
QUALITY CONTROL
01400 - 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
~I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2. The agency is not au$orized to release, revoke; alter, or enlarge requirements of
the Contract Documents or approve or accept any portion of the Work.
3. The agency shall not perform any duties of the Contr~ctor.
E. Coordination: Coordinate the sequence of activities to accommodate required services
with a minimum of delay. 'Coordinate activities to avoid the necessity of removing and
replacing construction to accommodate inspections and tests.
1. The Contractor is responsible for scheduling times for inspections, tests, taking
samples, and similar activities.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
. .
A. Unless the Contractor is responsible for this service, the independent testing agency shall
submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each inspection, test, or similar service
to the Engineer. If the Contractor is responsible for the service, submit a certified
written report, in duplicate, of each inspection, test, or similar service through the
Contractor.
'1. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to the governing authority,
when the authority so directs.
2. Report Data: Written reports of each inspection, test, or similar service include,
but are not limited to, the following:
a. Date of is sue.
b. Project title and number.
c. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency.
d. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.
e. Names of individuals making the inspection or test.
f. Designation of the Work and test method.
g. Identification of product and Specification Section.
h. Complete inspect~oi1 o,r test data.
1. Test results and an interpretation of test results.
J. AmlJient conditions atthe time of sample taking and testing.
k. Comments' or professional opinion on whether inspected or tested Work
complies with Contract DocUment requirements.
1. Name and signature of laboratory inspector.
m. Recommendations on retesting.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications for Service Agencies: . Engage inspection and testing service agencies,
including independent testing laboratories, that are prequalified as complying with the
QUALITY CONTROL
01400 - 3
American Council of Independent Laboratories' "Recommended Requirements for
Independent Laboratory Qualification" and that.specialize in the types of inspections and
tests to be performed.
1. Each independent inspection and testing agency engaged on the Project shall be
authorized by authorities having jurisdiction to operate in the state where the
Project is located.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 REPAIR AND PROTECTION
A. General: Upon completion of inspection, testing, sample taking and similar services,
repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. Comply with Contract
Document requirements for Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching."
B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities, and protect
rep~ired construction.
C. Repair and protection is Contractor's responsibility, regardless' of the assignment of
responsibility for inspection, testing, or similar services.
END OF SECTION 01400
QUALITY CONTROL
01400 - 4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 02070 - SELECT WE DEMOLITION
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 . SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Building demolition.
2 Demolition and removal of selected site elements.
3 Patching and repairs.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this
Section:
1. Division'l Section "Summary of Work" for use of the building and phasing
requirements. .
2. Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching" for cutting and patching procedures for
selective demolitiop.operations,
3. Division 1 Section "Schedules and Reports" for selective demolition schedule
requirements. .
4. Division 1 Section' "Construction Facilities and Temp~rary Controls" for
. temporary utilities, temporary construction and support facilities, temporary
security and protection'facilities, and environmental protection measures for
selective demolition operations. ,
5. Division 1 Section "Contract Closeout" for record document requirements.
. 6. Division 2 Section "Building Demolition" for demolition of buildings, structures,
and site improvements. _
7. Division 2 Section "SeleCtive Demolition for Interiors" for partial demolition of
the interior of a building .undergoing alterations and for the removal, salvage, or
reuse of materials in new construction.
8. Division 2 Section "Tree Protection and Trimming" for protecting trees remaining
on-site.
9. Division 2 Section "Site Clearing" for site clearing and removing above- and
below-grade improvements. '
10. Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for soil materials, excavating, backfilling, and site
grading.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
02070 -I
11. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for material and construction requirements
for temporary enclosures.
12. Division 9 SeCtion "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for material and construction
requirements for temporary enclosures.
13. Division 15 Sections for cutting, patching, or relocating mechanical items.
14. Division 16 Sections for cutting, patching, or relocating electrical items.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Remove: Remove and legally dispose of items except those indicated to be reinstalled,
salvaged, or to remain the Owner's property.
B. Remove and Salvage: Items indicated to be removed and salvaged remain the Owner's
property. Remove, clean, and pack or crate items to protect against damage. Identify
contents of containers and deliver to Owner's designated storage area.
C. Remove and Reinstall: Remove items indicated; clean, service, and otherwise prepare
them for reuse; store and protect against damage. Reinstall items in the same locations
or in locations indicated.
D. Existing to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling
during selective demolition. When permitted by the Engineer; items may be removed
to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and then cleaned and
reinstalled in their original locations.
1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP
A. Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise
indicated to remain the Owner's property, demolished materials shall become the
Contractor's property and shall be removed from the site with further disposition at the
Contractor's option.
B. Historical items indicated remain the Owner's property.; Carefully remove and salvage
each item in a manner to prevent damage and deliver promptly to the Owner.
C. Historical items, relics, and similar objects including, but not limited to, cornerstones
and their contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, antiques, and other items of
interest or value to the Owner, which may be encountered during selective demolition,
remain the Owner's property. Carefully remove and salvage each item or object in a
manner to prevent damage and deliver promptly to the Owner.
1. Cooperate with Owner's archaeologist or. historical adviser.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
02070 -2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract
and Division 1 Specification Sections, for information only, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Proposed dust-control measures.
C. Proposed noise-control measures.
D. Schedule of selective demolition activities indicating the following:
1'. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and
ending dates fo~ each activity.
2. Interruption of utility services.
3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services.
4. Use of elevator and stairs.
5. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work to ensure
uninterrupted progress of Owner's on-site operations.
6. Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing building
and of Owner's partial occupancy of completed Work.
7. Locations oftemporary partitions and means of egress.
E. Inventory of items to be removed and salvaged.
F. Inventory of items to be removed by Owner.
G. Photographs or videotape, sufficiently detailed, of existing conditions of adjoining
construction and site improvements that might be misconstrued as'damage caused by
selective demolition operations.
H. Record drawings at Project closeout according to Division 1 Section "Contract
Closeout. "
1. Identify and accurately locate capped utilities and other subsurface structural,
electrical, or mechanical conditions.
I. Landfill records indicating receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes by a landfill
facility licensed to accept h~ardous wastes.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Demolition Firm Qualifications: 'Engage. an experienced firin that has successfully
completed selective demolition Work similar to that indicated for this Project.
B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EP A notification regulations before
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
02070 -3
starting selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of
authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with
preinstallation conference requirements of Division 1 Section "Project Meetings."
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Owner will occupy portions of the building immediately adjacent to selective demolition
area. Conduct selective demolition so that Owner's operations will not be disrupted.
Provide not Jess than 72 hours' notice to Owner of activities that will affect Owner's
operations.
B. Owner assumes no responsibility for actual condition of buildings to be selectively
demolished.
1. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained
by Owner as far as practical.
C. Asbestos: It is not expected that asbestos will be encountered in the Work. If any
materials suspected of containing asbestos are encountered, do not disturb the materials.
Immediately notify the Architect and the Owner.
1. Asbestos will be removed by Owner before start of Work.
D. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site will not be permitted.
1.8 SCHEDULING
A. Arrange selective demolition schedule so as not to interfere with Owner's on-site
operations.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Existing Special Warranty: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces
cut or damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to
void existing warranties.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
02070 -4
I
I
I
-I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
"I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.1 REPAIR MATERIALS
A. Use repair materials IdenticaL to existing materials.
1. Where identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used for exposed surfaces,
use materia!s that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent
possible.
2. Use materials whose installed performance equals or surpasses that of existing
materials.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that utilities 'have been disconnected and capped.
B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent
of selective demolition required.
C. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to
be removed and salvaged.
D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict. with the
intended functi<:m or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and
extent of the conflict. Promptly submit a written report to the Engineer.
E. . Survey the condition of the building to determine whether removing any element might
result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of the structure or
adjacent structures during selective demolition.
F. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective
demolition activities.
3.2 UTILITY SERVICES
A. Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against
damage during selective demolition operations.
1. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or operating facilities,. except
when authorized in, Writing by Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide
temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to
Owner and to governing authorities.
a. Provide not less than 72 hours' notice to Owner if shutdown of service is
required during changeover.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
02070 -5
B. Utility Requirements: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility
services serving building to be selectively demolished.
1. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated utilities when requested by Contractor.
2. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies.
3. Where utility services are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned,
provide bypass connections to maintain continuity of service to other parts of the
building before proceeding with selective demolition.
4. Cut offpipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug
and seal the remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing.
C. Utility Requirements: Refer to Division 15 and 16 Sections for shutting off,
disconnecting, removing, and sealing or capping utility services. Do not start selective
demolition work until utility: disconnecting and sealing have been completed and verified
in writing.
3.3 PREPARATION
A. Drain, purge, or otherwise remove, collect, and dispose of chemicals, gases, explosives,
acids, flammables, or other dangerous materials before proceeding with selective
demolition operations.
B. Conduct demolition operations and remove debris to ensure minimum interference with
roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.
1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities
without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide
alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by governing
regulations.
C. Conduct demolition operations to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent
buildings and facilities to remain. Ensure safe passage of people around selective
demolition area.
1. Erect temporary protection, such as walks, fences, railings, canopies, and covered
passageways, where required by authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Protect existing site improvements, appurtenances, and landscaping to remain.
3. Erect a plainly visible fence around drip line of individual trees or around
perimeter drip line of groups of trees to remain.
4. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between demolition and
removal of existing construction, on exterior surfaces and new construction to
ensure that no water leakage or damage occurs to structure or interior areas.
5. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain and
are exposed during selective demolition operations.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
02070 -6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
6. Cover and protect fUrniture, furnishings, and -equipment that have not been
removed.
3.4 POLLUTION CONTROLS
A. Use water mist, temporary enclosures, and other suitable methods to limit the spread of
dust and dirt. Comply With governing environmental protection regulations.
1. Do not use water when it may damage existing construction or create hazardous
or objectionable conditions, such as ice, flooding, and pollution.
B. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces
and areas.
C. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective
demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before start of
selective demolition.
3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
A. Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new
construction and as indicated. Use m~thods required to complete Work within
limitations of governing regulations and as follows:
1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level.
. Complete selective demolition work above each floor or tier before disturbing
supporting members on lower levels. .
2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true .to dimensions required.
Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining
construction. To plinimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces, use hand or small
power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping.
Temporarily cover openings to remain.
3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid
marring existing finished surfaces.
4. Do not use cutting t~rches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At
concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of
hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable fire-
suppression devices during flame-cutting operatiqns.
5. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches.
6. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials
and promptly dispose of off-sife.
7. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to
avoid free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation.
8. Locate selective demolition equipment throughout the structure and remove debris
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
02070 -7
and materials so as notto impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or
framing.
9. Dispose of demolished items and materials Pt:omptly. . On-site storage or sale of
removed items is prohibited.
10. Return elements of construction and surfaces to remain to condition existing
before start of selective demolition operations.
B. Demolish concrete, and masonry in . small sections. Cut concrete .and masonry at
junctures with construction to remain, using power-driven masonry saw or hand tools;
do not use power-driven impact tools.
C. Break up and remove concrete slabs on grade, unless otherwise shown to remain.
D. Remove resilient floor coverings and adhesive according to recommendations of the
Resilient Floor Covering Institute's (RFCI) "Recommended Work Practices for the
Removal of Resilient Floor Coverings" and Addendum. .
1. Remove residual adhesive and prepare substrate fotnew floor coverings by one
of the methods recommended by RFCI.
E. Remove no more existing roofing than can be covered in one day by new roofing. See
applicable Division 7 Section for new roofing requirements.
F. Remove air-conditioning equipment without releasing refrigerants.
3.6 PATCHING AND REPAIRS
A. Promptly patch and repair holes and damaged surfaces caused to adjacent construction
by selective demolition operations.
B. Patching is specified in Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching."
C. Where repairs to existing surfaces are required, patch to produce surfaces suitable for
new materials.
1. Completely fill holes and depressions in existing masonry walls to remain with an
approved masonry patching material, applied according to manufacturer's printed
recommendations.
D. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into adjoining
construction to remain in a manner that eliminates evidence of patching and refinishing.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
02070 -8
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,I
I
I
I
3.7 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS
A. General: Promptly dispose of demolished materials. Do not allow demolished materials
to accumulate on-site.
B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.
C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of
them.
END OF SECTION 02070
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
02070 -9
I
I
I
I
I ..
'1
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 02110 - SITE CLEARING
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section'.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Protection of existing trees indicated to remain.
. 2. Removal of trees and other vegetation.
3. Topsoil stripping. .
4. Clearing and grubbing.
5. Removing above-grade improvements.
6. Removing below-grade improvements.
1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Traffic: Conduct site-clearing operations to ensUre minimum interference with roads,
streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do not close or obstruct
streets, walks, or other occupied or used facilities without permission from authorities
having jurisdiction.
B. Protection of Existing Improvements: Provide protections necessary to prevent damage
to existing improvements indicated to remain in place.
1. Protect improvements on adjoining properties and on Owner's property.
2. Restore damaged improvements: to their original condition, as acceptable to
property owners.
C. Protection of Existing TreesandVeg~tation: Protect existing trees and other vegetation
indicated to remain in placeagainsfunnecessary cutting, breaking. or skinning of roots,
skinning or bruising of bark, smothering of trees by stockpiling construction materials or
excavated materials within drip line, excess. foot or vehicular traffic, or parking of
vehicles within drip line. Provide temporary guards to protect trees and vegetation to be
left standing.
1.' Water trees and other vegetation' to remain within limits of contract work as
SITE CLEARING
02110 - 1
required to maintain their health during course of construction operations.
2. Provide protection for roots over 1-1/2 inch in diameter that are cut during
construction operations. Coat cut faces with an emulsified asphalt or other
acceptable coating formulated to use on damaged plant tissues. Temporarily cover
exposed roots with wet burlap to prevent roots from drying out;, cover with earth as
soon as possible.
3. Repair or replace trees and vegetation indicated ~o remain that are damaged by
construction operations in a manner acceptable to Engineer. Employ a licensed
arborist to repair damage to trees and shrubs.
4. Replace trees that cannot be repaired and restored to full-growth status, as
determined by arborist.
D. Salvable Improvements: Carefully remove items indicated to be salvaged and store on
Owner's premises where indicated or directed.
1.4 EXISTING SERVICES
A. General: Indicated locations are approximate; determine exact locations before
commencing Work.
B. Arrange and pay for disconnecting, removing, capping, and plugging utility services.
Notify affected utility companies in advance and obtain approval before starting this
Work.
C. Place markers to indicate location of disconnected services. Identify service lines and
capping locations on Project Record Documents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SITE CLEARING
A. General: Remove trees, shrubs, grass, and other vegetation, improvements, or
obstructions, as required, to permit installation of new construction. Remove similar
items elsewhere on site or premises as specifically indicated. Removal includes digging
out and off-site disposal of stumps and roots.
1. Cut minor roots and branches of trees indicated to remain in a clean and careful
manner where such roots and branches obstruct installation of new construction.
B. Topsoil: Topsoil is defined as friable clay loam surface soil found in a depth of not less
than 4 inches. Satisfactory topsoil is reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, stones, and
SITE CLEARING
02110-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
other objects over 2 inches in diameter, and without weeds, roots; and other objectionable
material.
1. Strip topsoil to whatever depths encountered in a manner to prevent intermingling
with underlying subsoil or other objectionable material: Removeheavy growths
of grass from areas before stripping.
a. Where existing trees are indicated to remain, leave existing topsoil in place
within drip lines to prevent damage to root system.
2. Stockpile topsoil in storage piles in areas indicated or directed. Construct storage
piles to provide free drainage of surface water. Cover storage piles, if required, to
prevent wind erosion.
3. Dispose of unsuitable or excess topsoil as specified for disposal of waste material.
C. Clearing and Grubbing: Clear. site of trees, shrubs; and other vegetation, except for those
indicated to be left standing.
1. Completely remove stumps, roots, and other debris protruding through ground
surface.
2. Use only hand methods for grubbing inside drip line of trees indicated to remain.
3. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil
material, unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated.'
a. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding 6 inches loose depth,
and thoroughly compact each layer to a density equal to adjacent original
ground.
D. Removal of Improvements: Remove eXIstmg . above-grade and below-grade
improvements as indicated and as necessary to facilitate new construction.
3.2 DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIALS
A. Burning on O\V,ller's Property: Burning is not permitted on Owner's prop'erty.
B. Removal: Transport combus~ible, an~ noncombustible waste materials and unsuitable
. topsoil materials off Owner's property and dispose of properly.
END OF SECTION 02110'
SITE CLEARING
02110-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 02200 - EARTHWORK
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Preparing and grading sub grades for slabs-on-grade, walks, pavements, and
landscaping.
2. Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures.
3. SubbaSe course for walks and pavements.
4. Subsurface drainage ba~kfill trenches.
. 5. Excavating and backfilling for underground mechanical and electrical utilities and
appurtenances.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Excavation consists 'of the removal of material encountered to sub grade elevations and
the reuse or disposal of materials removed.
B.' Subgrade: The uppermost surface of an excavation or the top surface of a fill or backfill
immediately below subbase, drainage fill, or topsoil materials.
C. Borrow: Soil material obtained off-site when sufficient appr()ved soil material is not
available from excavations.
D. Subbase Course: .'The layer placed between the sub grade and base course in a paving
system or the layer placed between the sub grade and surface of a pavement or walk.
E. Base Course: The layer placed between the subbase and surface pavement in a paving
system.
F. Drainage Fill: Course ofwasped granular material placed to cut off water and used to
backfill "frenchdrains".
G. Unauthorized excavation consists of removing materials beyond indicated sub grade
EARTHWORK
02200 - 1
elevations or dimensions without direction by the Engineer. Unauthorized excavation,
as well as remedial work directed by the Engineer, shall be at the Contractor's expense.
H. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs,
mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features
constructed above or below ground surface.
1. Utilities include on-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as
underground services within building lines.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division
1 Specification Sections.
B. Product data for the following:
1. Each type of plastic warning tape.
2. Filter fabric.
3. Geo- Textiles for swale stabilization
C. Test Reports: In addition to test reports required. under field quality control, submit the
following:
1. Laboratory analysis of each soil material proposed for fill and backfill from on-site
and borrow sources.
2. One optimum moisture-maximum density curve for each soil material.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Standards: Perform earthwork complying with requirements of authorities
having jurisdiction.
B. Testing and Inspection Service: Contractor will employ a qualified independent
geotechnical engineering testing agency to ~lassify proposed on-site and borrow soils to
verify that soils comply with specified requirements and to perform required field and
laboratory testing. Cost of these services will be paid by the Contractor.
C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
. 1. Before commencing earthwork, meet with representatives of the governing
authorities, Owner, Engineer, and other concerned entities. Review earthwork
procedures and responsibilities including testing and inspection procedures and
requirements. Notify participants at least 3 working dayspJjor to convening
conference. Record discussions and agreements and furnish a copy to each
participant.
EARTHWORK 02200 - 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied by the
Owner or others except when permitted in writing by the Engineer and then only after
acceptable temporary utility services have been provided.
1. . Provide a rninirhum 48-hours' notice to the Engineer and req~ive written notice to
proceed before interrupting any utility.
B. Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities indicated to be
removed. Coordinate with utility companies to shutoff services if lines are active.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SOIL MATERIALS
A. General: Provide approved borrow soil materials from off-site when sufficient approved
soil materials are not available' from excavations. .
B. Satisfactory Soil Materials: ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups GW, GP, GM, SW,
SP, and SM; free of rock or gravel larger than 2 inches in any dimension, debris, waste,
frozen materials, veget~ti.on and other deleterious matter.
C. Unsatisfactory Soil Materials: ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups GC, SC, ML,
MH, CL, CR, OL, OR, and PT.
,-
D. Backfill and Fill Materials: Satisfactory soil materials. .
E. Subbase and Base Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture ofnatufal or crushed
gravel, crushed stone, and' natural or crushed sand, AsTM D 2940, with at least 95
percent passing a 1-l/2-inchsieve and. not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve
( Georgia DOT-specification for Graded Aggregate Base).
F. Engineered Fill: Subbase or base materials.
G. Bedding Material: Subbase .or base materials with 100 percent passing,a I-inch sieve and
not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.
R.. Drainage Fill: Washed, ev.enly graded mixture of crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed
, gravel, ASTM D 448, co~se aggregate grading size 57, with 100 percent passing a
l-1I2-inch sieve and not more than 5percent passing a No.8 sieve.
1. Impervious Fill: Clayey sand' mixture capable of compacting to a dense impervious state.
EARTHWORK
02200 - 3
2.2 ACCESSORIES'
A. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant polyethylene film warning tape
manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, 6 inches wide and 4 mils
thick minimum, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility, with metallic core
encased in a protectivejacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when
tape is buried up to 2'-6" deep.
1. Tape Colors: Provide tape colors to utilities as follows:
a. Red: Electric.
b. Yellow: Gas, oil, steam, and dangerous materials.
c. Orange: Telephone and other communications.
d. Blue: Water systems.
e. Green: Sewer systems.
B. Filter Fabric: . Manufacturer's standard nonwoven pervious geotextile fabric of
polypropylene, nylon or polyester fibers, or a combination.
1. Provide filter fabrics that meet or exceed the listed minimum physical properties
determined according to'ASTM D 4759 and the referenced standard test method in
parentheses:
a. Grab Tensile Strength (ASTM D 4632): 100 lb.
b. Apparent Opening Size (ASTM D 4751): #100 U.S. Standard sieve.
c. Permeability (ASTM D 4491): 150 gallons per minute per sq. ft.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused
by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by
earthwork operations.
B. Provide erosion control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and
discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and
walkways.
C. Tree protection is specified in the Division 2 Section "Site Clearing."
3.2 DEWATERING
A. Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from entering excavations, from
EARTHWORK
02200 - 4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
ponding on prepared subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area.
B. Protect sub grade soils from softening and damage by rain or water accumulation.
3.3 EXCAVATION
A. Explosives: Do not use explosives.
B. Unclassified Excavation: Excavation is unclassified ,and includes excavation to required
sub grade elevations regardless of the character of materials and obstructions encountered.
3.4 STABILITY OF EXCAVATIONS
A. Comply with local codes, ordinances, and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction
to maintain stable excavations. .
3.5 EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS
A.' Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated cross sections, elevations, and
grades.
3.6 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES
A. Excavate trenches to indicated slopes, lines, depths, arid invert elevations.
1. Beyond building perimeter, excavate trenches to allow installation of top of pipe
below frost line~
B. Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide a working clearance on each side of pipe
or c.onduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench 1?ottom to 12 inches higher than
, top of pipe or conduit, unless otherwise indicated.
L Clearance: 12 inches each side of pipe or conduit.
C: Trench Bottoms: Excavate' and shape trench bottoms to provide uniform bearing and
support of pipes and conduit. Shape sub grade to provide continuous support for bells,
joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. Remove stones
and sharp objects to avoid point loading.
, .
1. For pipes or conduit less than 6 inches in nominal diameter and flat-bottomed,
multiple-duct conduit units~ hand-exqavate trench bottoms and support pipe and
conduit on an undisturbed sub grade.
2. For pipes and conduit 6 inches or larger in nominal diameter, shape bottom of
EARTHWORK 02200 - 5
trench to supportbpttom 90 degrees of pipe circumference. Fill depressions with
tamped sand backfill.
3.7 APPROVAL OF SUBGRADE
A. Notify Engineer when excavations have reached required subgrade.
B. When Engineer determines that unforeseen unsatisfactory soil is present, continue
excavation and replace with compacted backfill or fill material as directed.
1. Unforeseen additional excavation and replacement material will be paid according
to the Contract provisions for changes in Work.
C. Reconstruct sub grades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water,
or construction activities, as directed by the Engineer.
3.8 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION
A. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending indicated
bottom elevation of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering
required top elevation. Lean concrete fill may be used to bring elevations to proper
position when acceptable to the Engineer.
1. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction as directed by the Engineer.
B. Where indicated widths of utility trenches are exceeded, provide stronger pipe, or special
installation procedures, as required by the Engineer.
3.9 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS
A. Stockpile excavated materials acceptable for backfill and fill soil materials, including
acceptable borrow materials.. Stockpile soil materials without intermixing. Place, grade,
and shape stockpiles to drain surface water.
1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drIp
line of remaining trees.
3.10 BACKFILL
A. Backfill excavations promptly, but not before completing the following:
1. Surveying locations of underground utilities for record documents.
2. Testing, inspecting, and approval of underground utilities.
3. Concrete formwork removal.
EARTHWORK 02200 - 6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
4. Removal of trash and debris from excavation.
5. 'Removal of temporary shoring and bracing, and.sheeting.
3.11 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL
A. Place and compact bedding course on rock and other unyielding bearing surfaces and to
fill unauthorized excavations. Shape bedding course to provide continuous support for
bells, joints, and barrel~ of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits.
B. Place and compact initial backfill of satisfactory soil material or subbase material, free
ofpartic1es larger than 1 inch, to a height of 12 inches over the utility pipe or conduit.
1. Carefully compact material under pipe haunches and bring backfill evenly up on
both sides and along the full length of utility piping or conduit to avoid damage or
displacement of utility system.
C. Coordinate backfilling' with utilities testing.
. D. Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil material to final subgrade.
E. Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches below firushedgrade, except 6
in~hes below sub grade under pavements and slabs.
3.12 SUBSURFACE DRAINAGE BACKFILL
A. Subsurface Drain: Place a layer of filter fabric around perimeter 'of drainage trench, as
indicated. Place a 6-inch compacted course of filtering material on filter fabric to support
drainage pipe. .After installing and testing, encase drainage pipe to the finished grade of
compacted filtering material and wrap in filter fabric, overlapping edges at least 6 inches.
B. Drainage Backfill: 'Place and compact drainage backfill of filtering material over
subsurface drain, in width mdicated, to final grade. Overlay drainage backfill with one
layer of filter fabric,' overlapping edges at least 6 inches.
J
3.13 .FILL
A. Preparation: Remove vegetation, topsoil, debris, wet, and unsatisfactory soil materials,
obstructions, and deleteri6uslI).at~rials from ground surface prior ~o placing fills.
1. Plow strip, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than I vertical to 4 horizontal so fill
.material will bond with existing surface.
B. When sub grade or existing ground surface to receive fill has a density less than that
required for fill, break up ground surface to depth required, pulverize, moisture-condition
or aerate soil and recompact to required density.
EARTHWORK
02200 - 7
C. Place fill material in layers to required elevations for each location listed below.
1. Under grass, use'satisfactory excavated or borrow soil material.
2. Under walks and pavements, use subbase or base material, or satisfactory excavated
or borrow soil material.
3.14 MOISTURE CONTROL
A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill layer before
compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content.
1. Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain
frost or ice.
2. Rt::move and replace, or scarify and air-dry satisfactory soil material that is too wet
to compact to specified density.
a. Stockpile or spread and dry remoyed wet satisfactory soil material. .
3.15 COMPACTION
A. Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 8 inches in loose depth for
material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and notmore than 4 inches in loose
depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers.
B. Place backfill and fill materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations.
Place backfill and fill uniformly along the full length of each structure.
C. Percentage of Maximum Dry Density Requirements: Compact soil to not less than the
following percentages of maximum dry density according to ASTM D 1557:
1. Under pavements, compact the top 12 inches below sub grade and each layer of
backfill or fill material at 95 percent maximum dry density.
2. Under walkways, compact the top 6 inches below sub grade and each layer of
backfill or fill material at 95 percent maximum dry density.
3. Under lawn or unpaved areas, compact the top 6 inches below sub grade and each
layer of backfill or fill material at 90 percent maximum dry density.
3.16 GRADING
A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free from irregular surface chariges.
Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations
indicated.
1. Provide a smooth transition between existing adjacent grades and new grades.
EARTHWORK 02200 - 8
/
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to conform to required surface
tolerances. .
B. Site Grading: Slope grades to prevent ponding. Finish subgrades to required elevations
within the following tolet:anc~s:.
1. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 0.10 foot.
2.. Walks: Plus or minus O.IOioot.
3. Pavements: Plus or minus 1/2 inch.
3.17 SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES
A. Under pavements and walks, place subbase course material on prepared-subgrades. Place
base course material over subbases to pavements.
1. Compact subbase and base courses at optimum moisture content to required grades,
lines, cross sections and thidrness to not less than 95 percent of Modified Proctor...,.
2. Shape subbase and base to required crown elevations and cross-slope grades.
3. When thickness' of compacted subbase or base course is6 inches or less, place
materials in a single layer.
4. When thickness of compacted subbase or base course exceeds 6 inches, place
materials in equal layers, with no layer more than 6 inches thick or less than 3
inches thick when compacted.
B. Pavement Shoulders: Place shoulders along edges of subbase and base course to prevent
lateral movement. Construct shoulders at least 12 inches wide of acceptable soil materials
and compact simultaneo,usly with each subbase and base layer.
3.18 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency Services: Allow testing agency to inspect and test each sub grade and
each fill or backfill layer. Do not proceed until test results for previously completed work
verify compliance with requirements.
L Perform field in-place denSIty tests according to' ASTM ,D 1556 (sand cone
method), ASTM D 2167 (rubber balloon method), or ASTM D 2937 (drive cylinder
. .
method), as applicable. .
a.
Field in-place density tests may also be performed by the nuclear method
according to ASTM D 2922, provided that calibration curves are periodically
checked and adjusted to correlate to tests performed using ASTM D 1556.
With each density calibration check, check the calibration curves furnished
with the moisture gages according to ASTM D 3017.
When field in-place density tests are performed using nuclear methods, make
calibration checks of both density and moisture gages at beginning of work,
b.
EARTHWORK
02200 - 9
on each different type of material encountered', and at intervals as directed by
the Engineer.
2. Paved Areas: At sub grade and at each compacted ,fill and backfill layer, perform
at least o~e field in-place density test for every 2,000 sq. ft. or less of paved area or,
but in no case fewer than three tests.
3. Trench Backfill: In each compacted initial and final backfill layer, perform at least
one field in-place density test for each .150 feet or less of trench, but no fewer than
two tests.
B. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills are below specified density,
scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to the depth required, recompact
and retest until required density is obtained.
3.19 PROTECTION
A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas'from traffic, freezing, and erosion.. .
Keep free of trash and debris. .
B. Repair and re-establish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially
completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or lose compaction due to subsequent
construction operations or weather conditions.
1. Scarify or remove and replace material to depth directed by the Engineer; reshape
and recompact at optimum moisture content to the required density.
C. Settling: Where settling occurs during the Project correction ,period, remove finished
surfacing, backfill with additional approved material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing.
1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent
work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to the greatest extent possible.
3.20 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS
A. Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including unsatisfactory
soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off the Owner's property.
B. Disposal: Transport surplus satisfactory soil to designated storage areas on the Owner's
property. Stockpile or spread soil as directed by Engineer.
1. Remove waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally
dispose of it off the Owner's property.
END OF SECTION 02200
EARTHWORK
02200 - 10
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 02510 - HOT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 -RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 . 'SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. . Hot-mix asphalt paving.
2. Pavement-marking paint.
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Provide hot-mix asphalt pavement according to the materials, workmanship, and other
applicable requirements of the standard specifications of the state-or of authorities
having jurisdiction.
1. Standard Specification: Georgia Department of Transportation.
2. Measurement and payment provisions and safety program submittals included in
standard specifications do not apply to this Section.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. . Product Data: For each product specified. Include technical data and tested physical
and performance properties.-
B. Job-Mix. Designs: For each job mix proposed for the Work.
C. Material Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance of materials
with requirements indicated.
D. Material Certificates: Certificat~s signed by manufacturers certifying that each material
complies with requirements,
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an.experienced installer who has completed hot-mix
asphalt paving similar in material; design, and' extent to that indicated for this Project
and with a record of successful in-service performance.
HOT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING
02510 - 1
B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with
requirements of Division 1 Section "Project Meetings" Review methods and procedures
related to asphalt paving including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Review proposed sources of paving materials, including capabilities and location
of plant that will manufacture hot-mix asphalt.
2. Review condition of substrate and preparatory work performed by other trades.
3. Review requirements for protecting paving work, including restriction of traffic
during installation period and for remainder of construction period.
4. Review and finalize construction schedule for paving and related work. Verify
availability of materials, paving Installer's personnel, and equipment required to
execute the Work without delays.
5. Review inspection and testing requirements, governing regulations, and proposed
installation procedures.
6. Review forecasted weather conditions and procedures for coping with unfavorable
conditions.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver pavement-marking materials to Project site in original packages with seals
unbroken and bearing manufacturer's labels containing brand nCl.lIle and type of material,
date of manufacture, arid directions for storage.
B. Store pavement-marking materials in a clean, dry, protected location and within
temperature range required by manufacturer. Protect stored materials from direct
sunlight.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not apply asphalt materials if substrate is wet or
excessively damp or if the following conditions are not met:
1. Prime and Tack Coats: Minimum surface temperature of60 deg F (15.5 deg C).
2. Asphalt Base Course: Minimum surface temperature of 40 deg F (4 deg C) and
rising at time of placement.
3. Asphalt Surface Course: Minimum surface temperature of60 deg F (15.5 deg C)
at time of placement.
B. Pavement-Marking Paint: Proceed with pavement marking only on clean, dry surfaces
and at a minimum ambient or surface temperature of 40 deg F (4 deg C) for oil-based
materials, 50 deg F (10 deg C) for water-based materials, and not exceeding 95 deg F
(35 deg C).
HOT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING.
02510 - 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
IdI
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 AGGREGATES
A. General: Use materials and gradations that have performed satisfactorily in previous
installations.
B. Coarse Aggregate: Sound; angular crushed stone; crushed gravel; or properly cured,
crushed blast-furnace slag; complying with ASTM D 692.
C. Fine Aggregate: Sharp-edged natural sand or sand prepared from stone; gravel, properly
cured blast-furnace slag, or combinations thereof; complying with ASTM D 1073.
1. For hot-mix asphalt; limit natural sand to a maximum <?f 20 percent by weight of
the total aggregate mass. ,
D. Mineral Filler: Rock or slag dust, hydraulic cement, or other inert material complying
with ASTM D 242.
2.2 ASPHALT MATERIALS,
A. Asphalt Cement: Asphalt cement complying with Ga. DOT specifications.
B. Prime Coat: Asphalt emulsion prime conforming to Ga. DOT specifications.
C. Tack Coat: Emulsified asphalt or Cationic emulsified asphalt, slow setting, factory
diluted in water, of suita"le grade and consistency for application conforming to Ga.
. DOT specifications.
D. Water: Potable.
2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. Herbicide: Commercial .chemical for weed control, registered by Environmental
Protection Agency (EP A). Provide gr'll1ular, liquid, or wettable, powder form.
B. Sand: ASTM D 1073, 'Grade Nos. 2 or 3.
c. . Pavement-Marking Paint: ,Alkyd-resin type, ready-mixed, complying with FS TT -P-
115, Type I, or AASHTO M-248, Type N.
1. Color: As indicate<f.
D. Wheel Stops: ' Precast, air':'entrained concrete, 2S00-psi (17.2-MPa) rmmmum
compressive strength, approximately 6 inches (150 mm) high, 9 inches (225 mm) wide,
and 84 inches (2130"mm) long. 'Provide chamfered comers and drainage slots on
underside, and provide holes for anchoring to substrate.
HOT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING
02510 - 3
1. Dowels:' Galvanized steel, diameter 3/4 inch (19 nun), minimum length 10 inches
(254 nun).
2.4 MIXES
A. Hot-Mix Asphalt: Provide dense, hot-laid, hot-mix aSphalt plant mixes approved by
authorities having jurisdiction; designed according to Ga~ DOT specificatons
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that sub grade is dry and in suitable condition to support paving and imposed
loads.
B. Proof-roll subbase using heavy, pneumatic-tired rollers to locate areas that are unstable ....
or that require further compaction.
C. Notify Engineer in writing of any unsatisfactory conditions. Do not begin paving
installation until these conditions have been satisfactorily corrected.
3.2 PATCHING AND REPAIRS
A. Patching: Saw cut perimeter of patch and excavate existing pavement section to sound
base. Recompact new sub grade. Excavate rectangular or trapezoidal patches, extending
12 inches (300 nun) into adjacent sound pavement, unless otherwise indicated. Cut
excavation faces vertically.
1. Tack coat faces of excavation and allow to cure before paving.
2. Fill excavation with dense-graded, hot-mix asphalt base mix and, while still hot,
compact flush with adjacent surface.
3. Partially fill excavation with dense-graded, hot-mix asphalt base mix and compact
while still hot. Cover asphalt base course with compacted, hot-mix surface layer
finished flush with adjacent surfaces.
B. Tack Coat: Apply uniformly to existing surfaces of previously constructed asphalt or
portland cement concrete paving and to surfaces abutting or projecting into new, hot-mix
asphalt pavement. Apply at a uniform rate of 0.05 to 0.15 gal./sq. yd. (0.2 to 0.7 L/sq.
m) of surface.
1. Allow tack coat to cure undisturbed before paving.
2. Avoid smearing or staining adjoining surfaces; appurtenances, and' surroundings.
Remove spillages and clean affected surfaces.
HOT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING
02510 - 4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.3 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. General: Immediately before placing asphalt materials, remove loose and deleterious
material from substrate surfaces. Ensure that prepared stibgrade is ready to receive
pavmg.
1. Sweep loose granular particles from surface of unbound-aggregate base course.
Do not dislodge Of disturb aggregate embedded in compacted surface of base
course.
B. Herbicide Treatment: Apply herbicide according to manufacturer's recommended rates
and written application instructions. Apply to dry, prepared sub grade or surface of
compacted-aggregate base before applying paving materials.
1. Mix herbicide with prime coat when formulated by manufacturer for that purpose.
C. Prime Coat: Apply uniformly over surface of compacted-aggregate base at a rate of 0.15
to 0.50 gal.lsq. yd. (0.7 to 2.3 L/sq. m). Apply enough material to penetrate and seal, but
not flood, surface. Allow prime coat to cure for 72 hours minimum.
1. If prime coat is not entirely absorbed within 24 hours after application, spread sand
over surface. to blot-excess asphalt. Use just enough sand to prevent pickup under
traffic. Remove loose sand by sweeping before pavement is placed and after
volatiles have evaporated. _
2. Protect primed substrate from damage until ready to receive paving.
3.4 HOT-MIX ASPHALT PLACING
A. Machine place hot~mix asphalt mix on prepared surface, spread uniformly, and strike
off. Place asphalt mix by hand to areas inaccessible to equipment ina manner that
prevents segregation of mix. Place each course to required grade, cross section, and
thickness, when compacted:-
1. Place hot-mix asphalt base course in number of lifts and thicknesses indicated.
- 2. Place hot-mix asphalt surface ~ourse in single lift.
3. Spread mix at minimum'temperature of250 deg F (121 deg C).
4.' Begin applying mix along centerline of crown for crowned sections and on high
side of one-way slopes, unless -otherwise indicated.
. 5. Regulate paver machine speed to obtain smooth, continuous surface free of pulls
and tears in asphc~.lt-paving mat.
B.. Place paving in consecutive strips 'not less than 10 feet (3 m) wide, except where infill
edge strips of a lesser width are required. Jogging path width shall be 8' alternate is
accepted.
HOT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING
02510 - 5
1. After first strip has been placed and rolled, place succeeding strips and extend
rolling to overlap previous strips. Complete asphalt base course for a section
before placing asphalt surface course.
C. Promptly correct surface irregularities in paving course behind paver. Use suitable hand
tools to remove excess material forming high spots. Fill depressions with hot-mix
asphalt to prevent segregation of mix; use suitable hand tools to smooth surface.
3.5 JOINTS
A. Construct joints to ensure continuous bond between adjoining paving sections.
Construct joints free of depressions with same texture and smoothness as other sections
of hot-mix asphalt course.
1. Clean contact surfaces and apply tack coat.
2. Offset longitudinal joints in successive courses a minimum of6 inches (150 mm).
3. Offset transverse joints ~ successive courses a minimum of24 inches (600 mm).
4. Construct transversejoints by bulkhead method or sawed vertical face method as . ..
described in AI's "The Asphalt Handbook."
5. Compact joints as soori as hot-mix asphalt will bear roller weight without
excessive displacement.
6. Compact asphalt at joints to a density within 2 percent of speCified course density.
3.6 COMPACTION
A. General: Begin compaction as soon as placed hot-mix paving will bear roller weight
without excessive displacement. Compact hot-mix paving with hot, hand tampers or
vibratory-plate compactors in areas inaccessible to rollers.
1. Complete compaction before mix temperature cools to 185 deg F (85 deg C).
B. Breakdown Rolling: Accomplish breakdown or initiai rolling immediately after rolling
joints and outside edge. Examine surface immediately after breakdown rolling for
indicated crown, grade, and smoothness. Repair surfaces by loosening displaced
material, filling with hot-mix asphalt, and rerolling to required elevations.
C. Intermediate RoUing:Begin intermediate rolling immediately after breakdown rolling,
while hot-mix asphalt is still hot enough to achieve specified density. Continue rolling
until hot-mix asphalt course has been uniformly compacted to the following density:
1. Average Density: .96 percent of reference laboratory density according to
ASTM D 1559, but no~ less than 94 percent nor greater than 100 percent.
2. Average Density: 92 ,percent of reference maximum theoretical density according
to ASTM D 2041, but not less than 90 percent nor greater than 96 percent.
D. Finish Rolling: Finish roll paved surfaces to remove roller marks while hot-mix asphalt
is still warm.
HOT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING
02510 - 6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
'E. Edge Shaping: While surface is being compacted and finished, trim edges of pavement
to proper alignment. Bevel edges while still hot, with back of rake or smooth iron.
Compact thoroughly using'tamper or other satisfattdry method.
F. Repairs: Remove paved areas that are defective or contaminated with foreign materials.
Remove paving course over area affected and replace with fresh, hot-mix asphalt.
Compact by rolling to specified density and surface smoothness.
G. Protection: After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on pavement until it has
cooled and hardened. '
H. Erect barricades to protect paving from traffic until mixture has cooled enough not to
become marked.
3.7 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A. Thickness: Compact each course to produce the thickness indicated within the following
tolerances:
1. Base Course: Plus orminus 1/2 inch (13 mm).
2. Surface Course: Plus 1/4 inch (6 nun), no minus.
B. Surface Smoothness: Compact each course to produce a surface smoothness within the
following tolerances as determined by using a lO-foot (3~m)straightedge applied
transversely or longitudinally to paved areas:
. 1. Base Course: 1/4 inch (6 nun).
, 2. Surface Course: 1/8 inch (3 nun).
3. Crowned Surfaces: Test with crowned template centered and at right angle to
crown. Maximum allowable variance from template is 1/4 inch (6 nun).
3.8 PAVEMENTMARKlNG
A. Do not apply pavement-marking paint until layout, colors, and placement have been
verified with Engineer.
B. Allow paving to cure for 30'days, before starting pavement"marking.
C. Sweep and clean surface to elnn.inate loose material and dust..
D. Apply paint with mechanical equipment to produce pavement markings of dimensions
indicated with uniform, straightedges. Apply at manufacturer's recommended rates to
provide a minimum wet film thickness of 15 mils (0.4 nun).
3.9 WHEEL STOPS
A. Securely attach wheel stops into pavement with not less than 2 galvanized steel dowels
HOT -MIX ASPHALT PAVING
. 02510 - 7
. embedded in precast concrete at one-third points. Firmly bond each dowel to wheel stop
and to pavement.
3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform
field inspections and tests and to prepare test reports.
1. Testing agency will conduct and interpret tests and state in each report whether
tested Work complies with or deviates from specified requirements.
B. Additional testing, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance
of corrected Work with specified requirements.
C. Thickness: In-place compacted thickness of hot-mix asphalt courses will be determined
according to ASTM D 3549.
D. Surface Smoothness: Finished surface of each hot-mix asphalt course will be tested for
compliance with smoothness tolerances.
E. In-Place Density: Samples ofuncompacted paving mixtures and compacted pavement
will be secured by testing agency according to ASTM D 979.
1. Reference laboratory density will be determined by averaging results from 4
samples of hot-mix asphalt-paving mixture delivered daily to site, prepared
according to ASTM D 1559, and compacted according to job-mix specifications.
2. Reference maximum theoretical density will be determined by averaging results
from 4 samples of hot-mix asphalt-paving mixture delivered daily to site, prepared
according to ASTMD 2041, and compacted according to job-mix specifications.
3. In-place density of compacted pavement will be determined by testing core
samples according to ASTM D 1188 or ASTM D 2726.
a. One core sample will be taken for every 1000 sq. yd. (836 sq. m) or less of
installed pavement, but in no case will fewer than 3 cores be taken.
b. Field density of in-place compacted pavement may also be determined by
nuclear. method according to ASTM D 2950 and correlated with
ASTM D 1188 or ASTM D 2726.
F. Remove and replace or install additional hot-mix asphalt where test results or
measurements indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements.
END OF SECTION 02511
HOT -MIX ASPHALT PAVING
02510 - 8
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,I
.1
I
I
SECTION 02511A - EXISTING,TENNIS COURT RESURFACING
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This specification is for the resurfacing oftennis courts at May Park and Fleming Tennis
Center. The work will include the repair of cracks, application of AcryT ech with UV -15
Colorguard acrylic emulsion or an approved equal. The courts at May Park will require
an asphalt overlay in addition to crack repair and color applications.
. .
1.2 CONSTRUCTION
A. Crack Preparation and Repair - All cracks should be free of dirt, dust or other foreign
matter. Crack should be filled with suitable material to provide solid base for crack
filler. AcryTech Crack Filler or approved equal should be packed into the crack with
trowel or pointing tool until flush with asphalt surface. Curing may cause the materials
to "dish out" and a second application may be necessary.
B. Surface Preparation - The surface to be coated must be sound, free from dirt, dust, or
other foreign matter. Prior to the application of color coatings, depressions greater than
1/8" (nickel) should be filled with Asphalt Emulsion Patch Mixusirig the following
formula:
Asphalt Emulsion
Water
Silica Sand
Portland Cement
27 Gallons
5 Gallons
200-300 lb.
*
Cement should be used to accelerate drying. Mix only as much as you will use
for patching. , Remainder will be set up and become hard.
D. Asphalt Emulsion Leveling Coat - In order to provide a tight, blemish free surface for
color application, one. or more applications of Asphalt Emulsion shall be applied to the
entire surface at a rate of.05 - .07 gallons/sq. yd. per coat in order to level any
irregularities in new asphalt surface. *No ponding should occur on finished surface.
Materials are to be mixed as follows:
Asphalt Emulsion
Water
Silica Sand ,
. 27 Gallons
10 - 13 Gallons
200 lb.
E. AcryTech with UV"-15 Colorguard or approved equal - Shall be applied to a properly
prepared surface in two:or three applications at a rate of .04 - ..05 gallons/sq. yd. per
coat. The succeeding. application is not to be applied until the previous coat is
thoroughly dry. Mixing of materials' as follows: .
AcryTech with UV-15 Colorguard
Water
Silica Sand
27 Gallons
15 - 18 Gallons
200 lb. *
EXISTING TENNIS COURT RESuRFACING
02511 A - 1
F. Marking Lines - AcryTech Line Paint or approved equal shall be applied when coatings
are thoroughly dry.
G. Limitations - Application temperatures shall be a minimum of 50 degrees. Do not apply
coatings when surface is set or if rain is imminent or forecast. Keep from freezing. Do
not store in direct sunlight.
END OF SECTION
,..
EXISTING TENNIS COURT RESURFACING
02511 A - 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 02511B - TENNIS COURT FENCING
1.1 FENCE F ABRlC
A. Height ofFence
1. Overall height of fence when erected shall be ten feet (10').
B. Chain Link Fabric - Zinc coated.
1. Fabric shall be 11 gauge, 1-3/4" mesh. This application covers chain link fabric
made from galvanized steel wire which has a zinc coating. The fabric shall be
steel of such quality and purity that, when drawn to the siie of wire specified, the
finished fencing shall be of uniform quality and have the properties and
characteristics' as prescribed in the specification. Wire used for the manufacture
of this fabric shall be capable of being woven into fabric. Fabric shall be
manufactured by Reeves Southeastern Corporation, Southeastern Wire Division.
of Tampa, Florida, or an approved equal.
C. Workmanship
1. Zinc coated chain link fabric shall be Class 1 and produced by methods recognized
as good commercial practices. Careful inspection shall be made to determine the
quality of zinc coatings.
1.2 FRAMEWORK, FITTINGS, AND GATES
A. Line Posts
1. Line posts shall be TYPE II 2.375 inches O.D. steel posts weighing 3.117 lbs. per
square foot. These posts shall not be splice welded in such a manner that the weld
appears above the grade line. The chain link fabric shall be tied to the line posts
with No.9 'gauge s~ft annealed galvanized steel tie wire.
B. Terminal and Gate Posts
1. Terminal and gate posts shall be TYPE II 2.875 inches O.D. steel round posts
weighing 4.64Ibs.'per lineal foot. These posts shall notbe splice welded in such
a manner that the weld appears above the grade line.
C. Terminal and Gate Post Fittings
1. Terminal and gate post fittings, including tension bands, brace connections and top
rail connections, shall be No;;14 gauge, hot-dipped galvanized, cold-rolled, carbon
steel. Top rail, brace and truss bands shall not be less than three quarter inch
(3/4") wide, secured by' five-sixteenths inch (5/16") diameter carriage bolts.
Tension bars shall not be less than three"-sixteenths inch (3/16") by three-quarters
BITUMINOUS TENNIS COURTS
02511 B-1
inch (3/4") and not less than two inches (2") shorter than the nominal height of the
fabric with which they areto be used. One tension bar shall be provided for each
end and gate post, and two for each corner and pull post.
D. Top and Intermediate Rail
1. Top and intermediate rail shall be TYPE II 1.660 inch O.D. round steel pipe
weighing 1.836 lbs~ per lineal foot. An outside sleeve type coupling measuring
not less than six inches (6") in length shall be provided at each interval of twenty-
one feet (21'). The chain link fabric shall be tied to the rails at intervals of twenty-
four inches (24") with 9 gauge soft annealed galvanized steel or aluminum single
wrapped ties or 13 gauge dead soft galvanized steel double wrapped ties.
E. Brace Rail for Terminal and Gate Post
1. Terminal and gate posts shall be strengthened and reinforced by braces meeting
the same specifications as the top rail. Braces shall be installed midway between
top rail and court surface and extend from each terminal post to the first adjacent ......
line post. Braces shall be securely fastened to posts by heavy pressed steel
connections and also be trussed from line post back to terminal post with five-
sixteenths inch (5/16") round truss rods complete with tightening turnbuckle.
F. Bottom Tension Wire
1. Bottom tension wires' shall be 7 gauge galvanized steel marcelled wire, ASTM
Designation A-824-84, Type I, aluminum coated or Type II, zinc coated. The
tension wire shall be fastened to the chain link fabric at intervals of twenty- four
inches (24") with 11 gauge galvanized steel hog rings.
G. Post Tops
1. Tops of line posts shall be of a steel or aluminum casting capable of providing a
through passage for top rail. Terminal post tops shall be. of a steel or aluminum
casting and be designed so as to exclude all moisture from the terminal post.
H. Gates
1. Gates shall not be less than four feet (4') wide and constructed and hung as
detailed on drawings. Frames shall be constructed of 1.660 inch O.D. round steel
pipe weighing l.836 lbs. per lineal foot. Gate frames shall be welded. Fabric
matching the fence fabric shall be installed in the frame by means of tension bars
and hook bolts. Hinges shall be of adequate strength to support the gate and have
large bearing surfaces for clamping in position. Gates shall be capable of being
opened and closed quickly and easily by one (1) person. Gates shall be equipped
with a positive latching device that will accommodate padlocking. A plunger rod,
catch and semi-automatic outer catch shall be installed on drive gates so as to
secure gate in an open posi.tion. Hinges, latches and catches shall be one of the
manufacturer's standard designs as selected and approved by the architect.
BITUMINOUS TENNIS COURTS
02511B - 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
.1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.3 . GENERAL
A.' Post Spacing and Settings
1. Line and terminal posts shall be set in concrete foundations not less than ten
inches (10") in diameter and not less than thirty-six inches (36") in depth. The
concrete shall have a design mix of2500 poundS per square inch. Spacing of posts
in the line of fence shall be uniform and not more than ten feet (10') apart.
B. Fabric Installation
1. The fabric shall be installed on the court side of posts. Bottom of fence fabric
shall be three-quarter inch (3/4") (plus or minus 1/4 inch) above the finished court
surface. The fabric shall be fUrnished with salvages knuckled on both ends.
C. Weights and Tolerances
1. Weights and tolerance shall conform to Federal Specification RR-F-19IJ, dated
July 22, 1981.
D. Inspection
1. All materials installed under this specification shall be subject to testing by the
owner at his expense. Any material so inspected and found to be not in strict
conformity with this specification shall be promptly removed and replaced by the
contractor at his expense.
END OF SECTION
/
BITUMINOUS TENNIS COURTS
02511 B-3
I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 02700 - STORM DRAINAGE .
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provIsIons, 'of the Contract, including the General and
Supplementary ,Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes sewerage and drainage systems outside the building. Systems
include the following:
1. Storm drainage.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Drainage Piping: . System of sewer pipe, fittings, and appurtenances for gravity flow of
storm drainage.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Gravity-Flow, Nonpressure-Piping Pressure Ratings: At least equal to system test
pressure.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. General; Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections. '
B. Product data for the following:
1. Storm-water pipe and fl~ed end sections.
C. Shop drawings for precast concrete manholes and other structures. Include frames,
covers, and grates.
D. Shop drawings for cast-in-placeconcrete or field-erected masonry manholes and other
structures. Include frames, covers, and grates.
STORM DRAINAGE
02700 - I
E. Inspection and test reports specified in the "Field Quality Control" Article.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Product Options: Drawings indicate sizes, profiles, connections, and dimensional
requirements of system .components and are based on specific manufacturer types'
indicated. Other manufacturers' products with equal p'erformance characteristics may be
considered.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect pipe, pipe fittings, and seals from dirt and damage.
B. Handle precast concrete manholes and other structures according to manufacturer's
rigging instructions.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Site Information: Perform site survey, research public utility records, and verify existing
utility locations.
B. Locate existing structures and piping to be closed and abandoned.
C. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied by the
Owner or others except when permitted under the following conditions and then only after
arranging to provide acceptable temporary utility services. '
I. Notify Engineer not less than 48 hours in advance of proposed utility interruptions.
2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without receiving Engineer's written
permISSIon.
1.9 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate storm drainage system connections to County storm sewer.
B. Coordinate storm drainage system connections to existing on-site storm sewer.
C. Coordinate with other utility work.
P ART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPES AND FITTINGS
A. Reinforced"-Concrete Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM C 76 (ASTM C 76M), Class III,
Wall B, for gasketedjoints.
STORM DRAINAGE
02700 - 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I'
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1. Gaskets: ASTM C 443 (ASTM C 443M), rubber o-ring.
2.2 OUTLET STRUCTURE
A. Precast Concrete:' ASTM C 478 (ASTM C 478M), precast, reinforced concrete, of depth
indicated, with provision for rubber gasket joints.
1. Ballast: Increase thickness of precast concrete sections or add concrete to base
section, as required to prevent floatation.
2. Base Section: 6-inch (150-mm) minimum thickness for floor slab and 4-inch
(lOO-mm)"minimum thicknes~ for walls and base riser section, andhaving a
separate base slab or base section with integral floor.
3. Riser Se~tions:4-inch (100-mm) minimum thickness, 48-inch (1220-mm)
diameter, and lengths to provide depth indicated.
4. Gaskets: ASTM C 443 (ASTM C 443M), rubber.
5. Steps: ASTM C 478 (ASTM C 478M) individual steps or ladder. Omit steps for
manholes less than 60 inches (1500 mm) deep. .
6. Pipe Connectors: ASTMC 923 (ASTM C 923M)~ resilient, of size required, for
each pipe connecting to base sectio:Q.
2.3 CONCRETE
A. General: Cast-in-placeconcrete according to ACI 318, ACI 350R, and the following:
1. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I
2. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33, sand. .
3. Coarse Aggregate: . ASTM C 33, crushed gravel.
4. Water: Potable.
B. Structures: Portland-cement design mix, 4000 psi (27.6 M'pa) minimum, with 0.45
maximum water-cement ratio.
1. Reinforcement'Fabric: ASTM A 185, steel, welded wire fabric, plain. .
2. Reinforcement Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60 (ASTM A 615M, Grade 400),
deformed steel.
.'
2.4 OUTF ALLS
A. Install precast flared end section's (FES). Construct headwall, apron, and tapered sides
of cast-in-place, reinforced concrete.
B. Riprap: Broken stone, irregular size and. shape, weighing 15 to 50 pounds (7 to 23 kg)
each.
C. Energy Dissipators: Construction as indicated, from materials indicated.
STORM DRAINAGE
02700 - 3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EARTHWORk
A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork."
3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. General: Include watertight joints.
B. Refer to Part 2 of this Section for detailed specifications for pipe and fitting products
listed below. Use pipe, fittings, and joining methods according to the following
applications.
C. Pipe Sizes 15 Inches and greater: Reinforced-concrete sewer pipe and fittings; o-ring
rubber gaskets; and gasketed joints.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. General Locations aiId Arrangements: Drawings (plans and details) indicate the general
location and arrangement. Install piping as indicated, to extent practical.
B. Install piping beginning at low point of systems, true to grades and alignment indicated
with unbroken continuity of invert. Install gaskets according to manufacturer's
recommendations for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements.
Maintain swab or drag in line and pull past each joint as it is completed.
C. Install gravity-flow-systems piping at constant slope between points and elevations
indicated. Install straight piping runs at constant slope, not less than that specified, where
slope is not indicated.
3.4 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION AND INSTALLATION
A. General: Join and install pipe and fittings according to the following.
B. Concrete Pipe and Fittings: Install according to ACPA "Concrete Pipe Handbook." Use
the following seals:
1. Round Pipe and Fittmgs: ASTM C 443 (ASTM C 443M), rubber gaskets.
3.5 STORM DRAINAGE INLET AND OUTFALL INSTALLATION
A. Install inlets that match grade, with flared end sections that match pipe, where indicated.
STORM DRAINAGE
02700 - 4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B. Construct riprap of broken stone, as indicated.
C. Install outlets that spill orito grade, with flared end 'sections that match pipe, where
indicated.
D. Construct energy dissipators at outlets; as indicated.
3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Place' cast-in-place concrete according to ACI 318, ACI 350R, and as indicated.
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Clear interior of piping and structures of dirt and superfluous material as the work
progresses. Maintain swab or drag in piping and pull past each joint as it is completed.
B. Inspect interior of piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage has
occurred. Inspect after approximately 24 inches (600 mm) of backfill is in place, and
again at completion of the Project.
1. Submit separate reports for each system inspection.
2. Defects requiring correction include the following:
a. Alignment: . Less than full diameter of inside of pipe is visual between
structures.
b. Deflection: Flexible piping with deflection that prevents passage of a ball or
cylinder ora size not less than 92.5 percent of piping diameter.
c. Crushed,. broken, cracked, or otherwise damaged piping.
d. Infiltratjon: Water leakage into piping.
e. Exfiltration: ,Water leakage from or around piping.
3. Replace defective piping using new materials and repeat inspections until defects
are within allowances specified.
4. . Reinspect and repeat 'procedure until results are satisfactory.
END OF SECTION 02700 .
STORM DRAINAGE
02700 - 5
I'i
.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 03300 - CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies cast-in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcing, mix design,
placement procedures, and ,finishes.
B. Cast-in-place concrete includes the following:
1. Foundations and footings.
2. Slabs-on-grade.
3. Foundation walls.
4. Equipment pads and bases.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B.. Product data for proprietary materials and items, including reinforcement and forming
accessories, admixtures, patching compounds, waterstops, joint systems, curing
compounds, dry-shake finish materials, and others if requested by Architect.
C. Shop drawings for reinforcement detailing fabricating, bending, and placing concrete
reinforcement. Comply with ACI 315 "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing
Reinforced Concrete Stru.ctures" showing bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar
diagrams, and arrangement of concrete reinforcement. Include special reinforcing
required for openings through concrete structures.
D. Laboratory test reports for concrete materials and mix design test.
E. Material certificates' in lieu of, material laboratory test reports when permitted by
Architect. Material certificates shall be. signed by manufacturer and Contractor, certifying
that each material item complies with or exceeds specified requirements. Provide
certification from admixtur~ manufacturers that chloride content complies with
specification requirements.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300-1
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of the following codes, specifications, and
standards, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified:
1. American Concrete Institute (ACI) 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete for
Buildings. "
2. ACI 318, "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete."
3. Concrete Re.infotcing Steel Institute (CRSI) "Manual of Standard Practice. "
B. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a testing agency acceptable to Architect to perform
material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixes.
C. Materials and installed work may require testing and retesting at any time during progress
of Work. Tests, including retesting of rejected materials for installed Work, shall be done
at Contractor's expense. . ,
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FORM MATERIALS
A. Forms for Exposed Finish Concrete: Plywood, metal, lumber, or another acceptable
material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.
B. Form Release Agent:' Provide commercial formulation form release agent with a
maximum of350 g/L volatile organic compounds (VOCs) that will not bond with, stain,
or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of
concrete surfaces.
C. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, adjustable-length, removable or snap-off metal form ties
designed to prevent form deflection and to prevent spalling of concrete upon removal.
Provide units that will leave no metal closer than 1-112 inches to the plane of the exposed
concrete surface.
1. Provide ties that, when removed, will leave holes not larger than 1 inch in diameter
in the concrete surface.
2.2 REINFORCING MATERIALS
A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed.
B. Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, plain, cold-drawn steel.
CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I,
I
I
I
I
I
'1
I
I
I
I
C. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, welded steel wire fabric.
'D. Supports for Reinforcement: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices .for spacing,
supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Use wire bar-
type supports complying with ,CRSI ~pecifications.
1. For slabs-on-grade, use supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where base
material will not support chair legs.
2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS. '
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I.
1. Use one brand of cement throughout Project unless otherwise acceptable to
Architect.
B. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Type F.
C Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33 and as specified. Provide aggregates from a
single source.
1. For exposed exterior surfaces, do not use fine or coarse aggregates that contain
substances that cause spalling.
2. Local aggregates not coIllplying with ASTM C 33 that have been shown to produce
concrete of adequate strength and durability by special tests or actual service may
be used when acceptable to Architect.
D . Water: Potable.
E. Fiber Reinforcement:. Polypropylene fibers engineered and designed for secondary
reinforcement of concrete slabs, complying with ASTM C 1116, Type ill, not less than
3/4 inch long. '
F. Admixture.s, General: Provide concrete admixtures that contain not more than 0.1
percent chloride ions.
G. Air-Entraining Adrnixt4re: ASTM C 260, certified by manufacturer to be compatible with
other required admixtures.
H. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A.
I. High-Range Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type F or Type.
1. Water-Reducing, Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type E.
CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300-3
K. Water-Reducing, Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D.,
2.4 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Reglets: See Division 7 Specifications.
B. Vapor Barrier (below. slab on grade): See Division 7 Specifications.
C. Waterproofing: Polymeric surface waterproofing membrane composed of three products,
a waterproofing membrane, an impermeable vapor seal and a protection course. Sealtight
Melnar by W. R. Meadows Co. or approved equal. See Division 7 Specifications.
2.5 PROPORTIONING AND DESIGN MIXES
A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete by either laboratory trial
batch or field experience methods as specified in ACI 301.
1. Limit use of fly' ash to not exceed 20 percent of cement content by weight. Replace
,cement with fly ash at 1.5 to 1.0 ratio.
B. Submit written reports to Architect of each proposed mix for each class of concrete at
least 15 days prior to start of Work. Do not begin concrete production until proposed
mix designs have been reviewed by Architect.
C. Adjustment to concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be requested by Contractor
when characteristics of materials, job conditions, weather, test results, or other
circumstances warrant, as accepted by Architect. Laboratory test data for revised mix
design and strength results must be submitted to and accepted by Architect before using
in Work.
D. Fiber Reinforcement: Add at manufacturer's recommended rate but not less than 1.5 lb
per cu. yd.
2.6 ADMIXTURES
A Use water-reducing admixture or high-range water-reducing admixture (superplasticizer)
in concrete, as required, for placement and workability.
B. Use accelerating admixture in concrete slabs placed at ambient temperatures below 50 deg
F.
C. Use air-entraining admixture in exterior exposed concrete unless otherwise indicated.
D. Use admixtures for water reduction and set accelerating. or retarding in strict compliance
CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300-4
I
I'
I
I
,I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
, ~..
with manufacturer'sdirections.
2.7 CONCRETE MIXING
A 'Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in the Work, indicating Project
identification name and number, date, mix type, mix time, quantity, and amount of water
introduced.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A., Coordinate the' installation of joint materials, vapor retarderlbarrier, and. other related
materials with placement of forms and reinforcing steel.
3.2 FORMS
A General: Design, erect, support, brace, and maintain formwork to support vertical,
lateral, static, and dynamic loads' that might be applied until co~crete structure can
support such loads. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of
correct size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position. Maintain formwork construction
tolerances and surface irregularities complying with the following AC1347 limits:
3.3 VAPOR RETARDER/BARRIER INSTALLATION
A General: Place vapor retarderlbarrier sheeting in position with longest' dimension parallel
with direction of pour.
B. Lap joints per manufacturer's specifcations, and seal with manufacturer's recommended
mastic or pressure-sensitive tape.
3.4 PLACING REINFORCEMENT
A. General: Comply with Concrete Reinforcing Steel rnstitute's recommended practice for
lip lacing Reinforcing Bars, II for details arid methods of reinforcement placement and
supports and as specified.
1. Avoiding cutting or puncturing vapor retarderlbarrier during reinforcement
. placement and concreting operations. Repair damages.before placing concrete.
B. Clean reinforcement ofloose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other materials that reduce
or destroy bond with concrete. '
CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300~5
C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement.againstdisplacement. Locate and
support reinforcing by metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers, and hangers, as approved
by Architect. -' '
D. Place reinforcement to rDaintain minimum coverages as indicated for concrete protection.
Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in po'sition
during concrete placement operations. Set wire ties so ends are directed into concrete,
not toward exposed concrete surfaces.
E. Install welded wire fabric in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least
one full mesh and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent
continuous laps in either direction.
3.5 JOINTS
A. Construction Joints: Locate and install construction joints so they do not impair strength
or appearance of the structure, as acceptable to Architect.
B. Provide keyways at least 1-1/2 inches deep in construction joints in walls and slabs and
between walls and footings. Bulkheads designed and accepted for this purpose may be
used for slabs.
C. Place construction joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement
across construction joints except as indicated otherwise. Do not continue reinforcement
through sides of strip placements.
D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Construct isolation joints in slabs-on-grade at points
of contact between slabs-on-grade and vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals,
foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated.
1. Joint fillers and sealants are specified in Division 7.
E. Contraction (Control) Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Construct contraction joints in slabs-on-
grade to form panels of patterns as shown. Use full depth keyed joints or saw cut 1/8
inch wide by one-fourth of slab depth or inserts 1/4 inch wide by one-fourth of slab depth,
unless otherwise indicated.
1. Saw cut joints as sOOn as possible after slab finishing without dislodging aggregate.
2. Joint fillers and sealants are specified in Division 7.
3.6 INSTALLING EMBEDDED ITEMS
A. General: Set and build into formwork anchorage devices and other embedded items
required for other work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use
1
CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300-6
I
I
I
I'
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.
.
I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
setting drawings,' diagrams., instructions, and directions provided by' suppliers ofitems to
be attached.
/
.I
CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300-7
B. Forms for Slabs: Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to
achieve required elevations and contours in finished surfaces. Provide and secure units
to support screed strips using strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.
3.7 PREP ARING FORM SURF ACES
A. General: Coat contact surfaces offorms with an approved, nonresidual, low- VOC, form-
coating compound before placing reinforcement.
B. Do not allow excess form-coating material to accumulate in forms or come into contact
with in-place concrete surfaces against which fresh concrete will be placed. Apply
according to manufacturer's instructions.
3.8 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
';
A. Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation,
reinforcing steel, and items to be embedded or cast in. Notify other trades to permit
installation of their work.
B. General: Comply with ACI 304, "Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and
Placing Concrete," and as specified.
C. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be
placed on concrete that has hardened sufficiently to cause seams or planes of weakness.
If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as specified.
Deposit concrete to avoid segregation at its final location. '
D. Placing Concrete in Forms: Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers no deeper than
24 inches and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. Where placement consists
of several layers, place each layer while preceding layer is still plastic to avoid cold joints.
1. Consolidate placed concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by
hand-spading,rodding, or tamping. Use equipment and procedures for
consolidation of concrete complying with ACI 309.
J
2. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw
vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations no farther than the visible
effectiveness of the' machine. Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate placed layer and
at least 6 inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of
concrete that have begun to set. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to
time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement
and other embedded items without causing mix to segregate.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETEs
03300-8
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
E., Placing Concrete, Slabs: Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous
operation, within limits of construction joints, until completing placement of a panel or
section.
1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so that concrete is thoroughly
worked around reinforcement" other embedded items and into corners.
2. Bring slab surfaces to correct level with a straightedge and strike off. Use bull
floats or darbies to smooth surface free of humps or hollows. Do not disturb slab
surfaces prior to beginning finishing operations.
3. Maintain reinforcing in proper position on chairs during concrete placement.
F. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with provisions of ACI 306 and as follows. Protect
concrete wo~k from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost,
fr~ezing actions, or low temperatures.
G. Hot-Weather Placement: When hot weather conditions exist that would impair quality
and strength of concrete, place concrete in compliance with provisions of ACI305.
J.9MONOLITIllC SLAB FINISHES
A. Scratch Finish: Apply scratch finish to monolithic slab surfaces to receive concrete floor
topping or mortar setting beds for tile, portland cement terrazzo, and other bonded
applied cementitious finish flooring material, and where indicated.
1. After placing slabs, and leveling, roughen surface before final set with stiff brushes,
brooms, or rakes. Slope surfaces to drains where required.
B. Float Finish: Apply float finish to monolithic slab surfaces to receive trowel finish and
other finishes as specified; slab surfaces to be covered with - membrane or elastic
waterproofing, membrane or elastic roofing, or sand-bed terrazzo; and where indicated.
1. After screeding, consolidating, and leveling concrete slabs, do not work surface
until ready for floating. Begin floating, using float blades or float shoes only, when
, surface water has disappear~ or when concrete has stiffened sufficiently to permit
operation of power-driven, floats, or both: Consolidate surface with power-driven
floats or by hand-floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Finish
surfaces to tolerances ofF(F) 20 (floor flatness) and F(L) 15 (floor levelness); [F
(F) 15 min. local: F (L) 10 min. local], measured according to ASTM E 1155. Cut
down high spots 'and, fill low spots. Uniformly slope surfaces to drains.
Immediately after leveling, refloat surface to a uniform, smooth, granular texture.
C. Trowel Finish: Apply a trowel finish'to monolithic slab surfaces exposed to view and slab
surfaces to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile, paint, or
another thin film-finish coating system.
CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300-9
1. After floating, begin first trowel-finish operation using a power-driven trowel.
Begin final troweling when surface produces a ringing sound as trowel is moved
over surface. Consolidate concrete surface by final hand-troweling operation, free
of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance, and finish surfaces to
tolerances ofF(F) 20 (floor flatness) and F(L) 15 (floor levelness) [F (F) 15 min.
local: F (L) 10 min. local] measured according to ASTM E 1155. Grind smooth
any surface defects that would telegraph through applied floor covering system.
D. Trowel and Fine Broom Finish: Where ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed with thin-
set mortar, apply a trowel finish as specified, then immediately follow by slightly
scarifying the surface with a fine broom.
E. Nonslip Broom Finish: Apply a nonslip broom finish to exterior concrete platforms,
steps, and ramps, and elsewhere as indicated.
1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen concrete' surface by brooming
with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required
final finish with Architect before application.
3.10 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS
A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures for passage of work by
other trades, unless otherwise shown or directed, after work of other trades is in place.
Mix, place, and cure concre~e as specified to blend with in-place construction. Provide
other miscellaneous concrete filling shown or required to complete Work.
B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still
green and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections,
and terminations slightly rounded.
C. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide minimum 4" thick machine and equipment
bases and foundations or as shown on drawings. ,Set anchor. bolts for machines and
equipment to template at correct elevations, complying with diagrams or templates of
manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment.
3.11 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION
A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature.drying and excessive cold or hot
temperatures. In hot, ~ry, and windy weather protect'concrete from rapid moisture loss
before and during finishing operations with an evaporation-control material. Apply
according to manuf~cturer's instructions after screeding and bull floating, but before
power floating and troweling.
CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300-10
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
. .... , ..
B. Start initial curing ~s soorl as free water has disapp~ed from concrete surface after
placing and finishing. We.titherpermitting, keep continuously moist for not less than 7
days. ' .
C. ,Curing Methods: Cure concrete by curing compound, by moist curing, by moisture-
retaining cover curing, or by combining these methods, as specified.
D. Apply curing compound on exposed interior slabs and on exterior slabs, walks, and curbs
as follows:
1. Apply curing compound to concrete slabs as soon as final finishing operations are
complete (within 2 hours and after surface water sheen has disappeared). Apply
uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to
, manufacturer's directions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours
after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during
curing period.
2. Use membrane curing compounds that will not affect surfaces to be covered with
finish materials applied directly to concrete.
E. Curing Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, j,ncluding underside of beams,
supported slabs, and other similar surfaces, by moist curing with forms in place for the full
curing period or until forms are removed. If forms are removed, continue curing by
methods specified above, as applicable.
F. Curing Unformed Surfaces: Cure unformed surfaces, including slabs, floor topping, and
other flat surfaces, by applying the appropriate curing method.
1. Final cure concrete surfaces to receive finish flooring with a moisture-retaining
cover, unless otherwise directed.
3.12 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION
A' General: The Owner will employ a testing agency to perform tests and to submit test
reports. '
B. Sampling and testing for quality control during concrete placement may include the
follo~g, as directed by Architect;
1. Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C 172, except modified for slump to comply with
ASTM C 94.
a. Slump: ASTM C 143; orie test at point of discharge for each day's pour of
each type of concrete; additional tests when concrete consistency seems to
have changed.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300-11
b. Air Content: ASTM C 173, volumetric method for lightweight or normal
weight co~crete; ASTM C 231, pressure method for normal weight concrete;
one for each day's pour of each type of air-entrained concrete.
c. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature
is 40 deg F (4 deg C) and below, when 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and
one test'for each set of compressive-strength specimens. '
d. Compression Test Specimen: ASTM C 31; one set offour standard cylinders
for each compressive-strength test, unless otherwise directed. Mold and store
cylinders for laboratory-cured test specimens except when field-cured test
specimens are required.
e, Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; one set for each day's pour
exceeding 5 cu. yd, plus additional sets for each 50 cu. yd. more than the first
25 Cu. yd. of each concrete class placed in anyone day; one specimen ,tested ,
at 7 days, two specimens tested at 28 days, and one specimen retained in
reserve for later testing if required.
2. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five strength tests for a given
class of concrete, conduct testing from at least five randomly selected batches or
from each batch if fewer than five are used. '
3. When total quantity of a given class of concrete is less than 50 cu. yd., Architect
may waive strength testing if adequate evidence of sat,isfactory strength is provided.
4. When strength' of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion
laboratory-cured cylinders, evaluate current operations and provide corrective
procedures for protecting and curing the in-place concrete.
5. Strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory if averages of sets of three
consecutive strength test results equal or exceed specified compressive strength' and
no individual strength test result falls below specified compressive strength by more
than 500 psi.
C. Test results will be reported in writing to Architect, Structural Engineer, ready-mix
producer, and Contractor within 24 hours after tests. Reports of compressive strength
tests shall contain the Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement,
name of concrete testing service, concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in
structure, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials,
compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7-day tests and 28-day tests.
D. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may
be permitted but shall not be used as the sole basis for acceptance or rejection.
E. Additional Tests: The testing agency will make addition~ tests of in-place concrete when
test results indicate specified concrete strengths and' other characteristics have not
CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300-12
I
I
I
I
,I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
been attained ui the stIu~, as directed by ArchiteCt. Testing agency may conduct tests
to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by
other methods as directed. '
END OF SECTION 03300
/
CAST-IN~LACECONCRETE
03300-13
I,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 05120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general. provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
,A. This Section includes fabrication and erection of structural steel work, as shown on
drawings including schedules,notes~ and details showing size and location of
members, typical connections, and types of steel required.
1. Structural steel is that work defined in American Institute of Steel Construction
(AISC) "Code of Standard Practice" and'as otherwise shown on drawings.
2. Miscellaneous Metal Fabrications are specified elsewhere in Division 5.
3. Refer to Division 3 for anchor bolt installation in concrete, Division 4 for anchor
bolt installation in masonry.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract
and Division 1 'Specification Sections.
B. Shop Drawings prepared under the supervision of an AISC approved fabrication shop.
including compete details and schedules for fabrication and assembly of structural steel
members, procedures, and diagrams.
1. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent
data. Indicate weld.s by stan4ard A WS symbols, distinguishing between shop
and field welds, and show size, length, and type of each weld.
2: Provide setting drawings, templates, and directions for installation for anchor
bolts and other anchorages to be installed as work of other sections.
1.4 QUALITYASSURANCE
B. Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions offollowing, except as otherwise
indicated:
1. American Institute' of Sfeel Construction (AISC) "Code of Standard Practice for
Steel Buildings and Bridges."
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05120 - 1
a. Paragraph 4.2.1 of the above code is hereby modified by deletion of the
following sentence:
1) "This approval constitutes the owner's acceptance of all responsibility
for the design adequacy of any detail configuration of connections
developed by the fabricator as'a part of his preparation of these shop
drawings. "
2. AISC's "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings," including "Commentary."
3. "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
approved by the Research Council on Structural Connections.
4. American Welding Society (AWS) D1.1 "Structural Welding Code- SteeL"
5. ASTM A 6 "General Requirements for Delivery of Rolled Steel Plates, Shapes,
Sheet Piling, and Bars'for Structural Use."
C. Qualifications for Welding Work: Qualify welding procedures and welding operators
in accordance with A WS "Qualification" requirements. ,
1. Provide certification that welder to be employed in work have satisfactorily
passed A WS qualification tests.
2. If recertification of welders is required, retesting will be Contractor's
responsibility.
C. Installer Qualifications: engage an experienced Installer who has completed structural
steel work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and
with a record of successful in-service performance.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to site at such intervals to ensure uninterrupted progress of work.
B. Deliver anchor bolts an anchorage devices, which are to be embedded in cast-in-place
, concrete or masonry, in ample time to not to delay work.
C. ' Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel
members off ground by using pallets, platforms, or other supports. p'rotect steel
members and packaged materials from erosion and deterioration. Ifbolts and nuts
become dry or rusty, clean and relubricate before use. '
1. Do not store materials on structure in a manner tpat might cause distortion or
damage to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged
materials or structures as directed.
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05120 - 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.6 SEQUENCING
A. Supply anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without
delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, templates, instructions~ and directions,
as required, for installation.
(
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Metal Surfaces, General: For fabrication of work that will be exposed to view, use
only materials that are smooth and free of surface blemishes including pitting, rust and
scale seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, and roughness. Remove such
blemishes by grinding, prior to cleaning, treating, and applying surface finishes.
B. Structural ~teel Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A-36.
D. Cold-Formed Steel Tubing:; ASTM A500, Grade B.
E. Hot-Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A SOL
F. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, TypeE or S, Grade B; or ASTM A SOL
G. Steel Casting: ASTM A 27, Grade 65-35, medium-strength carbon'steeI.
G. Headed Stud-Type Shear Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grade 1015 or 1020, cold-
finished carbon steel with dimensions complying with AISC Specifications.
H. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A 307, nonheaded type unless otherwise indicated.
I. Unfinished Threaded Fasteners: ASTMA 307, Grade A, regular low-carbon steel
bolts and nuts.
J. . High-Strength Steel Castings:, 'ASTM A'148~ Grade 80-50 (ASTM A 148M,
(Grade 550-345).
1. Direct-Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, Type490, uncoated.
K. Electrodes for Welding: Comply with A WS requirements.
L. Structural Steel Primer Paint.SSPC -Paint2; red lead-iron oxide,- oil alkyd.
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05120 - 3
M. Nonmetallic Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive,
nonstaining product containing selected silica sands, Portland ~ement, shrinkage
compensating agents, plasticiZing and water-reducing agents, complying with CE-
CRD-C621. '
2.2 FABRICATION
A Shop Fabrication and Assembly: Fabricate and assemble structural assemblies in shop
to greatest extent possible. Fabricate items of structural steel in accordance with
AISC Specifications and as indicated on final shop drawings. Provide camber in
, structural members where indicated.
1. Mark and match-mark materials for field assembly. Fabricate for delivery a
sequence that will expedite erection and minimize field handling of materials.
2. Where finishing is required, complete assembly, including welding of units,
before start of finishing operations. Provide finish surfaces of members exposed
in final structure free. of markings, burrs, and other defects.
B. Connections: Weld or bolt shop connections, as indicated.
C. Bolt field connections, except where welded connections or other connections are
indicated.
1. Provide high-strength threaded fasteners for principal bolted connections, except
where unfinished bolts are indicated.
2. Provide unfinished threaded fasteners for only bolted connections of secondary
framing members to primary members (including purlins, girts, and other framing
members taking only nominal stresses) and for temporary bracing to facilitate
erection.
D. High-Strength Bolted Construction: Install high-strength threaded fasteners in
accordance with AISC "Specifications for Structural Joints using ASTM A 325 or A
490 Bolts."
E. Welded Construction: comply with AWS Code for procedures, appearance and
quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.
F. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will produce true alignment of
axes without warp.
G. Holes for Other Work: . Provide holes required for securing other work to structural
steel framing and for passage of other work through steel framing members, as shown
on shop drawings.
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05120 - 4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
H. Provide threaded nuts welded to framing and other sp~cialty items as indicated to '
receive other work. ' .
"
1. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. Do not flame-cut holes or
enlarge holes by burning. Drill holes in bearing plates.
2.3 SHOP CONNECTIONS
A.. Shop install and tighten nonhigh-strength bolts, except where high-strength bolts are
indicated.
B. Shop install and tighten high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for
Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
C. Shop install and tighten high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Load and Resistance
Factor Design Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
1. Bolts: ASTM A 325 high:.strength bolts, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Connection Type: Snug tightened, unless indicated as slip-critical, direct-
tension, or tensioned shearlbearing connections.
D. Welded Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for procedures, appearance and
quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.
1. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true
alignment of axes without warp.
2. Verify that weld sizes, fabrication sequence, and equipment used for
architecturally exposed structural steel will limit distortions to allowable
tolerances. Prevent surface bleeding of back-side welding on exposed steel
surfaces. Grind smooth exposed fillet welds 1/2 inch and larger. Grind flush,
butt welds. Dress exposed welds.
2.4 SHOP PAINTING
A. General: Shop-paint structural steel, except those members or portions. of members to
be embedded in concrete or mortar. Paint embedded steel that is partially exposed on
'exposed portions and initial 2 inches of embedded areas only.
1. Do not paint surfaces to be welded or high-strength bolted with friction-type
connections.
2. Apply 2 coats of paint to surfaces that are inaccessible after assembly or
erection. Change color of second coat to distinguish it from first.
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05120 - 5
B. Surface Preparation: After inspection and before shipping, clean steelwork to be
painted. Remove loose rust, loose mill scale, and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Clean,
steel in accordance with Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) as follows:
1. SP-2 "Hand-Tool Cleaning."
2. SP-3 "Power Tool Cleaning".
C. Painting: Immediately after surface preparation, apply structural steel primer paint in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions and at a rate to provide a dry film
thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. Use painting methods that result in full coverage of
joints, comers, edges, and exposed surfaces.
2.5 GALVANIZING
A. Hot-Dip .Galvanized Finish: Apply zinc coating by the hot-dip process to structural
. steel indicated for galvanizing according to ASTM A 123.
2.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. General: Materials and fabrication procedures are subject to inspection and tests in
mill, shop, and field, conducted by a qualified inspection agency. Such inspections and
tests will not relieve Contractor of responsibility for providing materials and
fabrication procedures in compliance with specified requirements.
1. Promptly remove and replace materials or fabricated components that do not
comply.
B. Design of Members and Connections: Details shown ~e typical; similar details apply to,
similar conditions, unless otherwise indicated. Verify dimensions at site whenever
possible without causing delay in the work.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 ERECTION
A. Temporary Shoring and Brac~ng: Provide temporary shoring and bracing members with
connections of sufficient strength to bear imposed loads. Remov~ temporary members
and connections when permanent members are in place and final.connections are Il,lade.
Provide temporary guy lines to achieve proper alignment of structures as erection
proceeds. '
B. Temporary Planking: ProVide temporary'planking and working platforms as necessary
to effectively complete work.
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05120 - 6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I"
I
I
D
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I,
I
I
I
I
. ..:.:
C. Setting Base and Bearing Plates: Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-
reducing materials and roughen surfaces prior to setting base and bearing plates. Clean
bottom surface of base and bearing plates.
1. Set loose and attached' base and bearing plates for structural members on wedges,
or other adjusting devices. ,
2. Tighten anchor bolts after supported members have been positioned and plumbed.
Do not remove wedges or shim~ but, ifprotruding, cut off flush with edge of base
or bearing plate prior topaclqng with grout. ' . ,
3. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain. Finish
exposed surfaces, protect installed materials, and allow to cure.
4. For proprietary grout materials, comply with manufacturer's instructions.
D. Field Assembly: Set structural frames accurately to lines and elevations indicated. Align
and adjust various members forming part of complete frame or structure before
pennanently fastening. Clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in
pennanent contact before assembly. Perfonn necessary adjustments to compensate for
discrepancies in elevations and alignment.
E. Level and plumb individual members of structure within specified AISC tolerances.
F. Establish required leveling and phimbing measur,ements on mean operating temperature
of structure. Make allowances for difference between temperature at. time of erection
and mean temperature at which structure will be when completed and in service.
G.Splice members only where indicated and accepted on shop drawings.
H. Erection Bolts: On exposed welded cons~ruction, remove erection bolts, fill holes with
plug welds, and grind smooth, at exposed surfaces.
1. Comply with AISC Specifications 'for bearing, adequacy of temporary connections,
alignment, arid removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds!
2. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or by using drift pin~, except in
secondary bracing members., Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts.
. '
I. Gas Cutting: Do not use cutting torches in field for correcting fabrication errors in
primary,structural framing. Cutting will be permitted only on secondary members that
are not under stress, as acceptable to Architect. Finish gas-cut sections equal to a
sheared appearance when permitted:'
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Owner will engage an independent testing and inspecting agency to, perform field
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05120 -7
"
inspections and tests and to prepare test reports.
1. Testing agency will conduct and interpret tests and state in each report whether
tested Work complies with or deviates from requirements.
B. Correct deficiencies in or remove and replace structural steel that inspections and test
reports indicate do not comply with specified requirements.
C. Additional testing, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance
of corrected W o~k with specified requirements. '
D. Field-bolted connections, wille tested and inspected according to RCSC's "Specification
for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
3.3 CLEANING
A Touchup Pointing: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections,
, and abraded areas of shop paint. Apply paint to exposed areas using same material as
used for shop painting.
1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils .
B. Galvanized Surfaces: clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply
galvanizing repair paint according to ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION 05120
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05120 - 8
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B
D
o
o
D
I
I
I
I
D
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 13125 - METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Structural framing.
2. Roof panels.
3. Wall panels and liners.
4. Insulation.
5. Building components,oas follows:
a. Personnel doors, frames, and hardware.
b. Service counter, Service counter doors, personnel doors, frames, and hardware.
c. Windows.
6. Accessories and trim.
7. ,Plumbing fixtures, toilet accessories
1.2 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
. '
A. General: Provide a complete, integrated set of metal building system manufacturer's
standard mutually dependent components and assemblies that form a metal building system
capable of withstanding structural and other loads, thermally induced movement, and
, exposure to weather without failure or infiltration of water into building interior. Include
primary and secondary framing, roof and wall panels, and accessories complying with
requirements indicated, including those in this Article.
B. Metal Building System Design: Of size, spacing, slope, and spans indicated, and as
follows:
1. Eave Height: Manufacturer's standard height, as indicated by nOl;ninal height on
Drawings.
2. Roof Slope: 1 inch per 12 inches'(1:12).
3. Roof System: Manufacturer's standard standing-seam roofpartels (color dark green).
4. Exterior Wall System:\. Manufacturer's standard (board and batten or a horizontal
siding appearance) field-assembled wall panels (color beige).
5. Interior Wall System: Manufacturer's standard smooth interior face field-assembled
wall panels (color to be selected from manufactUrer's standard colors).
C. Structural Performance: Provide metal building systems capable of withstanding the effects
of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions
indicated: '
METAL BUILDl'NG SYSTEMS
13125 -1
I. Engineer metal building systems according to procedures in MBMA's "Low Rise
Building Systems ManuaL"
2. Design Loads: Comply with load requirements of MBMA's "Low Rise Building
Systems Manual." ,
3. Wind Loads: Include horizontal loads induced by a basic wind speed corresponding
to a 50-year mean-recurrence interval at Project site.
4. Collateral Loads: Include additional dead loads other than the weight of metal
building system for. permanent items such as sprinklers, mechanical systems,
electrical systems, and ceilings.
5. Load Combinations: Design metal building systems to withstand the most criti~al
effects of load factors and load combinations.
6. Deflection Limits: Engineer assemblies to withstand design loads with deflections
no greater than the following:
a. Purlins and Rafters: Vertical deflection of 1/180 of the span.
b. Girts: Horizontal deflection of 1/240 of the span.
c. Roof Panels: Vertical deflection 1/240 of the span. .
d. Wall Panels: Horizontal deflection of 1/240 of the span.
7. Design secondary framing system to accommodate deflection of primary building
structure and construction tolerances, and to maintain clearances at openings.
D. Seismic Performance: Design and engineer metal building systems capable of withstanding
the effects of earthquake motions determined according to the building code in effect for
this Project or ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures":
Section 9, "Earthquake Loads," whichever is more stringent.
E. Thermal Movements: Provide metal building roof and 'wall panel systems that allow for
thermal movements resulting from the following maximun1 change (range) in ambient and
surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of
components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. '
Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat
gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
F. Air Infiltration for Roof Panels: Provide roof panel assemblies with permanent resistance
to air leakage through assembly of not more than 0.09 cfmlsq. ft. (0.45 Lis per sq. m) of
fixed roof area when tested according to ASTM E 1680 at a static-air-pressure difference
of 4 lbflsq. ft. (192 Pa). .
G. Air Infiltration for Wall Panels: Provide wall panel assemblies with permanent resistance
to air leakage through assembly of not more than 0.09 cfmlsq. ft. (0.45 Lis per sq. m) of
fixed wall area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a static-air-pressure difference of
4 Ibflsq. ft. (192 Pa).
H. Water Penetration for Roof Panels: Provide roof panel assemblies with no water
penetration as defined in the test method when tested according to ASTM E 1646 at a
minimum differential pressure of 20'percent of inward-acting, wind-load design pressure
of not less than 6.24 Ibf/sq. ft. (300 Pa) and not more than 12 Ibflsq. ft. (575 Pa).
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
13125-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
'I
I
I
I
,
I
I
I
I
D
I
I
I
1. Water Penetration for Wall Panels: Provide wall panel assemblies with no water
penetration as defined in the test method when tested according to ASTM E 331 at a
minimum differential pressure of 20 percent of inward-acting, wind.,.load design pressure,
of not less than 6.241bflsq:fi.(300 Pa) and not more than' 12 Ibflsq. ft(575 Pa).
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A.. ' Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual
components and profiles, and finishes for each type of the following metal building system
components:
1. Structural-framing system.
2. Roof panels.
3. Wall panels.
4. Trim and closures.
5. Doors.
6. Windows.
7. Accessories and toilet accessories.
8. Plumbing Fixtures
9. Electrical fixtures~
B.' Shop Drawings: For the following metal building system components. Include plans,
. elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work.
1. For installed components indicated to comply with design loads, include structural
analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer:responsible for
their preparation.
2. Anchor-Bolt Plans: Include location, diameter, and projection of anchor bolts
required to attach metal building to foundation. Indicate column reactions at each
location.
3. Structural-Framing Drawings: Show complete fabrication of primary and secondary
framing. Indicate welds and bolted connections, distinguishing between shop and
field applications. Include tI:ansverse cross-sections.
4.' ~ Roof aI).d Wall Panel Layout Drawings: Show layouts of panels on support framing,
details of edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, custom profiles, supports,
anchorages, trim, flashings, closures, and special details. Distinguish between
factory-and field-assembled work. .
5. . Personnel Door Schedule: Provide schedule of doors and frames, using the same
. reference numbers as indicated on Drawings. Include details of reinforcement and
installation requirements for finish hardware.
a. Provide hardware schedule.
6. Accessory Drawings: Include plahs, elevations and details of toilet accessories,
plumbing fixtures, plumbing and electrical design.
C. Samples' for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
13125-3
available for each type of the following products with factory-applied color finishes:
1. Roof panels.
2. Wall panels.
3. Trim and closures.
4. Doors.
5. Windows.
6. Accessories.
D. Samples for Verification: For the following products, in manufacturer's standard sizes,
showing the full range of color, texture, and pattern variations expected, in the profile and
style indicated. Prepare Samples from the same material to be used for the Work.
1. Roof Panels: 12 inches (300 mm) long by actual panel width. Include clips, caps,
battens, fasteners, closures, and other exposed panel accessories.
2. Wall Panels: 12 inches (300mm) long by actual panel width. Include clips, caps,
battens, fasteners, closures, and other exposed panel accessorie's.
3. Trim and Closures: -i2 inches (300 mm) long. Include fasteners and other exposed
accessones.
E. Product Certificates: Signed by manufact~ers of metal building systems certifying that
products furnished comply with requirements.
1. Letter of Design Certification: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional
engineer. Include the following:
a. Name and location of Project.
b. Order number.
c. Name of manufacturer.
d. Name of Contractor.
e. Building dimensions, including width, length, height, and roof slope.
f. Indicate compliance with AISC standards for hot-rolled steel and AISI
standards for cold-rolled steel, including edition dates of each standard.
g. Governing building code and year of edition.
h. Design Loads: Include dead load, roof live load, collateral loads, roof snow
load; deflection, wind loadslspeeds and exposure, seismic zone or effective
peak velocity-related acceleration/peak acceleration, and auxiliary loads
(cranes). -
1. Load Combinations: Indicate that loads were applied acting simultaneously
with concentrated loads, according to governing building code.
F. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that they comply with
requirements. Include evidence of manufacturing experience.
G. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Erector Qualifications: An experienced erector who has specialized in erecting and
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
13125-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
'I
I'
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
'm
m
I
I
I
a
o
I
I
I'
n
I
I
I
I
I
I
installing work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and
who is acceptable to manufacturer.
B. Professional EngineerQualifications: Aprofessional ~ngineer who is legally qualified to
practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing
engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are, defined as those
performed for installations of metal building systems that are similar to ,those indicated for
this Project in material, design, and extent.
C. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing metal building systems
similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service
, performance.
1. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings, and comprehensive
engi,neering analysis by a qualified professional engineer.
D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of metal building system component through one
source from a single manufacturer.
, E. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of metal
building system and are based on the specific system indicated by SUPERSECUR. Other
manufacturers' systems with equal performance characteristics may be considered.
1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Engineer, except with
Engineer's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive
explanatory data to Engineer for review.
F. Cold-Formed Steel: Comply with AISI "Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel
Structural Members".
G. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. Review methods and
procedures related to metal building systems including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Inspect and discuss condition of foundations and other preparatory work performed
, by other trades.
. 2. Review and finali2;e construction schedule and verify availability of materials,
Erector's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid
delays.
3. Review required testing, inspecting, and certifying procedures.
4. Review weather and forecasted weather conditions and procedures for unfavorable
conditions.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver components, sheets, panels, and other manufactured items so as not to be damaged
or deformed. Package roof and wall panels for protection during transportation and
handling.
B. Handling: Unload, store, and erect roof and wall panels to prevent bending, warping,
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
13125 - 5
twisting, and surface damage.
C. Stack materials on platforms or pallets, covered with tarpaulins' or other suitable
weathertight and ventilated covering. Store roof and wall panels to ensure dryness. Do not
store panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other
surface damage.
D. Protect plastic insulation as follows:
I. Do not expose to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and
concealment.
2. Protect against ignition a~ all times. Do not deliver plastic insulation materials to
Project site before installation time.
3. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in
each area of construction.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS '
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when weather conditions permit roof
and wall panel installation to be performed according to manufacturer's written instructions
and warranty requirements.
B. Field Measurements: Verify metal building system foundations by field measurements
before metal building fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress. to avoid delaying the Work.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete foundations and casting of anchor-bolt inserts into
foundation walls and footings.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of
other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the ,Contract Documents and shall
be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under
requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. Special Warranty onPanels: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer agreeing to repair
or replace roof and wall panels that fail in materials or workmanship within specified
warranty period.
I. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion.
C. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Written warranty, signed by manufacturer agreeing
to repair finish or replace metal panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory-
applied fInishes within specified warranty period. Deterioration of finish includes, but is
not limited to, color fade, chalking, cracking, peeling, and lossoffilm integrity.
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
13125-6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I'
I
I
g
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1. Warranty Period for Roof Panels: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
2.' Warranty Period for Wall Panels: 20 years from'date of Substantial Completion.
y' - .
D. Special WarrantY on Standing-Seam Roof Panel Weathertightness: Written warranty,
signed by manufacturer agreeing to repair or replace standing-seam roof panel assemblies
that fail to remain weathertight within specified warranty period. .
1. Warranty Period: 20 y~ars from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS'
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
. products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
folloWing:
1. SUPER SECUR Manufacturing Company,
City of Industry ,California.
2.2 STRUCTURAL-FRAMING MA TERlALS
A. Structural-Steel Shapes: ASTM A 36
'B. Steel Tubing or Pipe: ASTM A500, Grade B
C. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A446, Grade A, with G60 coating
designation; mill phosphatized.
D. Non-High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 307, Grade A; carbon-steel, hex-
head bolts; carbon-steel nuts; and flat, unhardened steel washers.
E. Primers: As selected by manufacturer for resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion,
compatibility with ftnish paint 'Systems, capability to provide a sound foundation for fteld-
applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure.
2.3 PANEL MA TERlALS
A. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet Prephinted with Coil Coating: Steel sheet metallic coated by
the hot-dip process and.prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with
ASTM A 755/A 755M and the following requirements:
I. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating
designation; structtirahluality ~
2. Surface: Smooth, flat, mill finish.
3. Surface: Manufacturer's standard stucco-embossed finish.
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
13125 -7
B. Panel Sealants: Provide the following:
1. Sealant Tape: Pressure~sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound
sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag,
nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide and_1/8 inch (3 mm) thick.
2. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920; one:-part elastomeric polyurethane, poly sulfide, or
silicone-rubber sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal
joints in panels arid-remain weathertight; and as recommended by metal building
system manufacturer.
2.4 F ABRICA TION, GENERAL
A. General: Design components and field connections required for erection to permit easy
assembly and disassembly.
I. Fabricate components ina manner that once assembled.in the shop, they may be
disassembled, repackaged, and reassembled in the field.
2. Mark each piece and part of the assembly to correspond with previously prepared
erection drawings, diagrams, and instruction manuals.
3. Fabricate framing to produce clean, smooth cuts and bends. Punch holes of proper
size, shape, and location. Cold-formed members shall be free of cracks, tears, and
ruptures.
B. Factory Priming for Field-Painted Finish: Where field painting after installation is
indicated, apply the specifi~d air-dried primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating.
I. Prime primary, secondary, and end-wall steel framing members with specified primer
to a minimum dry film thickness of 1 mil (0.025 mm).
a. Prime secondary steel framing formed from metallic-coated steel sheet with
red-oxide polyester paint, with a minimum dry film thickness of 0.5 mil (0.013
mm) on each side.
2. Prime galvanized members, after phosphoric acid pretreatment, with polyamide
epoxy primer. (Tenemic Hi-Build Epoxoline series 66 or equal).
2.5 STRUCTURAL FRAMING
A. Primary Framing: Manufacturer's standard structural primary framing system, designed to
withstand required loads and specified requirements. Primary framing includes transverse
and lean-to frames; rafter, rake, and canopy beams; sidewall, intermediate, end-wall, and
corner columns; and wind bracing.
I. General: Provide frames with attachment plates, bearing plates, and splice members.
Factory drill for field-bolted assembly. Provide frame span and spacing indicated.
. B. End-Wall Framing: Manufacturer's standard primary end-wall framing fabricated for field-
bolted assembly.
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
13125 - 8
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
o
o
D
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
C. Secondary Framing: Manufacturer's standard secondary framing members, including
purlins, girts, eave struts, flange bracing, base members, gable angles, clips, headers, jambs,
and other miscellaneous structural members.
D. Bracing: Provide adjustable wind bracing.
2.6 ROOF PANELS
A. Standing-Seam Roof Panels: Manufacturer's standard panels complying with the
following:
I. Vertical-Rib Roof Panels: Fabricate flat-pan panels from metallic-coated steel sheets
prepainted with coil coating, factory formed to provide 16-inch (406-mm) coverage;
with 2-inch- (51-mm-) high, inverted-L, vertical ribs at panel ,edges. Design panels
for mechanical attachment'to roof purlins using concealed clips in side laps. Factory
apply sealant at each interlocking joint. Comply with the following:
a. Material: Zi~c-coated (galvanized) steel.
b. Yield Strength: 50 ksi (345 MPa).
c. Metal Thickness: 22 gage
d. Joint Type: Mechanically seamed type as standard with manufacturer..
e. Clip System: Floating to accommodate thermal movement. .,
B. Roof Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete roof panel assembly
including trim, copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, ridge closures, clips, seam
covers, battens, flashings, gutters, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items.
Match materials and finishes of roof panels.
C.Exterior Finish: Apply the following coil coating to roof panels and accessories:
I. Fluoropolymer Two-Coat System: Manufacturer's standard two-coat, thermocured
system consisting of specially formulated inhibitive primer and fluoropolymer color
topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight,
with a total minimum dry film thickness of 1 mil (0.025 mm) and 30 percent
reflective gloss when tested according to ASTM D 523.
a. Durability: Provide coating 1ield tested under normal range of weather
conditions for a minimum of 20 years without significant peel, blister, flake,
chip, crack, or check in finish; without chalking in excess of a chalk rating of
8 according to ASTM D 4214; and without fading in excess of five Hunter
units.
2. Siliconized-Polyester Coating: Epoxy primer and silicone~modified,. polyester-
enamel topcoat; with a dry film thickness of not less than 0.2 mil (0.005mm) for
primer and 0.8 mil (0.02 mm) for topcoat. .
3. Colors, Textures, and Glosses: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full
range for these characteristics.
METAL, BUILDING SYSTEMS
13125 - 9
D. Concealed Finish: Apply pretreatment and manufacturer's standard white or light-colored
backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a total minimum dry film
thickness of 0.5 mil (0.013 mm).
2. 7 WALL PANELS
A. Uninsulated Wall Panels: Provide manufacturer's standard panels complying with the
following:
a. Material: ' Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel.
b. Yield Strength: 50 ksi (345 MPa).
c. Metal Thickness: 22 gage.
B. Wall Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete_ wall panel assembly,
including trim, copings, mulliops, sills, comer units, clips, seam covers, battens, flashings,
sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match materials and finishes of
panels.
C. Exposed Finish for Exterior Panels: Apply the following coil coating:-
I. Fluoropolymer Two-Coat System: Manufacturer's standard two-coat, thermo cured
system consisting of specially formulated inhibitive primer and fluoropolymer color
topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidenefluoride resin by weight,
with a total minimum dry film thickness of 1 mil (0.025 mm) and 30 percent
reflective gloss when tested according to ASTM D 5,23.
a. Durability: Provide coating field tested under normal range of weather
conditions for a minimum of 20 years without significant peel, blister, flake,
chip, crack, or check in finish; without chalking in excess of a chalk rating of
8 according to ASTM D 4214; and without fading in excess of five Hunter
units. '
2. Siliconized-Polyester Coating: Epoxy primer and silicone-modified, polyester-
enamel topcoat; with a dry film thickness of not less than 0.2 mil (0.005 mm) for
primer and 0.8 mil (0.02 mm) for topcoat.
3. Colors, Textures, and Glosses: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full
range for these characteristics.
2.8 FASCIA AND SOFFIT PANELS
A. Fascia Panels: Manufacturer's standard panels complying with the following:
I. Match roof panel profile and material.
2. Flat-Pan Panels: Fabricate from metallic-coated steel sheets prepainted with coil
coating, factory formed to provide 16-inch (406-mm) coverage; with l-inch- (25-
mm-) high,inverted-L, standing-seam, vertical ribs at panel edges. Design panels for
mechanical attachment to fascia supports using concealed clips in side laps. Factory
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
13125 - 10
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I-
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
D
D
I
o
I
D
D
I
I
I
apply sealant at each interlocking joint. Comply with the. following:
a. Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel.
b. Yield Strength: . 50 ksi (345 MPa).
c. Metal Thickness: 22 gage.
d. Joint Type: As standard with manufacturer.
e. Clip System: Floating to accommodate thermal movement.
B. Soffit Panels: Manufacturer's standard panels complying with the following:
I. Match wall panel profile and material.
a. Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel.
b. Yield Strength: 50 ksi (345 MPa).
c. Metal Thickness: 22 gage.
2.9 DOORS AND FRAMES
A. 'Personnel Doors: 'Provide personnel doors and frames as standard with metal building
system manufacturer. Prepare and reinforce doors and frames to receive factory- and field-
applied hardware according to ANSIIDHI Al15 Series. Comply with the following:
1. Steel Doors: 3'-0" x 6'-8" ,1~314 inches (44 mm) thick; fabricated from 18 gage, zinc-
coated (galvanized) steel face sheets; of styles indicated. Weld 0.0598-inch- (1.5-
mm-) thick, inverted zinc-coated (galvanized) steel channels to face sheets at top and
bottom of door.
a. Core: Kraft honeycomb with V-value rating of at least 0.47 Btulsq. ft. x h x
deg F (2.67 W/sq. m x K).
2. Steel Frames: Fabricate 2-inch- (50-mm-) wide face frames from 0.0598-inch- (1.5-
mm-) thick, zinc-coate~ (galvanized) steel sheet.
a. Type: Factory welded.
3. Hardware: ' Comply withANSIIDHI AilS Series and the following:
a. Locate hardware according to DHI's "Recommended Locations for
Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames."
b. Provide hardware for each door leaf, as follows:
I) Hinges: One-and-one-half-pair, full-mortise, steel template ball-bearing
hinges, 4-1/2 by 4-1/2 inches (114 by 114 mm), with nonremovable pin.
2) Lockset:' Schlage B660 series Deadbolt for storage and concession;
except locks operated by the public shall be Schlage D73 series Toilet
room entrance doors shall have with a separate deadbolt lock (key inside
and outside) and push- pull plates so that Owner may close the facility
when park is closed.
3) Threshold: Extruded aluminum with vinyl sweep.
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
13125 - 11
4) Sile'~cers: 'Pneumatic rubber; three silencers on st~ike jambs of single
door frames and two silencers on heads of double door frames.
5) Closer: Surface-applied, standard-duty hydraulic type. LCN 1460 series
on toilet room entrance doors.
6) Weather stripping: Vinyl applied to head, jambs, and sill.
7) Signs: Provide ADA compliant signs for Toilets; "MEN", "WOMEN"
8) Weather Stripping: Vinyl applieq to head, jambs, and sill.
4. Fabrication: Fabricate doors and frames to be rigid; neat in appearance; and free
from defects,- warp, or buckle. Provide continuous welds on exposed joints; grind,
dress, and make welds smooth, flush, and invisible.
5. Finishes: Comply with the following for personnel doors and frames:
a. Factory Priming for Field-Painted Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard lead-
and chromate-free, universal shop primer immediately after surface preparation
and pretreatment.
b. Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, if riecessafy re-prime and
apply two-coat, waterborne acrylic epoxy (H.B. Teneme-Tuffcoat)
2.10
WINDOWS
A.
Aluminum Windows: Provide aluminum windows as standard with metal building system
manufacturer and complying with the following:
I. Performance Requirements: Tested for compliance with requirements in AAMA 101
for air infiltration; water penetration; and structural performance for type, grade, and
performance class required.
2. Window Types,: Provide windows constructed of aluminum extrusions and clear
anodized finish.
3. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), alloy and temper
recommended by manufacturer for strength, corrosion resistance, and application of
required finish, but not less than 22,OOO-psi (152-MPa) ultimate tensile strength and
0.062-inch (1.6-mm) thickness at any location for main frame and sash members.
4. Fasteners, Anchors, and Clips: Aluminum, nonmagnetic. stainless steel, or other
noncorrosive material, compatible with aluminum window members, trim, hardware,
anchors, and other components of window units. Fasteners shall not be exposed,
except for attaching hardware.
a. Reinforcement: Where fasteners screw anchor into aluminum less than 0.125
inch (3.2 mm) thick, reinforce interior with aluminum or nonmagnetic stainless
steel to receive screw threads or provide standard, noncorrosive, pressed-in,
splined grommet nuts.
5. Hardware: Manufacturer's standard.
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
13125 - 12
I
I
I-
I
I
.1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.
.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I'
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
D
I
o
D
I
I
6. Insect Screens: Removable insect screen on each operable exterior sash, with screen
frame finished to match window unit, and complying with the following:
a.
Wire Fabric: 18-by,.18 (1.1-by-1.1-mm), 187b~~16 (1.1-by-1.3-mm), or 18-by-
14 (1.1-by-1.5-mm) mesh of 0.0 13-inch- (O.3-nlin-) diameter, coated aluminum
wire; complying with FS RR-W-365, Type VII.
7. Finish: Mill.
B. Glazing: Provide the following glazing materials:
I. Windows shall be 1/4" thick clear polycarbonate
2.11 ACCESSORIES
A. General: Provide accessories as standard with metal building system manufacturer, and
complying with the following:
I. Provide sheet metal accessories of same material and in same finish as roof and wall
panels, unless otherWise indicated.
B. Flashing.and Trim: Form from 0.01 79-inch- (0.45-mm-) thick, zinc-coated (galvanized)
steel sheet or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet prepainted with coil coating. Provide
flashing and trim as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance.
Locations include, but are not limited to, eaves, rakes, corners, bases, framed openings,
. ridges, fasciae, arid fillers. ,Finish flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent
roof or wall panels.
C. General: Provide the following toilet room accessories for complete installation:
I. Provide stainless steel mirror Super Secur model 1002 or equal for each lavatory.
Unit shall be one piece type 304 stainless steel, rear mqunted frame.
2. Provide heavy duty tissue dispenser Super Secur modelll13-PL of equal, fabricated
from type 304 stainless steel with satin finish. Brass padlocks shall. be keyed alike.
3. Provide grab bars ,Super Se~ur model 1133 and 1134 or equaL Bars shall be 1-112"
diameter fabricated from type 304 'stainless steel with satin finish. Bars and the
mounting of bars shall comply with all requirements of ADA....
4. Provide solid plastic floor mounted headrail braced toil~t stall partitions with doors.
All partitions, doors, and pilasters shall be 1" thick solid plastic. Hardware shall be
installed with tamper resistant fasteners. Comply with ADA requirements.
2.12 PLUMBING
A. General: Provide the following plumbing fixtures and accessories for complete installation:
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
13.125 -13
1. Provide watercloset Super Secur model 1001-RM or equal. Fixture shall be
fabricated from type 304 stainl~ss steel with satin finish. Fixture shall be blowout
jet type with elongated bowl, back inlet, solid white plastic ,seat, self-draining
flushing rim, thru wall connection and flush valve complete ~th vacuum breaker
and angle stop.
2. Provide urinal Super Secur model 1030 or equal. Fixture shall be fabricated from
type 304 stainless steel with satin finish. Fixture shall have back inlet, concealed
trap, beehive strainer, thru wall connection and flush valve complete with vacuum
breaker and angle stop.
3. Provide flush valves for watercloset and urinal Super Secur modell145-L or 1147-L,
or equal. Flush valves shall be concealed, with lever handles requiring less than 5
pounds of force to operate.
4. Provide lavatory Super Secur model 1011-1 or equal. Fi}(ture shall be, fabricated
from type 304 stainless steel with satin finish. Fixture shall have single temperature
air controlled metering valve with P-trap and thru wall connection.
5. Provide key operated' hose bib in each restroom and two side walls Super Secur
model 1142. Fixture shall be solid brass with chrome plate finish and vacuum
breaker.
2.13 ELECTRICAL
A. General: Provide the following electrical fixtures and accessories for complete installation:
I. Light fixtures shall be Super Secur wall mounted, vandal resistant series 1180 13
watt fluorescent (interior) and 1180-1 13 watt fluorescent with photo cell (exterior).
2.14 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products"
for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are
acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable
variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other
components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are
assembled or installed to minimize contrast. '
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Erector present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of metal building system.
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
13125-14
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
o
I
I
I
I
I
.1
I
I
I
I
1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Erector, listing conditions
detrimental to performance of work. '
2. Proceed with erection only after unsatisfactory cbriClitions have been corrected.
B. Before erection proceeds, survey elevations and locations of concrete and masonry bearing
surfaces, baseplates, and anchor ,bolts to receive structural framing. Verify compliance with
requirements and metal buildi~g system manufacturer's tolerances.
1. Engage land surveyor to perform surveying.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrates of substances, including oil, grease, rolling compounds, incompatible
primers, and loose mill scale, that impair bond of erection materials.
B. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's
written inst~ctions for each particular substrate condition and asspecified.
3.3 ERECTION
A. Erect metal building system according to manufacturer's written instructions and erection
drawings.
B. Do not field cut, drill, or alter structural members without written approval from metal
building system manufacturer's professional engineer.
, C. Set structural framing in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC
specifications referenced' in this Section. Maintain structural stability of frame during
erection.
D. Baseplates and Bearing Plates: Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-
reducing materials and roughen surfaces before setting baseplates and bearing plates. Clean
bottom surface of baseplates and bearing plates.
E.' Align and adjust framing members before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean
bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent contact. Make adjustments
to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment.
1. Level and plumb individualmembers.ofstructure.
2. Establish, required leveling and plumbing measurements on mean operating
temperature of structure. Make allowances for difference between temperature at
time of erection'and mean temperature at which structure will be when completed
and in service. '
F. Framing for Openings: Provide shapes of proper design and size to reinforce openings and
to carry loads and vibrations imposed, including equipment furnished under mechanical and
electrical work. Securely attach to building structural frame.
METAL BUILDlNG SYSTEMS
13 125 - 15
3.4 ROOF PANEL INSTALLATION
A. General: Provide roof panels of full length from eave to ridge when possible. Install panels
perpendicular to plirlins.
I. Field cutting by torch is not permitted.
2. Rigidly fasten eave end of roof panels and allow ridge end free movement due to
thermal expansio,n and contraction. Predrill panels.
3. Provide weatherseal under ridge cap.
4. Flash and seal roof panels with weather closures at eaves, rakes, and at perimeter of
all openings. Fasten with self-tapping screws.
5. Install screw fasteners with power tools having controlled ,torque adjusted to
compress neoprene washer tightly without damage to was~er, screw threads, or
panels. Install screws in predrilled holes. '
6. Use aluminum or stainless-steel fasteners for exterior applications and galvanized
fasteners for interior applications.
7. Locate and space fastenings in true vertical and horizontal alignment.
8. Install ridge caps as roof panel work proceeds.
9. Locate panel splices over, but not attached to, structural supports. Stagger panel
splices to avoid a four-panel lap splice condition.
B. Standing-Seam Roof Panels: Fasten roof panels to purl iris with concealed clips at each
standing-seam joint. Install clips over top of insulation at location and spacing determined
by manufacturer. '
1. Install clips to supports with self-drilling fasteners.
2. Crimp standing seams with manufacturer-approved motorized seamer tool so clip;
panel, and factory-applied side-lap sealant are completely engaged.
3. At panel splices, nest panels with minimum 6-inch (150-mm) end lap, sealed with
butyl sealant and f~stened together by interlocking clamping plates.
3.5 WALL PANEL INSTALLATION
A. General: Provide panels full height of building when possible. Install panels perpendicular
to girts.
I. Arrange and nest side-lap joints so prevailing winds blow over, not into, lapped
joints. Install panels with vertical edges plumb. Lap ribbed orfluted sheets one full
rib corrugation. Apply panels and associated items for heat and weathertight
enclosure. Avoid "panel creep" or application not true to line.
2. Unless otherwise indicated, begin panel installation at corners with center of rib lined
up with line of framing.
3. Field cutting by torch is,not permitted.
4. Align bottom of wall panels and fasten with blind rivets, bolts, or self-tapping
screws.
5. Fasten flashing and trim around openings and similar elements with self-tapping
screws.
6. When two rows of panels are required, lap panels 4 inches (100 mm} minimum.
Locate panel splices over structural supports.
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
13125-16
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
o
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I.
7. When building height requires two rows of panels at gable ends, align lap of gable
panels over wall panels. at eave height.
8. Install screw fasteners"with power tools having controlled torque adjusted to
compress neoprene waSher tightly without damage to washer, screw threads, or
panels. Install screws in predrilled holes.
9. Provide weather-resistant escutcheons for pipe and conduit penetrating exterior walls.
10. Flash and seal wall patiels with weather closures under eaves and rakes, along lower
, panel edges, and at perimeter of all openings.
11. 'Apply elastomeric sealant continuously between metal base channel (sill angle) and
concrete, and elsewhere as necessary for waterproofing. Handle and apply sealant
and backup according to sealant manufacturer's written instructions.
12. Use aluminum or stainless-steel fasteners for exterior applications and galvanized
fasteners for interior applications. ,
13. Locate and space fastenings in true vertical and horizontal alignment.
3.6 FASCIA AND SOFFIT PANEL INSTALLATION
A. General: Provide panels full width of fasciae and soffits. Install panels perpendicular to
support framing.
I. Arrange and nest side-lap joints so prevailing winds blow over, not into, lapped
joints. Install panels with vertical edges plumb. Lap ribbed or fluted panels one full
rib corrugation. Apply panels and associated items for neat and weathertight
enclosure. A void "panel creep" or application not true to line.
2. Field cutting by torch is not permitted.
3. Fasten flashing and trim around openings and similar elements with self-tapping
screws.
4. Install screw fasteners with power tools having controlled torque adjusted to
compress neoprene washer tightly without damage to washer, screw threads, or
panels. Install screws in predrilled holes.
5. Use aluminum or stairuess-steel fasteners for exterior applications and galvanized
fasteners for interior applications.
6. 'Locate and space fastenings in true vertical and horizontal alignment.
B. . Fascia Panels: Align bottom of panels and fasten with blind rivets, bolts, or self-tapping
: screws. Flash and seal panels with weather closures where fasciae meet soffits, along lower
panel edges, and at peri!Ileter of all openings.
C. Soffit Panels: Flash and seal,panelswith weather closures where soffit meets walls and at
perimeter of all openings.
3.7 ' DOOR INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with manufactur~r's written instructions for installing doors, hardware,
operators, and other door components. Coordinate installation with wall flashings and
other components. Seal perimeter of each door frame with elastomeric sealant used for
, panels.
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
13125 - 17
B. Personnel Doors and Frames: Install doors and frames straight, level, and plumb. Securely
anchor frames to building structure. Set units with maximum 1/8-inch (3-mm) clearance
between door and frame at jambs and head and maximum 314-inch (19-mm) clearance
between door and floor.
C. Glazing: Clean channel surfaces and prime as recommended by sealant manufacturer. Cut
polycarbonate to required size for measured opening; provide adequate edge ~learance and
glass bite all around. Do not install poly carbonate that has significant edge damage or other
defects.
D. Hardware: Mount units at h~ights indicated in DHI's "Recommended Locations for
Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames."
I. Install surface-mounted items after finishes have been completed on substrates ,
involved.
2. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust arid reinforce substrate
as necessary for proper installation and operation.
3. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners.
Space fasteners and anchors according to industry standards.
4. Set thresholds for exterior doors in full bed of butyl-rubber or polyisobutylene mastic
sealant .
3.8 WINDOW INSTALLATION,
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing window units,
screens, hardware, operators, and other window components. Coordinate installation with
wall flashings and other components.
\
B. Set window units level, plumb, and true to line, without warp or rack of frames or sash.
Provide proper support and anchor securely in pla~e.
I. Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or
electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials by complying with
requirements specified in "Dissimilar Materials" Paragraph in appendix to
AAMA 101.
C. Set sill members and other members in a bed of sealant or ,with joint fillers or gaskets to
provide weathertight construction.
D. Anchor windows securely in place. Seal perimeter of each unit with elastomeric sealant
used for panels. Mount screens direct to frames with tapped screw clips.
E. Glazing: Clean channel surfaces and prime as recommended by sealant manufacturer. Cut
polycarbonate to required size for measured opening; provide adequate edge clearance and
glass bite all around. Do not install polycarbonate that has significant edge damage or
other defects. '
F. Glazing: Replace glass that is broken or damaged to ensure that each piece of exterior glass
is airtightand watertight through normal weatherltemperature cycles and through normal
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
13125-18
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
window operation.
3.9 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION
A. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written
installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide for
thermal expansion of metal units; conceal fasteners where possible, and set units true to line
and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently
watertight and weather resistant.
B. Toilet Room Accessories: Comply with ADA. ,
3.10 ERECTION AND LOCATION TOLERANCES
A. Structural-Steel Erection Tolerances: Comply with erection tolerance limits of AISC S303,
"Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."
B. Roof Panel Installation Tolerances: Shim and align units within installed tolerance of 1/4
inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m) on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1I8-inch
(3-mm) offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.
C. Wall Panel Installation Tolerances:' Shim and align units within installed tolerance of 114
inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m) on level, plumb, and location lines as indicated and within
1I8-inch (3-mm) offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.
D. ' ' Door Installation Tolerances: Fit doors in frames within cleararicesspecified in SDI 100.
RJ Plumbing shall be installed per local and state building codes and tied into existing onsite
utilities.
F. Electrical shall be1installed.per local and'state building codes.
3.11 ADJUSTING
A. Doors: After completing installation, lubricate, test, and adjust doors to operate easily, free
, from warp, twist, or distortion.
B. Hardware: Adjust arid check each operating item of hardware to ensure proper operation
and function. Replace units that caimotbe adjusted to operate freely and smoothly.
1. Where door hardware is installed more than one month before acceptance or
occupancy, make final check' and adjustment of hardware items during the week
before acceptance or occupancy. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper
function and finish of har~ware ,and doors. Adjust door control devices to
compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment.
C. Windows: Adjust operating ventilators and hardware to provide a tight fit at contact points
and weather stripping, for smooth operation and a weathertight closure.
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
13125 - 19
3.12 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Touchup Painting: Immediately' after erection, clean, prepare, and prime or reprime welds,
bolted connections, and abraded surfaces of prime-painted primary and secondary framing,
accessories, and bearing plates.
I. Clean and prepare surfaces by hand-tool cleaning, SSPC-SP 2, or power-tool
cleaning, SSPC-SP 3. .
2. Apply compatible primer of same type as shop primer used on adjacent surfaces.
B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting offield welds, bolted connections, and
abraded surfaces of shop-painted primary and secondary framing, accessories, and bearing
plates are included in Division 9 Section "Painting."
C. Repair damaged galvanized coatings on exposed surfaces with galvanized repair paint
according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's Written instructions.
D. Roofand Wall Panels: Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, ifany,
as soon as each panel is installed. On completion of panel installation, clean finished
surfaces as recommended by panel manufacturer and maintain in a clean condition during
construction.
I. Replace panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair
by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. '
E. Doors: Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat
and apply touchup of compatible air-drying primer.
I. Protection Removal: Immediately before final inspection; remove protective
wrappings from doors and frames.
F. Windows: Clean metal surfaces promptly after installing windows. Exercise care to avoid
damage to protective coatings and finishes. Remove excess glazing and sealant
compounds, dirt, and other substances. Lubricate hardware and other moving parts. Clean
glass promptly after installing windows.
END OF SECTION 13125 .
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
13125-20
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 13126 - MASONRY BUll..DING SYSTEMS
I
PART I-GENERAL
I
I
1.1
I
I
I
I
1.2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.3
I
SUMMARY
A
This Section includes the following:
1. Structural framing and Prefabricated Wood Trusses
2. Roof shingles.
3. Concret Masonry Wall and Prefinished Alwninum Siding
4. Gypsum Board Ceilings.
5, Building components, as follows:
a.
b.
Personnel doors, frames, and hardware. ,
Service doors, fr~es"and hardware.
Windows. .
Louvers, vents, and ventilators,
c.
d.
6.
7.
Accessories and trim.
Plumbing Fixtures, Toilet Accessories
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
General: Provide a complete, integrated set of mutually dependent components and assemblies that form a
building system capable of withstanding structural and other loads, thermally induced movement., and exposure
to weather without failure or infiltration of water into building interior. .
A
B.
Masonry Building System Design: Of size, spacing, slope, and spans indicated, and as follows:
1. , Wall: Provide the following:
a. 8" emu reinforced with #4's at 48" OC, at comers, and edges of all openings. Splice length is 30".
b. Bond Beam at 8'-0" bearing with 2x6 treated wocx:l nailier bolted to bond beam with 1/2" diameter
bolts at 6'-0" spacing
c. Bond beam Lintels to be reinforced with 2 #4's with 8" bearing each end.
2.
End-Wall GableFraming: Wood Truss Manufacturer's standard truss, as follows:
a,
Provide cantilevered 2x6 treated wood stick framing at overhang.
Pre-engineered Roof Truss Framing: Metal-plate-connected wood trusses include planar structural units
consisting ofmeta1-plate-connectedmembers fabricated from dimension lumber and cut and assembled
before delivery to Project site:
3.
4.
Design trusses to withstand design loads without deflections greater than the following:
a. Roof Trusses: Vertical deflection of 1/240 of span due to totallo8d.
C.
Engineering Responsibility: Engage a Trusss fabricator who ,uses a qualified professional engineer to prepare
calculations, Shop Drawings, and other structural data for metal-plate-connected wood trusses.
SUBMITTALS
A
Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and
profiles, and fmishes for each type of the following metal building system components:
MASONRY BUILDING SYSTEMS
I
13125 - 1
B.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Roof Trusses
Shingles
Trim and closures.
Doors.
Windows.
Louvers in Gable.
Accessories and toilet accessories,
Plumbing Fixtures
Electrical Fixtures
Shop Drawings: For the following masonry building system components, Include plans, elevations, sections,
details, and attachments to other Work.
1.
For installed components indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed
and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
Reinforcing Shop DraWings: Include location and diameter,. -
Truss Shop Drawings: Shop Drawings detailing location, pitch, span, camber, configuration. and spacing
for each type of truss ~ speCies, sizes, and stress grades oflumber to be used; splice details; type,
size, material, finish, design values, and orientation and location ofmeta1 cOnnector plates; and bearing
details.
Include truss Shop Drawings signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for
their preparation. -,
Personnel DoOr Schedule: Provide schedule of doors and frames, using the same reference numbers as
indicated on Drawings, Include details of reinforcement and installation requirements for finish hardware.
a. Provide hardware schedule.
2,
3.
4.
5.
6.
Accessory Drawings:' Include plans, elevatons and details of toilet 'accessories, plumbing fixtures,
electrical fixtures, siding installation. and gable 10uvers.t '
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A Testing Agency Qualifications:' An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
qualified according to ASlM E329 to conduct the testing indicated. as documented according to ASlM E 548.
B. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for system's aesthetic
effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimenSions, arrangements, alignment,
and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining
construction. Performance characteriStics are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods
including preconstruction testing. field testing, or in-service performance.
C. Preinsta1lation Conference: 'Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section
"Project Meetings. ·
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A Deliver components, sheets, panels, and other manufactured items so as not to be damaged or deformed. Package
materials for protection during transportation and handling. '
B. Handling: Unload. store, and erect materials to prevent bending, warping, twiSting, and surface damage.
C. Stack. materials on platfo~ or pallets, covered with tarpaulins or other suitable weathertight and ventilated
covenng.
1.6
A
PROJECT CONDmONS
Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when weather conditions permit roof installation to be
performed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements,
MASONRY BUllDING SYSTEMS
,13125-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
D
D
I
I
D
D
D
n
U
I
B.
Field Measurements: Verify masonsry building system foundations by field measurements.
1.7
COORDINA nON
A.
Coordinate installation of all compOnents for complete weathertighi ~ctw'e.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 DIMENSION LUMBER
A. Lumber Standards: Comply with DOC PS 20, · American Softwood Lumber Standard,. and with applicable
grading rules of inspection agencies certified by ALSC's Board of Review,
B. Inspection Agencies: Inspection agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them. include the following:
1. SPill - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau.
C. Grade Stamps: Provide lwnber with each piece factoly marked with grade stamp of inspection agency evidencing
compliance with grading rule requirements and identifying grading agency, grade, species, moisture content at
time of swfacing, and mill. '
D. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, manufactured to actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture content
specified. to comply with requirements indicated below:
1. Provide dry lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing.
E. Grade arid Species: Provide visually graded dimension lumber for truss chord and web members, of the
following grade and species:
1. Grade for Chord Members: No.2.
2. Grade for Web Members:' No.2, ,
3. Species: Southern pine graded per SPill rules,
F.
Roof Sheathing: AP A-rated sheathing.
2.2
GYPSUM SHEATHING
A.
Gypsum Sheathing Boan:l: Water-resistant-core gypsum sheathing board complying with ASTM C 79 with IODg
edges surfaced with water-repellent paper and as follows: '
1. Type: X
2. Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm).
2.3 METAL DRIP EDGE: Brake-forined sheet metal with at least a 2-inch (50-mm) roof deck flange and a 1-112-
inch (38-mm) fascia flange with a 3/8-inch (9,6-mm) drip at lower edge. Furnish the following material in
lengths of8 or to feet (2.5 to3 m). ~ ,
1. Material: Galvanized.steel sheets.
2.4 ASPHALT SIllNGLES
A. Colors, Blends, and Patterns: Where manufacturer's standard products are indicated. pro~de asphalt shingles
with the following requirements:
1. Match colors, textures, and patterns indicated by referencing ~anufacturer's standard designations for
these characteristics.
MASONRY BUll..DING SYSTEMS
13125 - 3
B. Square-Tab, Fiberglass Strip Shingles: Mineral-surfaced, self-sealing, 3-tab, fiberglass-based, strip asphalt
shingles, complying with both ASTM D 3018, Type 1, and ASTM D 3462. Provide shingles with a Class A fire-
test-response classification that pass the wind-resistance-test requirements of ASTM D 3161.(GAF Timberline
25 year shingle or equal)
1. Fungus Resistant: 'Provide shingles that have been swface treated to remain ~ee of fungus and algae
growth. which adversely affects the appearance of the roof, for at least 5 years.
1
C. Hip and Ridge Shingles: Job-fabricated units cut from actual asphalt shingles used.
2.5 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
A. General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows for each form of concrete masonry unit required.
1. Provide special shapes for lintels. corners, jambs, sash, control joints, headers, bonding, and other special
conditions.
2. Provide square-edged units for outside comers, except where indicated as bullnose.
B. Concrete MaSonry Units: ASTM C 90 and as follows:
1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive strength
indicated below:
a. 1900 psi (13,1 MPa).
2. Weight Classification: Lightweight.
3. Provide Type U, nonmoisture-controlled units,
4. Size: Manufactured to the actual dimensions listed below (within to!erances specified in the applicable
referenced ASTM speCification) for the corresponding nominal sizes indicated on Drawings:
a. 8 inch (200 mm)nominal: 7-5/8 inch (194 nun) actual.
5. Exposed Faces: Manufactm"er's standard color and texture, unless otherwise indicated.
a Where units are to be left exposed, provide color and texture matching the range represented by
Engineer's sample.
C. Decorative Concrete Masonry Units For All Exterior Walls: ASTM C 90 and as follows:
I. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net~area compressive strength
indicated below:
a 1900 psi (l3.1 MPa).
2. Weight Classification: 'Lightweight.
3, Provide Type II, nonmoisture-controlled units.
4. Size: ManufaCtured to dimensions indicated for nondecorative units.
5. Finish: Exposed faces of the following general description matching color ( beige), pattern., and texture
of Engineer's sample.
a. Normal-weight aggregate, split-face finish,
2.6 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS
A. Masonry Cement: ASTM, C 91.
MASONRY BUll..DING SYSTEMS
13125 - 4
I
I,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
U
I
I
I
I
I
D
I
I
I
1. Type S
2. Mortar used in Decorative CMU shall be colored to match CMU.
B. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C, 14:4; except for joints less than 1/4 inch (6.5 min), use aggregate graded with
100 percent passing the No. 16 (1.18 mm) sieve. "
C. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.
D. Water: Potable.
2.7 REINFORCING STEEL
A Steel Reinforcing Bars: Material and grade as follows:
, 1. Billet steel complying with ASTM A 615 (ASTM A 615M).
a. Grade 60 (Grade 400).
B. Welded-Wire Fabric: ASTMA 185,
2.8 JOINT REINFORCEMENT
A General: Provide joint reinforcement formed from the following:
1. Galvanized carbon-steel wire, coating class as follows:
a. ASTM A 153, Class B-2, for both interior and exterior walls.
B. Description: Welded-wire units prefabricated with deformed continuous side rods and plain cross rods into
straight lengths of not less than 10 feet (3 m), with prefabricated comer and tee units, and complying with
requirements indicated below: '
I. Wire Diameter for Side Rods: 0.1483 inch (3.8 mm).
2. Wire Diameter for Cross Rods: 0,1483 inch (3.8 mm).
C. ' For single-wythe masonry, provide type as follows with single pair of side rods:
I. Truss design with continuous diagonal cross rods spaced not more than 16 inches (407 mm) o.c. Space
joint reinforcing at 16" vertical spacing.
2.9 DOOR AND FRAME MATERIALS
'A Cold-Rolled Carbon-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 366/A 366M or ASTM A 5681A 568M. matte finish, suitable for
exposed applications, and stretcher leveled or roller leveled to stretcher-leveled flatness.
B. Hot-Rolled Carbon-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 568/A 568M or ASTM A 569/A 569M
C.' Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/ A 653M, commercial quality, with 060 (Z 180) coating
designation; mill phosphatized.
D. ,Refer to Specification Section 13125 for additional door and hardware information
2.10 WINDOWS
A Refer to Specification Section 13125 for additional Window information
I. Weather Stripping: Manufacturer's standard, applied to each operable sash.
2, Window Types, Grade, and Perfomiance Class: Provide windows of the following type, grade, and
performance class according to AAMA 101: '
MASONRY BUILDING SYSTEMS
13125 - 5
2.11
2.12
2.13
2,14
2.15
a. Horizontal Sliding Units: AAMA Grade and Performance Class HS-C20.
PLUMBING
A.
Refer to Specification Section 13125 for additional plumbing information. Provide vandal proof fixtures equal
to specified manufacture.
ELEClRICAL
A.
Refer to Specification SeCtion 13125 for additional electrical information. Provide VlUldal proof fixtures equal
to specified manufacture,
ACCESSORIES
A.
Refer to Specification Section 1 ~ 125 paragraph 2,11 for additional information. Provide vandal proof fixtures
equal to specified manufacture.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.,
Gypsum Board Accessories': As required to finish edges to masonry construction. "
Gypsum Board: Type X, of thicknesses indicated, complying with ASTM C 442 or ASTM C 36.
B.
SIDING
A.
Formed Aluminum Siding: Aluminum siding and accessories complying with AAMA 1402, fabricated from
aluminum sheet in alloy recommended by siding manufacturer, and as follows:
1. Horizontal Pattern: 10-inch (254-mm) exposure in Dutch-lap, double 5-inch (127 -mm) style.
2. Texture: Wood grain.
3. Thickness: 0.024 inch (0.6 mm) nominal.
4. Finish: Manufacturer's standard 2-coat PVC finish.
2.16 SOFFIT
'2.17
A. Aluminum Soffit: Aluminum soffit complying with AAMA 1402, fabricated from aluminum sheet in alloy
recommended by siding manufactw"er, and as follows:
1. Pattern: 12-inch (305-mm) exposure in double 6-inch (1 52-mm) style.
2. Ventilation: Provide unperforated soffit at overhang.
3. Ventilation: Provide perforated soffit at eave
4. Thickness: 0.024 inch (0.6 mm) nominal.
5.' Finish: Manufacturer's standard 2-coat PVC finish.
SIDING ACCESSORIES
A.
Siding Accessories: Provide starter strips, edge trim, window head flashing. comer cap, and other items as
recommended by manufacturer for building configuration; match type of siding.
B.
Decorative Accessories: Provide the following types of decorative accessories as indicated:
1. Louvers.
2. Fasciae.
C. Fa&eners: Noncorrosive aluminum siding nails, in sufficient length to penetrate a minimum of 1 inch (25 mm)
into substrate. Provide prefi?ished fasteners in color to match sidirlg where face nailing is unavoidable.
2.18 FINISHES, GENERAL
13125-6
MASONRY BUILDING SYSTEMS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.19
I
I
I
A.
Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations
for applying and designating finishes.
B.
Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are
, within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable vanati,~ns in the same piece are not acceptable.
Variations in appearance of other cOmponents are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples
and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast
SOURCE QUALITY CON1ROL
A.
Contractor will employ an independent testing agency to perform source quality-control testing and special
inspections, and to prepare test reports.
1. Testing agency will conduct and interpret tests and state in each report whether test specimens comply
with or deviate from requirementS for soil compaction and concrete strength,
B.
Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Engineer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
3.1
A.
3.2
A.
B.
3.3
A.
B.
I
I
I
I
I
:1
I
EXAMINATION
Examine substrates, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting
performance of the building system.
PREPARATION
Clean substrates of substances, including oil, grease, rolling compoWlds, incompatible primers, and loose mill
scale, that impair bond of erection materials.
Swface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's written instructions
for each particular substrate condition and as specified.
MASONRY INSTALLATION,GENERAL
Thickness: Build single-wythe walls to the actual thickness of the masonry units, using units of thickness
indicated.
Cut masonry units with motor-driven saws to provide clean. sharp, Wlchipped edges. Cut units as required to
provide continuous pattern and to fit adjoining construction. Use full-size units without cutting, where possible.
Allow units cut With water-cooled saws to chy before placing, W1less wetting of units is specified. Install cut units
with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.
C.
Mix units for exposed unit masonry from several pallets or cubes as they are placed to produce uniform blend
of colors and textures.' ,
3.4 MASONRY CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES
D
D
D
B
A.
Variation from Plumb: For vertical lines and surfaces of walls, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m),
nor 318 inch in 20 feet (10 mm in 6m), nor 1/2 inch in 40 feet (12 mm in 12 m) or more. For external comers,
expansion joints, control joints, and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m),
nor 1/2 inch in 40 feet (12 mm in 12 m) or more. For vertical alignment of head joints, do not exceed plus or
minus 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 rom in 3 m), nor 1/2 inch (12 rom) maximum,
B. Variation from Level: For bed joints and lines of exposed lintels, sills; parapets, horizontal grooves, and other
MASONRY BUILDING SYSTEMS
13125 - 7
conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 rom in 6 m),nor 1/2 inch in 40 feet (12 rom in 12 m) or
more, For top mace ofbearing walls, do not exceed 1/8 inch (3 rom) in 10 feet (3 m), nor 1/16 inch (1.5 rom)
within width of a single unit
C.
Variation of Linear Building Line: For position shown in plan. and related portion of columns, walls, and
partitions, do not exceed 1/2 inch in 20 feet (12 rom in 6 m), nor 3/4 inch in 40 feet (19 rom in 12 m) or more.
D.
Variation in Cross-Sectional Dimensions: For columns and thickness of walls, from dimensions shown, do not
exceed minus 1/4 inch (6 rom) nor plus 1/2 inch (12 rom).
j
E. Variation in Mortar-Joint Thickness: Do not vary from bed-joint thickness indicated by more than plus or minus
1/8 ii1ch (3mm), with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch (12 Inm). Do not vary bed-joint thickness from
bed-joint thickness of adjacent course by more than 1/8 inch (3 rom). Do not vary from head-joint thickness
indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 rom). Do not vary head-joint thickness from adjacent head-joint
thickness by more than 1/8 inch (3 rom). Do not vary from collar-joint thickness indicated by more than minus
, 1/4 inch (6 rom) or plus 3/8 inch (10 rom).' -
3,5 LAYING MASONRY WALLS
3,6
A
Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint widths and for accurate
locating of openings, movement.;.type joints, returns, andoft"sets. Avoid the use of less-than-half-size units at
comers, jambs, and where possible at other locations.
B.
Lay walls to comply with specified ooilstruction tolerances, with courses accurately spaced and coordinated with
other construction,
C,
Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Lay exposed masonry in the following bond pattern~ do not use units with
less than nominal 4-inch (100-rom) horizontal face dimensions at comers or jambs.
1. One-half running bond with vertical joint in each course centered on units in courses above and below.
D.
Lay concealed masomy with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by laPping not less than 2 inches (50
rom). Bond and interlock eacheourse of each wythe at cOrDers. Do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch
(100-mm) horizontal face dimensions at comers or jambs.
E.
Stopping and Resmning Work: In each course, rack back 112-unit length for one~half running bond or 113-unit
length for one-third running bond~ do not tooth. Clean exposed surfaces, ofset masonry, wet clay masonry units
lightly if required, and remove loose masonry units and mortar prior to laying fresh masonry,
F.
Built-in Work: As' construction progresses, build-in items specified under this and other Sections of the
Specifications. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.
G.
Fill space between hollow metal frames and masonry solidly with mortar, unless otherwise indicated.
H
Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, plaeea layer of metal lath in the joint
below and rod mortar or grout into core.
1.
Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 24 inches (600 rom) under bearing plates, beams, lintels,
posts, and similar items, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
Build nonload-bearing interior partitions 8'-8".
MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING
A
Lay hollow concrete masonry units as follows:
1.
With full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells.
MASONRY BUILDING SYSTEMS
13 125 - 8
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2. Bed webs in mortar in starting course on footings and in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters, and
where adjacent to cells or cavitjes to be filled with grout
3. For starting course on footings where cells are not grouted, spread out full mortar bed, including areas
Wlder cells.
4. Maintain joint widths indicated, except for minor variationS required to maintain bond alignment If not
indicated, lay walls with 3/8-inch (1 O-mm) joints,
B.
Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness, unless
otherwise indicated.
3.7
INSTAllATION OF REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY
A.
Grouting: Do not place grout 1.D1ti1 entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained sufficient strength to resist
grout pressure.
I
I
I
I
I
1. Do not exceed the following pour heights for coarse grout:
a. For minimum widths of grout spaces of 2 inches (51 mm) or for minimum grout space of hollow
unit cells of2~1/2 by 3 inches (63 by 76 mm), pour height of 60 inches (1524 mm),
3.8
ROUGH CARPENTRY INSTAllATION, GENERAL
A.
Discard units of material with defects that impair quality of rough carpentry and that are too small to use with
minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement
B.
Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted.
C.
Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as required for accurate fit Correlate location of
furring, nailers, blocking, groWlds, and similar supports to allow attachment of other construction~
I
D.
Apply field treatment complying with A WP A M4 to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber and plywood.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
E. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the
following:
1. "Recommended Nailing Schedule" of referenced framing standard and with AFPA's "National Design
Specifications for Wood Construction."
2. "Table 1705.1--Fastening Schedule," of the Standard Building Code.
F. Use oommon wire nails, unless otherwise indicated, Use finishing nails for finish work. Select fasteners of size
that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials.
Make tight cOnnections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood; predrill as required.
G. Use hot-dip galvanized or'sUlinIess-steel nmls where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in groWld contact,
or in area of high relative humidity.
H COWltersink nail heads on expo~ carpentry work and fill holes with wood filler.
3~9 WOOD GROUNDS, NAILERS, BLOCKING, AND SLEEPERS
A. Install wood grounds, nailers, blocking,'and sleepers where shown and where required for screeding or attaching
other work. Form to shapes shown and cut as required for true line and level of attaChed work. Coordinate
locations with other work involved.
I
I
B. Attach to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise
indicated Build into masomy during installation of masonry work. Where possible, anchor to formwork before
concrete placement
, MASONRY BUILDING SYSTEMS
13]25 - 9
C. Install permanent groimds of dressed. preservative~treated. key-beveled lumber not less than 1-1/2 inches (38
mm) wide and of thickness required to bring face of groWld to exact thickness of finish material. Remove
temporary groWlds when no longer required. '
3.10 WOOD FURRING
A Install plumb and level with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as required for tolerance of
finish work. '
I. Firestop furred spaces of. walls at each floor level and at ceiling with, wood blocking or noncombustible
materials. accurately fitted to close furred spaces.
B. Furring to Receive Gypsum Board: Installl-by-2-inchnominal- (19-by-38-mm actual-) size furring at 16 inches
(406 mm) o,c,. vertically.
3.11 WOOD FRAMING. GENERAL
A Framing Standard: Comply with AFP A's "Manual for Wood Frame Construction." unless otherwise indicated.
B. Framing with Engineered WOOd Products: Install engineered wood products to comply with manufacturer's
written instructions.
C. Install framing members of size and at spacing indicated.
D. Do not splice structural members between supports,
3.12 TRUSS INSTALLATION
A Do not install wood trusses until supporting construction is in place and is braced and secured.
B. Before installing. splice trusses delivered to Project site in more than one piece.
C. Hoist trusses in place by lifting equipment suited to sizes and types of trusses required. exercising care not to
damage truss members or joints by out-of-plane bending or other causes,
D. Install and brace trusses accprding to recommendations ofTPI and as indicated
E. Install trusses plumb. square. and true to line and securely fasten to supporting construction.
F, Space. adjust. and align trusses in location before permanently fastening and as follows:
l. Truss Spacing: 24 inches (610 mm) o.c.
G. Anchor trusses securely at all bearing points using metal framing anchors. Install fasteners through each fastener
hole in metal framing anchor according to manufacturer's fastening schedules and written instructions.
H Securely connect each truss ply required for forming' built-up girder trusses.
I. Anchor trusses to girder trusses as indicated.
I. Install and fasten pennanent bracing dining truss erection and before construction loads are applied. Anchor ends
of permanent bracing where 'terminating at walls or beams.
I. Install and fasten strongback bracing vertically against vertical web of parallel-chord floor trusses at
centers indicated.
J. Install wood trusses within installation tolerances of ANSIffPI 1.
MASONRY BUll..DING SYSTEMS
, 13125 - 10
I
I
I
I
I
I,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
g
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
D
I
B
D
I
I
I
I
K. Do not cut or remove truss members.
L. Return wood trusses that are damaged or do not meet requirements to fabricator and replace with trusses that do
meet requirements.
1.
Do not alter trusses in the fieid.
.'.J
3.13 ROOFING INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations but not less than those recommended
byARMA's "Residential Asphalt Roofing Manual" or "The NRCA Steep Roofing Manual."
1. 'Fasten asphalt shingles to roof sheathing with either roofing staples, applied pneumatically, or nails.
B. Felt Underlayrnent: Apply 1 layer of felt Wlderlayment horizontally over entire surfaCe to receive asphalt
shingles, lapping succeeding courses a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm), end laps a minimum of 4 inches (100
, rom), and hips and valleys a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm). Fasten felt with sufficient number of roofing nails
or noncorrosive staples to hold Wlderlaymentin place Wltil asphalt shingle installation,
C. Flashing: Install metal flashing and trim as indicated and according to details and recommendations of the
"Asphalt Roofing" section of "The NRCA Steep Roofing Manual" and ARMA's "Residential Asphalt Roofing
Manual. "
D. Install asphalt shingles, beginning atroot's lower edge, with a starter strip of roll roofing or inverted asphalt
shingles with tabs removed. Fasten asphalt shingles in the desired weather exposure pattern~ use number of
fasteners per shingle as reconuneoooo by manufacturer. Use vertical and horizontal chalk lines to ensure straight
coursmg.
1. Cut and fit asphalt shingles at valleys. ridges. and edges to provide maximum weather protection. Provide
same weather exposlU'e at ridges as specified for roof. Lap asphalt shingles at ridges to shed water away
from direction of prevailing wind.
2. Use fasteners at ridges of sufficient length to penetrate sheathing as specified,
3. Pattern: 1/2 shingle spacing offset at succeeding courses.
3.14 SIDING INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with siding manufacturer's written installation instructions applicable to products and
applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply. Center nails in elongated nailing slots without
binding. siding to allow for thermal movement Overlap joints to shed water away from direction of prevailing
wind
B. Install aluminum siding. soffit, and accessories' according to AAMA 1402,
C. Isolate dissimilar metals by separating from siding with rubber gaskets, elastomeric sealant, or rubber washers
where fasteners penetrate siding. Dissimilar metals behind siding may be isolated by covering with polyethylene
film.
3.15 SIDINGADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Remove and replace damaged. improperly installed. or otherwise defective siding materials with new materials
complying with specified requirementS,
B. Clean finished surfaces according to siding manufacturer's written instructions and maintain in a clean condition
during construction.
3.16 DOOR AND FRAME INSTALLATION
MASONRY BUILDING SYSTEMS
13 125 . 11
3.17
3.18
3.19
A.
General: Install steel doors. frames.' and accessories according to Shop Drawings. manufacturer's data, and as
specified. '
I
I
I
I
B.
Placing Frames: Comply' with provisions of SOl 105. unless otherwise indicated. Set frames accurately in
position, phnnbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are - set After wall construction is
completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders. leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.
I. In masomy constructiOn, install at least 3 wall anchors per jamb adjacent to hinge location on hinge jamb
and at corresponding heights on strike jamb. Acceptable anchors inClude masonry wire anchors and
masonry T -shaped anchors.
C.
Door Installation: Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames. within clearances specified in ANSI/SOl 100,
DOOR AND FRAME ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
I
I
I
I
A.
Prime Coat T ouchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and
apply touchup of compatibie air-drying primer.
B.
Protection Removal: Immediately before final inspection, remove protective wrappings from doors and frames.
HARDWARE INSTAllATION
A.
MO\mt hardware tmits at heights indicated in following applicable publications. except as specifically indicated
or required to comply with governing regulations and except as otherwise directed by Engineer.
1.
"Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames. by the Door and
Hardware Institute.
I
B.
Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions l1IJ.d recommendations. Where
cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in
another way. coordinate r~ova1. storage. and reinstallation or application of surface protection with finishing
work. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrates involved.
I
I
C,
Set tmits level. plmnb. and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as neceSsary
for proper installation and operation,
I
I
I
D.
Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors
in accordance with industry standards,
E.
Set thresholds for exterior doors in full bed of butyl-rubber or polyisobutylene mastic sealant.
F.
Weatherstripping and Seals: Comply with manufactw"er's instructions and recommendations to the extent
installation requirements are not otherwise indicated.
. .
HARDWARE ADJUSTING. CLEANING. AND DEMONSTRATING
I
A
Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door to ensure ProPer operation or function of every
tmit Replace units that camiot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly or as mtended for the application made.
I
I
1.
Where door hardware is installed more than one month prior to acceptance or occupancy of a space or
area, return to the installation during the week prior to acceptance or occupancy and make final check and
adjustment of all hardware items in such Spi1ceor area. Clean operating items as necessary to restore
proper function and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final
operation ofh,eating and ventilating equipment .
B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation.
I
I
MASONRY BUILDING SYSTEMS
13125 - 12
I
I
I
I
I
C. Instruct Owner's personnel in the proper adjustment and maintenance of door hardware and hardware tiIiishes.
D.
Six-Month Adjustment: Approximately six months after the date of Substantial Completion, the Installer,
accompanied by representatives of the manufacturers of latchsets 'and locksets and of door control devices, and
of other major hardware suppliers, shall return to the P~ject fu perform the following work:
1. Examine and re-adjusteach item of door ha:rdware as necessary to restore function of doo,rs and hardware
to comply with specified requirements.
2. Consult with and instruct Owner's personnel in recommended additions to the maintenance procedures.
3. Replace hardware items that have deteriorated or failed due to faulty design, materials, or installation of
hardware units.
4. Prepare a written report of current and predictable problems ( of substantial nature) in the performance
of the hardware.
3,20 APPLYING AND FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL
I
I
I
I
U
I
3.21
I
I
I
3,22
I
D
I
I
A.
Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standards: Install and finish gypsum panels to comply with
ASlM C 840 and GA-216.
B.
Install ceiling board panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting
end joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one
framing member.
C.
Install gypsum panels with face side out. Do not install imperfect, damaged. or damp panels. Butt panels
together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) of open space between
panels. Do not force into place,
D.
Space fasteners in gypsum panels acCording to referenced gypsum board application and finishing standard and
manufacturer's recommendations.
GYPSUM BOARD APPLICATION METHODS
A.
Single-Layer Application: Instal1 gypsum wallboard panels as follows:
1.
On ceilings, apply gypswn panels prior to walVpartition board application to the greatest extent possible
and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Single-Layer Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports as follows:
1. Fasten with screws.
INSTALLING GYPSUM WALL BOARD TRIM ACCESSORIES
A.
General: For trim accessories with back flanges, fasten to framing with the same fasteners used to fasten gypsum
board. Otherwise, fasten trim accessories according to accessory manufacturer's directions for type, length, and
spacing of fasteners, .
Install edge trim where edge of gypsum panels would otherwise be exposed. Provide edge trim type with face
flange formed to receive joint compound, except where other types are indicated. '
B.
1, Install LC-bead where gypsum panels are tightly abutted to other construction and back flange can be
attached to framing or supporting substrate.
2, Install L-bead where edge trim can only be installed after gypsum panels are installed.
MASONRY BUILDING SYSTEMS
13125 - 13
I
3,23 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, flanges of comerbead. edge trim. control joints, penetrations,
fastener heads, smface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsUm board smfaces for decoration.
B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged aieas using setting-type joint compound
C, Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, ex~t those with trim' accessories having flanges not requiring tape.
D. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints and to flanges of trim accessories as recommended by trim accessory
manufacturer.
E. Levels of Gypswn Board Finish: Provide the following levels of gypswn board finish per GA-214,
1, Level 3 for gypswn board.
F. Use the following joint compound combination as applicable to the finish levels specified:
, '
1. Embedding and First Coat:" Setting-type joint compound. Fill (Second) Coat: Setting-type joint
compound Finish (Third) Coat: Sandable, setting-tYPe joint compound
G. Where Level 3 gypsum board finish is indicated, embed tape in joint compound and apply first and fill (second)
coats of joint compound,
3,24 APPLYING TEXTURE FINISHES
A. Surface Preparation and Primer. Prepare and apply primer to gypsum panels and other surfaces receiving texture
finishes according to texture finish manufacturer's instructions. Apply primer only to surfaces that are clean. dry,
and smooth.
B. Texture Finish Application: Mix and apply finish to gypswn panels and other smfaces indicated to receive
texture finish according to texture finish manufacturer's directions. Using powered spray equipment, produce
a uniform texture matching approved mockup and free of starved spots or other evidence of thin application or
of application patterns.
C. Prevent texture finishes from coming into contact with surfaces not indicated to receive texture finish by covering
them with masking agents, polyethylene film, or other means. If, despite these precautions, texture finishes
contact these smfaces, immediately remove droppings and overspray as recommended by texture finish
manufacturer to prevent damage.
3.25 PAINT SCHEDULE
A. Concrete Masonry Units: Provide the following finish systems over interior concrete masonry block units:
1. Semigloss, Water-borne Epoxy Finish: 2 finish coats over ,an undercoat and a filled smface.
a. Block Filler: High-performance, block filler applied at spreading rate recommended by the
manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 5.0 mils (0.13 nun).
b. Finish Coat: Odorless, semigloss, water-borne epoxy applied at spreading rate recommended by ,
the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than ),5 niils (0,038 nun),
B. Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over ferrous metal:
MASONRY BunnING SYSTEMS
13125 - 14
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
"I,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
o
D
U
o
I
I
I
B
I
I
I
I
1. Full-Gloss, Acrylic-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a primer.
a. Primer: Quick-drying, rust-inhibitive, alkyd-based or epoxy-metal primer, as recommended by
the manufacturer fqr ~s substrate, applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer
to achieve a total dryfiIffi thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm).
1)
2)
3)
4)
Devoe:
Glidden:
Moore:
PPG:
13101 Mirrolac Rust Penetrating Metal Primer.
5207 Glid-Guard Tank & Structural Primer, White.
ironClad Retardo Rust-Inhibitive Paint #163.
6-208 Speedhide InteriorlExterior Rust Inhibitive Steel Primer.
b. First and Second ,Coats: Full-gloss, acrylic-latex. exterior enamel applied at spreading rate
recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.5 mils
(0.064 mm).
1) Devoe:
2) Glidden:
3) Moore:
4) PPG:
84XX Mirrolac-WB Interior-Exterior Waterborne High
Gloss Enamel.
6900 Series Lifemaster Pro Hi-Performance Acrylic Coating.
Impervex Enamel #309.
5 I Line Brilliant Reflections InteriorlExterior Latex Gloss Enamel.
3.26 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean, prepare, and prime or reprime welds, bolted connections,
and abraded surfaces of prime-painted pritnary and secondary framing, accessories, and bearing plates.
1. Clean and prepare surfaces by hand-tool cleaning, SSPC-SP 2, or power-tool cleaning, SSPC-SP 3.
2. Apply compatible primer of same type as shop primer used on adjacent surfaces.
B. Doors: Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup
of compatible air-drying primer.
1. Protection Removal: l!nmediately before final inspection, remove protective wrappings from doors and
frames.
C. ,Wmdows: Clean metal surfaces promptly after installing windows. Exercise care to avoid damage to protective
coatings and finishes. Remove , excess glazing and sealant compOlmds, dirt, and other substances, Clean glass
promptly after installing windows.
END OF SECTION 13125
MASONRY BUILDING SYSTEMS
13125 - 15
I
SECTION 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
I
PART I - GENERAL
SUMMARY
I
1.1
I
I
u
1.2
A.
B.
1.3
A.
B.
I
o
o
D
.
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
2,
3.
4.
5.
6,
Raceways.
Building wire and connectors.
Supporting devices for electrical components.
Electrical identification.
Electricity-metering components.
Concrete equipment bases.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defmed in NFPA 70, Article 100,
by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
Comply with NFPA 70.
COORDINA TION
Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installing electrical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the
Work,
Coordinate electrical service connections to components furnished by utility company. Goordinate installation
and connection of exterior underground utilities and services, including provision for electricity-metering
components. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and of utility company providing
electrical power.
u
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
RACEWAYS
I
2.1
A,
B.
C.
D.
2,2
A,
B.
C.
D.
2,3
A.
I
I
B
I
I
I
RMC: ANSI C80,3, zinc-coated steel, with threaded fittings.
LFMC: Zinc-coated'steel with sunlight-resistant and mineral-oil-resistant plastic jacket.
RNC: NEMA TC 2, Schedule 40 PVC, withNEMA TC3 fittings.
Raceway Fittings: Specifically designed for the raceway type with which used.
CONDUCTORS
Conductors, No. 10 A WG and Smaller: Solid or stranded copper.
Conductors, Larger Than No. 10 A WG: Stranded copper.
Insulation: Thermoplastic, rated at 75 deg C minimum.
Wire Connectors and Splices: Units of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class suitable for service
indicated.
SUPPORTING DEVICES
Material: Cold-formed steel, with corrosion-resistant coating acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
I
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
16050 - I
B.
2.4
Metal Items for Use Outdoors or in Damp Locations: Hot-dip galvanized steel.
I
c.
Slotted-Steel Channel Supports: Flange edges turned toward web, and 9/16-inch-diameter slotted holes at
a maximum of2 inches Q,C., in webs.,
I
D. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.
I
I
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
A,
Colored Adhesive Marking Tape for Wires: Self-adhesive vinyl tape, not less than 1 inch wide by 3 mils
thick.
2,5 EQUIPMENT FOR UTILITY COMPANY'S ELECTRICITY METERING
A. Materials and Components: Install level, plumb, and parallel and perpendicular to other systems and
components. ' '\
I
I
I
I
, A. Meter Sockets: Comply with requirements of electrical power utility company.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3,1 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
B. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect for
ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference with other installations.
3.2 RACEWA Y APPLICATION
3,3
A.
B.
C.
D,
E.
3.4
A.
B.
C,
D.
Use the following raceways for outdoor installations:
I
A,
1, Exposed: RMC.
2. Underground: RNC.
3, Connection to Vibrating Equipment: LFMC.
4, Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 3R or Type 4.
I
RACEWAY AND CABLE INSTALLATION
I
Use temporary raceway caps to prevent foreign matter from entering.
I
Make conduit bends and offsets so ID is not reduced. Keep legs of bends in the same plane and straight legs
of offsets parallel.
I
I
Use raceway fittings compatible with raceways and cables and suitable for use and location.
Transition from RNC to RMC before rising above grade.
Connect equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement with a maximum of 72-inch LFMC
in wet or damp locations.
I
WIRING METHODS FOR POWER, LIGHTING, AND CONTROL CIRCUl'fS
Service: Type THHNrrHWN insulated conductors in raceway.
I
16050 - 2
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
I
I'
I
I
I
I
I
D
I
o
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3,5
A.
B.
3,6
A,
B.
C.
3.7
A.
B.
C,
D.
3.8
A.
B.
3.9
3,10
3.11
3,12
WIRING INST ALLA TION
Install splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better
mechanical strength and insulation ratings than un spliced conductors.
Connect component connections to wiring systems and to ground. Tighten electrical connectors and
tenninals, according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values.
ELECTRICAL SUPPORTING DEVICE APPLlCA TION
Damp Locations and Outdoors: Hot-dip galvanized materials.
Selection of Supports: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
Strength of Supports: Adequate to carry present and future loads, times a safety factor of at least four;
minimum of200-lb design load.
SUPPORT INSTALLATION
Install support devices to securely and pennanently fasten and support electrical components.
Install individual and multiple raceway hangers and riser clamps to support raceways. Provide U-bolts,
clamps, attachments, and other,hardware necessary for securing conduits.
Arrange supports in vertical runs so the weight of raceways and enclosed conductors is carried entirely by
raceway supports, with no weight load on raceway tenninals.
Install metal channel racks for moun~ing panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and
junction boxes, and other devices.
, IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS AND DEVICES
Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before applying.
Color-code 240/120-V system secondary service, feeder, and branch-circuit conductors throughout the
secondary electrical system as follows:
1. Phase A: Black.
2. Phase B: Red.
3. Neutral: White.
4. 'Ground: Green.
UTILITY COMPANY ELECTRICITY-METERING EQUIPMENT
A.
Install equipment according to utility company's written requirements. Provide grounding and empty conduits
as required by utility company.
CONCRETE BASES
A.
Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated. Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete and
reinforcement.
TOUCHUP PAINTING
A.
Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
On completion of installation, including outlets, fittings, and devices, inspect exposed fmish, Remove burrs,
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
16050 - 3
dirt, paint spots, and construction debris.
END'OF SECTION 16050
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
D
I
I
I
I
I
I
B
SECTION 16140 - WIRING DEVICES
PART I - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
SUMMARY
A,
This Section includes receptacles, connectors, switches, and finish plates.
SUB MITT ALS
A,
Product Data: For each product specified.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100,
by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
B,
Comply with NEMA WD I.
C.
Comply with NFPA 70.
PART1- PRODUCTS,
2.1
2.2
2.3
MANUF ACTURERS
A,
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
I. Wiring Devices:
a. Arrow-Hart, Inc.
b. ' Eagle Electric Manufacturing Co., Inc.
c. GE Company; GE Wifing Devices.
, d, Hubbell, Inc,; Wiring DeVices Div,
e. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc.
f. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices Div.
RECEPTACLES
A.
Straight-Blade and Locking Receptacles: Heavy-Duty grade.
B.
GFCI Receptacles: Feed-through type, with integral NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R duplex receptacle
arranged to protect connected downstream receptacles on same circuit. Design units for installation in a 2-
3/4-inch-deep outlet box without an adapter.
SWITCHES
2.4 WALL PLATES
A.
Snap Switches: Heavy-duty, quiet type, 20 A, 120/277-V ac.
A.
Single and combination types match corresponding wiring devices.
I. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish.
2. Cover: Weatherproof type, cast aluminum, with painted finish.
2.5 FINISHES
A.
Color: Ivory.
WIRING DEVICES
16140 - 1
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
3.2
A.
B.
3.3
A,
B.
C.
3.4
A,
INST ALLA TION
I
Install devices and assemblies plumb and secure.
Arrangement of Devices: Mount ~ith long dimension vertical, and grounding tenninal of receptacles on top.
Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates.
I
CONNECTIONS
I
Connect wiring device grounding tenninal to branch-circuit equipment grounding conductor.
Tighten electrical ~onnectors.and tenninals according to manufacturers published torque-tightening values.
I
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
I
Test wiring devices for proper polarity and ground continuity.
. .
Test GFCI operation with both local and remote fault simulations according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
I
Replace damaged or defective components.
I
CLEANING
Internally clean devices, device outlet boxes, and enclosures. Replace stajned or. improperly painted wall
plates or devices.
I
END OF SECTION 16140
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
16140 - 2
WIRING DEVICES
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I,
I
u
I
I
SECTION 16145 - LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
L3
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes lighting contactors.
SUBMITI ALS
A.
Product Data: Include dimensions and data on features, components, and ratings for lighting control devices.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A,
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100,
for their indicated use and installation conditions by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
3,2
MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1.
2.
3,
4.
Cutler-Hammer Products; Eaton Corporation.
GE Lighting Controls.
Siemens Energy and Automation, Inc.
Square D Co,
2.1
2,2 MUL TIPOLE CONT ACTORS
A.
Description: Electrically operated and held, and complying with UL 508 and NEMA ICS 2.
1.
Current Rating for Switching: 'UL listing or rating consistent with type of load served, including
tungsten filament, inductive, and high-inrush ballast (ballasts with 15 percent or less total harmonic
distortion of nonnalload current).
Control Coil Voltage: Match control power source.
2.
o PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
B
I
I
o
H
I
A.
Install equipment level a.nd plumb and according to manufacturer's written instructions.
8,
Mount lighting control devices according to manufacturer's written instructions.
C,
Install wiring between sensing and control deviCes according to, manufacturer's written instructions and as
speCified in Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables" for low-voltage connections.
CLEANING
A,
Cleaning: Clean equipment and devices internally and externally using methodS and materials recommended
by manufacturers, and repair damaged finishes.
END OF SECTION 16145
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
16145 - 1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 16452 - GROUNDING
PART 1 - GENERAL
l.l
1.2
SUMMARY
A,
This Section includes grounding of electrical systems anq equipment and basic requirements for grounding
for protection of life, equipment, circuits, and systems. Grounding requirements specified in this Section may
be supplemented in other Sections of these Specifications.
QUALITY ~SSURANCE
A,
Comply with NFPA 70.
B. Comply with UL 467.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
.C,
Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are listed and labeled.,
..
2.1 GROUNDING AND BONDING PRODUCTS
2.2
A,
B.
C,
D:
2.3
A.
B,
C.
2,4
A.
Governing Requirements: Where types, sizes, ratings, and quantities indicated are in excess of National
Electrical Code (NEC) requirements, the more stringent requirements and the greater size, rating, and quantity
indications govern.
WIRE AND CABLE GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
Comply with Division 16 Section "Wires and Cables."
Equipment Grounding Conductors: Insulated with green color insulation.
Grounding-Electrode Conductors:, Stranded cable,
Underground Conductors: Bare, tinned, stranded;
CONNECTOR PRODUCTS
Pressure Connectors: High-conductivity-plated units.
Bolted Clamps: Heavy-duty type.
Exothermic-Welded Connections: Provided in kit form and selected per manufacturer's written instructions
for specific types, sizes; and combinations of conductors and connected items. '
GROUNDING ELECTRODES
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A.
Grounding Rods: Sectional type; copper-Clad steel. Size: 5/8 inch by 96 inches.
3.1 APPLICATION
A. Equipment Grounding Conductors:: Comply with NEC Article 250 for types, sizes, and quantities of
, equipment grounding conductors, except where specific types, larger sizes, or more conductors than required
by NEC are indicated,
1.
Install equipment grounding conductor with circuit conductors for the items below in addition to those
GROUNDING
16452 - I
3,2
3.3
required by Code:
a.
b.
Feeders and branch circuits.
Flexible raceway runs.
B. Separately Derived Systems: Where NEC requires grounding, ground according to NEC Paragraph 250-26.
C,
Metal Poles Supporting Outdoor Lighting Fixtures: Ground pole toa grounding electrode in addition to
separate equipment grounding conductor run with supply branch circuit.
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Ground electrical systems and equipment according to NEC requirements, except where Drawings
or Specifications exceed NEC requirements.
B.
Grounding Rods: Locate a minimum of I-rod length from each other and at least the same distance from any
other grounding electrode. Drive until tops are 2 inches below finished floor or fmal grade. Interconnect with
grounding-electrode conductors. Use exothennic welds, Make these connections without damaging cppper
coating or exposing steel.
C,
Grounding Conductors: Route along the shortest and straightest paths possible. A void obstructing access
or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.
D.
Underground Grounding Conductors: Use bare copper wire. Bury at least 24 inches below grade.
CONNECTIONS
A.
General: Make connections so possibility of galvanic action or electrolysis is minimized, Select connectors,
connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct contact will be galvanically
compatible. Use electroplated or hot-tin-coated materials to assure high conductivity. Make connections with
clean, bare metal at points of contact.
B.
Exothennic- Welded Connections: Use for underground connections. Comply with manufacturer's written,
instructions, Welds that are puffed up or that show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are not
acceptable,
c.
Equipment Grounding-Wire Tenninations: For No.8 A WG and larger, use pressure-type grounding lugs.
No, 10 A WG and smaller grounding conductors may be tenninated with winged pressure-type connectors,
D,
Noncontact Metal Raceway Tenninations: Where metallic raceways tenninate at metal housings withOl~t
mechanical and electrical connection to housing, tenninate each conduit with a grounding bushing. Connect
grounding bushings with a bare grounding conductor to grounding bus or tenninal in housing. Bond
electrically noncontinuous conduits at both entrances and exits with grounding bushings and bare grounding
conductors.
E,
Compression-Type Connections: Use hydraulic compression tools to provide correct circumferential pressure
for compression connectors. Use tools and dies recommended by manufacturer of connectors. Provide
embossing die code or other standard method to make a visible indication that a connector has been
adequately compressed on grounding conductor.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A,
Tests: Subject the completed grounding system to a megger test at service disconnect enclosure grounding
tenninal. Measure ground resistance not less than 2 full days after the last trace of precipitation, and without
the soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment
or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance. Maximum grounding to resistance value is
25 ohms.
END OF SECTION 16452
16452 - 2
GROUNDING
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I'
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
'I
B
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 16470 - PANELBOARDS
PART I - GENERAL
l.l
1.2
1.3
1.4
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes lighting and power panelboards rated 600 V and less.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Shop Drawings: For panelboards, Show tabulations of installed devices, major features, and voltage rating.
Include the following:
I, Enclosure type.
2, Bus configuration and current ratings,
3. Short-circuit current rating of panel board,
4. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual protective devices.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are listed and labeled.
B.
Comply with NFPA 70.
C. Comply with NEMA PB 1.
EXTRA MA TERlALS
A. Keys: 6 spares of each type for panelboard cabinet lock.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2,1
2.2
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:
I. Eaton Corp.; Westinghouse & Cutler-Hammer Products,
2. General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution & Control Div.
3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
4. Square D Co.
P ANELBOARD F ABRlCA TION
A.
Enclosures: Surface-mounted cabinets as indicated. NEMA 250, Type 3R.
B.
Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. Front for surface-mounted panelboards shall be same
dimensions as box.
C.
Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment ground conductors. Bonded to
box,
D.
Service Equipment Approval: Listed for use as service equipment for panelboards with main service
'disconnect.
E.
Future Devices: Equip with mounting brackets, bus connections, and necessary appurtenances, for the
overcurrent protective device ampere ratings indicated for future installation of devices.
F.
Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing adjacent
PANELBOARDS
16470 - 1
2,3
units.
I
G.
Doors: In panelboard front, with. concealed hinges. Secure with flush catch and tumbler lock.
I
OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
A,
Molded-Case Circuit Breaker: NEMA AB I, handle lockable.
I
I. Characteristics: Frame size, trip rating, number of poles, and auxiliary devices as indicated and
interrupting capacity rating to meet available fault current.
2. Application Listing: ' Appropriate for application.
3. Lugs: Mechanicid lugs and power-distribution connectors fornumber,size, and material of conductors
indicated.
I
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A,
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
lNST ALLA TION
I
Install panelboards,and accessory items according to NEMA PB 1.1.
Mounting: Plumb and rigid without distortion of box,
I
Circuit Directory: Type directory to indicate installed circuit loads.
Install filler plates in unused spaces.
I
Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including grounding connections, according to manufacturer's
published torque-tightening values.
I
On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of panelboards. Remove paint splatters and other
spots, dirt, and debris. Touch up scratches and mars of finish to match original fmish.
I
END OF SECTION 16470
.
.
.1
I
I
"
I
I
I
I
16470 - 2
PANELBOARDS
I
I
SECTION 16475 - FUSES
I
PART I - GENERAL
SUMMARY
I
1.\
A,
1.2
A,
1.3
A.
B.
e.
I
I
I
I
This Section includes fuses rated 600 volts and less.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data for each fuse type specified.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Source Limitations: Obtain fuses from one source and by a single manufacturer.
Comply with NFPA 70 for components and installation.
Listing and Labeling: Provide fuses specified in this Section that are listed and labeled.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
I
2.1
I
I
2.2
I
A,
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide fuses by one of the following:
I.
2,
3.
Cooper Industries, Inc.; Bussmann Div.
Gould Shawmlit.
Tracor, Inc.; Littelfuse, Inc. Subsidiary.
CARTRIDGE FUSES
A,
Characteristics: NEMA FU I, nonrenewable .cartridge fuse; class as specified or indicated; current rating as
indicated; voltage rating consistent with circuit voltage.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
3.1
A,
3.2
A.
B.
3.3
A.
3.4
A,
I
I
I
I
I
EXAMINA TION
Examine utilization equipment nameplates and installation instructions to verify proper fuse locations, sizes,
and characteristics. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
FUSE APPLICATIONS
Motor Branch Circuits: Class RK5, time delay.
Other Branch Circuits: Class RKI, non-time delay.
INST ALLA TION
Install fuses in fusible devices as indicated. Arrange fuses so fuse ratings are readable without removing fuse.
IDENTIFICA TION
Install typewritten labels on inside door of each fused switch to indicate fuse replacement infonnation.
I
END OF SECTION 16475
FUSES
I
16475 - 1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 16476 - DISCONNECT SWITCHES
1.1
PART 1 - GENERAL
SUMMARY
1.2
1.3
A.
This Section includes individually mounted switches used for the following:
1.
2.
Feeder and equipment disconnect switches.
Feeder branch-circuit protection,
SUBMITI ALS
A,
Product Data for disconnect switches and accessories specified in this Section.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A,
Comply with NFPA 70 for components and installation,
B.
Listing and Labeling: Provide disconnect switches specified in this Section that are listed and labeled.
2.1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
3,1
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide disconnect switches by one of the
following:
2,2
1.
2.
3.
4.
Eaton Corp.; Cutler-Hammer Products.
General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution and Control Division.
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
Square D Co.
DISCONNECT SWITCHES
A.
Enclosed, Nonfusible Switch: NEMA KS I, Type HD, with lockable handle.
B,
Enclosed, Fusible Switch: NEMA KS I, Type HD, clips to accommodate specified fuses, enclosure
consistent with environment where located, handle lockable with 2 padlocks, and interlocked with cover in
CLOSED position.
C.
Enclosure: NEMA KS 1, Typ~l, unless otherwise specified or required to meet environmental conditions
of installed location.
Lugs: Mechanical lugs and power:-distribution connectors for number, size, and material of conductors
indicated, '
I PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
I
I
I
D.
INST ALL A TION
A.
Install disconnect switches in locations, as indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B,
Install disconnect switches level and plumb.
c.
Connect disconnect switches to wiring system and to ground as indicated and instructed by manufacturer.
Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values.
DISCONNECT SWITCHES
16476-1
0,
Identify each disconnect switch according to requirements specified in Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical
Materials and Methods."
I
3.2
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
I
A,
Testing: After installing disconnect switches and after electrical circuitry has been energized, demonstrate
product capability and compliance with requirements. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible,
and retest to demonstrate compliance;'otherwise, remove and replace with new units and retest.
I
A,
After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect exposed fmish. Remove
burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finish inclu~ing chips, scratches, and abrasions.
I
3.3 CLEANING
END OF SECTION 16476
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DISCONNECT SWITCHES
16476 - 2
I
-~
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 16511 - GENERAL LIGHTING
PART I - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes interior and exterior lighting fixtures, l~ps, ballasts, and' accessories, exclusive of
sports lighting,
SUBMITT ALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture indicated, arranged in order of fixture designation. Include
data on features, accessories, and the following:
1.
2,
3.
Dimensions of fixtures,
Electrical ratings and photometric data.
Types of lamps.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fixtures and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defmed in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Comply with NFPA70.
COORDfNA nON
A,
Fixtures, Mounting Hardware, and Trim: Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures with ceiling
system and other construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2,1 MANUFACTURERS
2.2
A,
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements"products that may be incorporated into the
Work include, but are not limited to, the products indicated in the Lighting Fixture Schedule on the plans.
FLUORESCENT LAMP BALLASTS
A.
General Requirements: Features include the following:
1.
2.
3.
Designed for type and quantity of lamps indicated at full light outpu~.
Total Hannonic Distortion Rating: Less than 20 percent.
Sound Rating: A.
B.
Electronic Ballasts for Linear Lamps: Features include the following, besides those in "General
Requirements" Paragraph above:
1. 'Certified Ballast Manufacturer Certification: Indicated by label.
2. Encapsulation: Without voids in potting compound.
3. Parallel Lamp Circuits: Multiple lamp ballasts connected to maintain full light output on surviving
lamps if one or more lamps fail.
C,
Electromagnetic Ballasts for, Linear Lamps: Features include the following, besides those in "General
Requirements" Paragraph above:
GENERAL LIGHTING
16511 - 1
1. Type: Energy saving. ,
2. Certified Ballast Manufacturer Certification: Indicated by label.
3. Encapsulation: Without voids in potting compound.
I
I
I
D,
Ballasts for Low- Temperature Environments: As follows:
\
1. Temperatures 0 Deg F and Above: Electronic or electromagnetic type rated for 0 deg F starting
temperature.
2.3 LAMPS
A. Fluorescent Color Temperature and Minimum Color-Rendering Index: 3500 K and 85 CRI.
I
I
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
INST ALLA TlON
3,1
A.
B.
3.2
A.
B.
3.3
A.
Fixtures: Set level, plumb, and square with ceiling and walls, and secure according to manufacturer's written
instructions and approved submittal materials. Install lamps in each fixture.
Ground equipment. Tighten electrical connectors and tenninals according to manufacturer's published torque-
tightening values. " '
I
I
I
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Inspect each instal'ed fixture for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.
Malfunctioning Fixtures and Components: Replace or repair, then retest. Repeat procedure until units
operate properly.
CLEANING
I
I
I
Clean fixtures internally and externally after installation. Use methods and materials recommended by
manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 16511
I
I
I
I
I
I
16511 - 2
GENERAL LIGHTING,
I
I
SECTION 16531 - SPORTS LIGHTING
I
PART 1 - GENERAL
SUMMARY
I
I.l
I
1.2
I
I
I
I
I
D,
E.
1.3
A.
B.
1.4
A,
I
I
I
I
u
I
H
I
u
A.
This Section includes sports lighting systems with luminaires, lamps, ballasts, multi-level controls, control
wiring, luminaire supports, and accessories.
SUB MITT ALS
A.
Product Data: For lighting systems. Include data on features, accessories, fmishes, and the following:
1, Materials and dimensions of luminaires.
2. Electrical ratings and photometric data.
B.
Shop Drawings: For lighting system. Include all major components of the lighting system specific to the
project. Generic drawings are not acceptable,
Design Analysis: Submit a computer generated model which shall consist of a grid overlay of the playing
fields with predicted horizontal footcandle levels. The grid spacing shall be no greater than 10 feet by 10 feet
for the tennis courts and no greater than 20 feet by 20 feet for the baseball field. A minimum of 100 data
points shall be used in each of the analyses,
C.
Product Certificates: Submit in writing a letter guaranteeing compliance with the specifications for light level,
light loss factor, and uniformity.
Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Luminaires and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, for their indicated use,
location, and installation conditions by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction
Comply with NFP A 70.
WARRANTY
General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owper
may have under 9ther provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, imd run concurrent
with, other warranties made by Contrac~or under requirements of the Contract Documents.
B,
Special Warranty: As specified below. This warranty is in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights
and remedies Owner may have under requirements of the Contract Documents.
I.
Manufacturer shall warrant in writing the entire lighting system (excluding ,fuses and lamps) to be free
from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of seven years starting from the date of
delivery.
Manufacturer shall agree in writing to provide labor and materials for a period of two years to replace
defective parts or repair defects in workmanship, or, at its election, to pay reasonable costs of labor
for such repairs. For the remainder of the' warranty period, replacement materials will be provided at
no charge.
Lamps shall be warranted by the manufacturer in writing not to fail for two years from the date of
delivery. Lamps which fail during the first year of the warranty, period will be replaced and installed
at no cost to the Owner. Lamps which fail during the second year will be replaced by the
manufacturer, but installation will be the Owner's responsibility,
2.
3.
I
SPORTS LIGHTING
16531 - I
I
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2,1
2.2
2.3
2.4
MANUF ACTURERS
I
A,
All lighting system manufacturers must be approved to bid at least ten' d~ys pri?r to the bid date.
Documentation demonstrating compliance ~ith the system perfonnance and matenal requrrements below shall
be provided prior to approval for bid, Documentation shall be provided in the fonn of clear and concise
statements and/or plans and drawings which can be easily read and clearly interpreted.
,I
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
I
A.
General: The lighting systems shall be provided as a complete designed and engineered package. The
systems shall meet or exceed the perfonnance requirements specified.
I
B.
Average Target Maintained Light Level: The average target maintained light level of the playing field shall
be as follows,
I
1.
2,
Tennis Courts: 40 footcandles,
Baseball Field: '30 f()otcandle~ (infield) and 20 footcandles (outfieJd).
C.
Unifonnity: The unifonnity of the playing field shall be measured by comparing the maximum reading to the
minimum reading. The '!laximum to minimum ratio shall not exceed the following.
I
1.
2,
Tennis Courts: 2.5: 1.
Baseball Field: 2:0: 1 (infield) and 3.0: I (outfield).
I
0,
Target Loss Factor: The light loss factor used to detennine the target light levels shall be a maintenance factor
of 0.8 multiplied by the lamp tilt factor. Light loss must be calculated in accordance with IES standards.
Maintenance factor shall be calculated as follows: ambient temperature factor (1) x voltage factor (1) x ballast
factor (1) x lamp lumen depreciation (0.84) x luminaire dirt depreCiation (0.95) per LE.S. Manual RP-6-88.
I
I
TWO-LEVEL LIGHTING CONTROLS - TENNIS COURTS
A.
General: The lighting fixtures shall be equipped with a two-level dimming system.
I
B,
Mode of Operation: The mode of operation (high/low) shall be detennined by a key switch located on the
dimming circuit control box. With key switch on high, the system is to operate at nonnallamp wattage. With
key switch on low, the system starts on high and switches automatically after ten minutes to reduce the lamp
wattage. The lamps will continue to operate in the low mode until the system is de-energized or the key
switch is changed to the high position.
I
C.
Operation of Lamps: The system allows for operation of the lamps at either 1000/400 watts. The system may
be switched from low to high to low at any time after the initial wann-up phase with no interruption of the
light output.
I
I
0,
Malfunction During Operation: Dimming system malfunctions shall not affect nonnal operation of this
lighting system.
I
E,
Multi- Watt Control Panel: Panel shall consist of a fiberglass box 19 inches high x 16 inches wide x 9 inches
deep, NEMA type 4X enclosure. Box shall have a key switch for high/low operation, and tenninal strips as
required for this lighting system~
I
FIXTURES
A.
Assembly: The luminaire assembly shall consist of a lamp, lamp socket, reflector, lens, lamp cone,
reinforcing retaining ring, adjustable aiming mounting device, ballast,steel crossanns, and integral wiring
enclosed in a rigid raceway. The knuckle and cone assembly for each fixture shall be of die cast aluminum
construction and shall be coated with a polyurethane powder coat paint.
I
I
16531-2
'SPORTS LIGHTING
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.5
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2,6
I
I
I
2.7
I
I
B,
Hardware: All latches, hinges, and non-current carrying fasteners shall be stainless steel and shall further be
coated with a clear thermoset polymer coating to prevent galvanic interaction.
C.
Latching Device: The fixtures shall have a positive latching device for each luminaire. The device shall
provide for automatic repositioning of the aiming after relamping. A stainless stee_1 bolt and nut shall be
provided to secure the alignment;' f.' ' '.f "
D,
Beam Control: The reg lector system shall place greater than 60% of the total light output below the maximum
candlepower point onto the field. '
E.
Mounting Height: The fixture mounting heights from the playing field surface shall be in accordance with
the following.
I.
2.
Tennis Courts: 50 feet.
Baseball Field: 60 feet.
BALLASTS
A.
General: The ballasts shall be mounted in an electrical box on the pole and separate from the fixture
mounting. The electrical box shall be a NEMA 3R rated gasketed enclosure to house the ballasts, capacitors,
fuses, thermal magnetic circuit breakers, and distribution lugs. The electrical box shall be located at
approximately 10 feet above grade atthe pole foundation. The electrical box shall be hot dip galvanized to
ASTM-A 123-89a standards after fabrication to an average thickness of not less than 25 mils. Sheet steel
galvanized prior to fabrication shall not be accepted.
, "
B.
Internal Wiring: The internal wiring shall be rated for at least 90 degrees C. and shall be suitable for the
voltage and current involved. The wiring shall be routed away from ballast cores.
C.
High-Intensity-Discharge Ballasts: Comply with ANSI C82.4. and the following:
1.
2.
Type: Constant wattage,auto regulating.
Fuses: One in each ungrounded supply conductor. Voltage and current ratings as recommended by
ballast manufacturer.
D.
Safety Disconnecting Device: Each electrical box shall be equipped with a UL listed thermal magnetic circuit
breaker such that electrical power to all equipment served by the feeder circuit shall be disengaged by the
operation of one switch. The circuit breaker shall be located in a compartment separated from any capacitors
or ballasts. Provide a set of factory wired distribution terminal blocks to provide for termination of all ballast
connection wiring.
LAMPS
A.
General: Lamps shall meet the following ANSI designations.
1.
2.
Tennis Courts, M47PA-1000BU.
Baseball Field: M48PC-1500BU.
B.
Type: Lamps shall be in accordance with the following.
'I
I. Tennis Courts: Metal halide, 1000 watts, 105,000 rated initial lumens.
2. Baseball Field: Metal halide, 1500 watts, 155,000 rated initiallumeris.
WIRING
A.
General: All wiring between the,fixtures and ballasts shall be furnished by the system manufacturer and shall
be contained within the crossarm or pole.
B,
Strain Relief: Wiring shall be supported at the top of the pole by a stainless steel wire mesh grip matched to
the size of the wiring bundle, The wire mesh grip shall be mechanically attached to the pole to an enclosed
SPORTS LIGHTING
16531-3
I
2.8
snap hook. There shall be not more than 13 conductors supported by a single wire mesh grip;
I
C.
Construction: Wiring shall consist of multiple 14 gauge THHN conductors and ~hall be continuously spiral
wound to prevent slippage of individual conductors. The wire harness shaH be bound with mylar wrap.
Abrasion protection bumpers shall'be provided within tWo feet of the wire mesh grip and then at not more than
10 foot intervals along the entire length of the wire harness. The bumpers shall be made of soft, durable
abrasive resistant material not less than 2 inches in diameter attached around the wire harness,
I
I
0,
Labeling: All conductors shall be color-coded and clearly labeled for easy fixture reference~
E.
Connectors: Each end of the wire harness shall be terminated into a plug-in with conductors sequenced
consistent with the pattern for the wiring connection identifier provided by the manufacturer.
I
FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS
I
A,
Wind-Load Strength of Total Support Assembly: The crossarm, reflector, and its attachment to the pole shall
be provided such that it will structurally withstand winds of 125 miles per hour with a 1.3 gust factor without
misalignment of any luminaire and without any damage to the crossanns or its components. Luminaires shall
be attached to the, crossarm by a minimum of two bolts, which shall be stainless steel and clear thermoset
polymer coated. There shall be no penetrations of the top or sides of the crossann.
I
I
B.
Alignment: The luminaires shall be aligned on the fixture support ilSsembly at the factory.
c.
Crossarm Finish: Crossarm components shall be hot dip galvanized to ASTM-A 123 standards after
fabrication to an average thickn~ss of not less than 2.5 mils.
I
D.
Crossarm Length: The maximum crossarm length shall be 60 inches to allow for easy routine maintenance
of fixtures from the pole.
I
2,9 POLES
2,10
I
A.
Construction: Poles shall be high strength low,alloy tapered tubular steel meeting ASTM-A595 standards,
and shall be hot-dip galvanized ip.side and out. All connections of pole sections shall be by slip fitting the top
section over the lower section by a length of at least 1,5 diameters of the pole section. The bottom section
shall be slip fitted to the concrete base.
I
B.
Bases: Pole bases shall be direct burial, centrifugally precast concrete type. Poles shaH have a hollow center
and shall be tapered. Handholes shaH be provided above and below grade.
I
GROUNDING
A.
Provide a ground rod at each pole. The ground rod shall be connected to the structure by a copper main down
conductor not less than #2 A WG. The main down conductor shaH extend from the base of the steel pole to
the ground rod. Main down conductors and bonding conductors shall maintain a horizontal or downward
coursing path. No bend of any conductor shall form an include,d angle of less than 90 degrees nor shall it have
a radius bend of less than 8 inches.
I
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3,1
INSTALLATION
I
A.
Luminaire Attachment with Adjustable Features or Aiming: Attach luminaires and supports to allow aiming
for indicated light distribution.
I
B.
Lamp luminaires with indicated lamps according to manufac~rer's written ,ins~ctions. Replace
malfunctioning lamps.
I
3.2 CONNECTIONS
I
16531-4
SPORTS LIGHTING
I
I
A.
B.
3,3
A.
B-
e.
D.
I
I
u
I
I
I
I
Tighten electrical connectors and tenninals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values.
Ground metal poles/support structures according to Division 16 Section "Grounding."
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled
components and equipment installation, and to assist in testing. ~~P,o.tt results in writing.
Inspect each installed unit for damage. Replace damaged ~nits.,
Provide instruments to make and record test results.
Tests and Observations: Verify nonnal operation of lighting units after installing luminaires and energizing
circuits with,nonnal power source, and as follows:
1.
2.
3.
Measure light intensities at night if specific illumination perfonnance is indicated.
, Check intensity and unifonnity of illumination.
Check excessively noisy ballasts.
E. Prepare a written report oftests, inspections, observations and verifications indicating and interpreting results.
F. ,Malfunctioning Fixtures and Components: Replace or repair, then retest Repeat procedure until units
operate properly.
3.4 CLEANING
Clean units after installation. Use methods and materials recommended by manufacturer.
I
END OF SECTION 16531
.A.
I
I
I
D
I
I
D
I
I
I
SPORTS LIGHTING
16531 - 5